Home

R&S SGS100A User Manual

1. nenn 217 SYSTEm SOFT Ware OP Ne GE ET 217 SYSTem SOFTware OPTion lt dir gt LICenses sa sse nn nsns nnns nans 218 SYSTem SOFTware OPTionsdir NAME nie tto enhn itane nh Ran sna cards andan Rma ie i n 218 i yYSPemiMMEMOREPATEEUSEI une 218 SS RRE 219 SYSTem EMODe Mode Enables and selects the Eco Mode With enabled eco mode EM1 the doubler stage in a 12 GHz instrument is permanently switched off to reduce power consumption and the maximum frequency is limited to 6 GHz Parameters Mode OFF EM1 RST OFF Example see chapter 11 1 1 Performing General Task for Instrument Setup on page 144 SYSTem ERRor ALL Queries the error event queue for all unread items and removes them from the queue The response is a comma separated list of error number and a short description of the error in FIFO order Positive error numbers are instrument dependent Negative error numbers are reserved by the SCPI standard SYSTem Subsystem Return values lt All gt string List of Error event_number Error event_description gt Device dependent info If the queue is empty the response is 0 No error Example SYST ERR ALL queries all entries in the error queue Response 0 no error No errors have occurred since the error queue was last read out Usage Query only SYSTem ERRor CODE ALL Queries all entries in the error queue and the
2. n SYSTem SOFTware OPTion lt dir gt LICenses Queries the list of option license counts Suffix lt dir gt 1 2 Defines the section 1 hardware 2 software Return values lt Licenses gt string Example See chapter 11 1 1 Performing General Task for Instrument Setup on page 144 Usage Query only Manual operation See Hardware Software WinlQSIM on page 96 SYSTem SOFTware OPTion lt dir gt NAME Queries the list of option names Suffix lt dir gt 1 2 Defines the section 1 hardware 2 software Return values lt Name gt string Example See chapter 11 1 1 Performing General Task for Instrument Setup on page 144 Usage Query only Manual operation See Hardware Software WinlQSIM on page 96 SYSTem MMEMory PATH USER Queries the user directory that means the directory the instrument stores user files on Return values lt PathUser gt string TEST Subsystem Example SYSTem MMEMory PATH USER Response var sgs Usage Query only SYSTem OSYStem Queries the operating system of the instrument Return values lt OperSystem gt string Example SYSTem OSYStem Response Linux Usage Query only 11 22 TEST Subsystem The TEST system contains the commands for performing the routines as well as for direct manipulation of the hardware assemblies TEST DIRect The self tests return a O if the te
3. 247 Event Status Register ESR and Event Status Enable Register ESE 248 Questionable Status Register STATus QUEStionable sess 248 Operation Status Register GTATusObPEhRaton sss 249 Application of the Status Reporting System 249 Service ROGUES lives E 249 e TEE 250 Query of an instrument status 250 Error QUEUS me nannte 250 Reset Values of the Status Reporting System 251 General Programming Recommendations nan nncnnnnnns 251 Telnet program examples 252 B sse ne Sicilias 258 j mee C 263 1 1 1 1 2 Key Features Preface The R amp S SGS RF Source is a signal generator intended either for the generation of IQ modulated signals or as a pure local oscillator LO source in the frequency range of 1 MHz to 12 75 GHz Optimized for use in automated test equipment ATE the instrument offers very fast settling times in an exceptionally small form factor and low power consumption The R amp S SGS can be equipped optionally with an active electronic step attenuator a high stability reference oscillator and LO connectors for coupling multiple generators to a common LO source Key Features The key features of the R amp S SGS include the following e Compact size and low power consumption e Remote connection via PCI Express minimizing time for setup Alternatively LAN or
4. CALibration IQModulator FULL Starts the adjustment of the UO modulator for the entire frequency range The UO mod ulator is adjusted with respect to carrier leakage UO imbalance and quadrature CALibration Subsystem Return values lt Modulator gt 0 1 Example See chapter 11 1 1 Performing General Task for Instrument Setup on page 144 Usage Query only Manual operation See Q Modulator on page 93 CALibration IQModulator LOCal Starts the adjustment of the UO modulator for the current frequency The UO modulator is adjusted with respect to carrier leakage I Q imbalance and quadrature Example See chapter 11 1 1 Performing General Task for Instrument Setup on page 144 Usage Query only Manual operation See Adjust UO Modulator at Current Frequency on page 92 CALibration LEVel MEASure Starts all adjustments which affect the level Return values lt Level gt 0 1 OFF ON Example See chapter 11 1 1 Performing General Task for Instrument Setup on page 144 Usage Query only Manual operation See Level on page 92 CALibration LEVel TEMPerature CALibration FREQuency TEMPerature CALibration IQModulator TEMPerature Queries the delta temperature since the last performed adjustment Return values Temperature string Usage Query only Manual operation See Delta Temperature on page 93 CALibration OEXTension lt OExtension gt This SC
5. TRIGCONN CION iia Mode IP address ee ee Monitoring COMISIOMS anne eek Same remote channel N NAN een ns 237 Network settings nenn nennen a 101 New instrument SCAN ier een aeg sn ee 59 A ee ere E aan 59 New password 199 NINE aine 237 NTRansiti n ae ee 246 N mberiotlieenessan use 96 Numeric values Specials eins 237 O A nan eee eines 72 85 Old password 99 OperatingSYSIEM E 20 Operation complete Remote aitor bi eessen 155 OperatioD mode EE 65 Option Hardware Software do Option CAI Options Identification remote n cnr tee 155 Output CONMECIOR aussen eo air na eie E 29 Output frequency Output queue Overlapping comtands u 241 Preventing s e ees tra eret ti oe reso een 242 P PACKING ss ore nr rcr rr he e ER tea 226 Parallel poll register enable Remote E ser 155 Parameters Block data 239 Ee taa 238 SCPI E 236 Special numeric values 237 String 239 Text 238 Units eroe EE eco ev tb etat iode ahd 237 PCle COMMOCUING rue en en 24 CONNMECION nine Ann nee en 28 PCle interface mode ss 101 PERF EET 56 Period SEIN ce ten 78 Phase coherence E M 116 Polarity Pulse Module 77 Power On Key sine tte ie EE n 26 Power switch 18 30 PRES Ex ee 244 Preset instrument settings 19 86 159 Protection tai dre hee eve rtr tet doas 97 Protocol
6. Usage Setting only ESE Value Event status enable Sets the event status enable register to the specified value The query returns the con tents of the event status enable register in decimal form Parameters Value Range 0 to 255 ESR Event status read Returns the contents of the event status register in decimal form and subsequently sets the register to zero Return values Contents Range 0 to 255 Usage Query only IDN Identification Returns the instrument identification Common Commands Return values lt ID gt Rohde amp Schwarz lt device type gt lt serial number gt lt firmware ver sion gt Example Rohde amp Schwarz SGS 1407 6004k02 000000 3 1 17 1 03 01 158 Usage Query only IST Individual status query Returns the contents of the IST flag in decimal form The IST flag is the status bit which is sent during a parallel poll Return values lt ISTflag gt 0 1 Usage Query only OPC Operation complete Sets bit 0 in the event status register when all preceding commands have been execu ted This bit can be used to initiate a service request The query form writes a 1 into the output buffer as soon as all preceding commands have been executed This is used for command synchronization OPT Option identification query Queries the options included in the instrument For a list of all available options and their description refe
7. 11 10 3 Examples In these examples the current instrument setting is stored in the file test savrcltxtin the directory var sgs Storing and Loading Current Settings 1 Store the current setting in an intermediate memory with the number 4 This setting can be called using command RCL and the associated number of the memory for example RCL 4 SAV 4 2 To store the settings in a file in a specific directory specify the complete path MMEM STOR STAT 4 var sgs test savrcltxt 3 To store the settings in a file in the default drive set the default drive and specify only the file name MMEM CDIR var sgs SAV 4 MMEM STOR STAT 4 test savrcltxt 4 Load the file test savrcltxt in the user directory MMEM LOAD STAT 4 var sgs test savrcltxt 5 Activate the instrument setting of the file test savrcltxt RCL 4 Working with Files and Directories 1 Read out all files in the specified directory MMEM CAT usbuser Response 127145265 175325184 test DIR 0 temp DIR 0 readme txt ASC 1324 state savrcltxt STAT 5327 waveform wv BIN 2342 the directory usbuser contains the subdirectories cest and temp as well as the files readme txt state savrcltxt and waveform wv which have different file types Tip To query only the subdirectories of the current or specified directory perform MMEM DCAT usbuser Response test temp MMEMory Subsystem To query only the numbe
8. iiaa coeant ceder rh inerat header 165 EXTension REMote S TAT69 nt An eee nen A RE D ea 164 EXTENSION SEL C Chis i cece ese sacs M AAE 166 EXTension SEND PEASE seinen een en se dame in ee en en einer eat leon e FORMat BORDer FORMat SREGister FORMADA TA A lin hehe ental ANSTr mernts AG Tivep STATE cient ara De 221 INS TrUmMeEMmS er el ris 221 INSTruments EACCess STATe INSTruments MARPIRG RIEE ii ia JINS TrUmMemMS LEE INSTruments REMote CHANNEL issis Dean INSTruments REMote NAME nennen SINS Truments SAN meer erae ge nen nennen nen ee aera aun INS Tr ments SCAN HNPRefX 222 2 ente da eels dh ener ee ee eed INSTruments SERla louis aa INS Truments PA TYPE EE LOCK aa A A ee dre esse dt HMM 158 MEET 175 MMEMory CATalog LENGth 172 MMEMo ry CAT AIO ics ana mnt spa hebt 171 ll ele ergi ee EE 172 MMEMON COP EE 173 IMMEMOn DATA E E a Bu ee he Er dre ca te ited ete dhs re seiten hie Meee 173 MMEM or DEATAl0g E eege ee sn 174 MMEMOorG DGAT alOG E 174 MMEMory DELete MMEM rY LOABESTAT Eee has ese got E FER e eurn cheese i EE gees MMEMOrv MDIRSCION e E MMEM uec MMEM MSIS LC iE A O EE EA ESE NA MMEMOry STORE STATO een ee OUTPut AFIXed RANGe LOWer OUTPULAFI
9. Fig 14 1 Graphical overview of the status registers hierarchy OPER Operation Status Summary Bit RQS MSS Service Request Generation ESB Standard Event Status Summary Bit MAV Message Available in Output Queue QUES Querstionable Status Summary Bit 2 Error Event Queue 1 0 not used Note This legend explains the abbreviations to the Status Byte Register The R amp S SGS uses the following status registers e Status Byte STB and Service Request Enable SRE see chapter 14 1 5 3 Status Byte STB and Service Request Enable Register SRE on page 247 Remote Control Basics e Standard Event Status i e the Event status Register ESR and the Event Status Enable ESE see chapter 14 1 5 4 Event Status Register ESR and Event Sta tus Enable Register ESE on page 248 e Questionable Status and Operation Status the SCPI status registers see chap ter 14 1 5 2 Structure of a SCPI Status Register on page 245 chapter 14 1 5 5 Questionable Status Register STATus QUEStionable on page 248 and chap ter 14 1 5 6 Operation Status Register STATus OPERation on page 249 e Output Queue The output queue contains the messages the instrument returns to the controller It is not part of the status reporting system but determines the value of the MAY bit in the STB and thus is represented in the overview Error Event Queue The error event queue contains all errors and events that have occurred
10. queries the Status Operation Condition register STATus OPERation ENABle Enable Sets the bits of the ENABle part of the STATus OPERation register This setting deter mines which events of the Status Event part are forwarded to the sum bit in the status byte These events can be used for a service request Parameters Enable string Example STAT OPER ENAB 32767 all events are forwarded to the sum bit of the status byte STATus Subsystem STATus OPERation EVENt lt Event gt Queries the content of the EVENt part of the STATus OPERation register This part contains information on the actions performed in the instrument since the last readout The content of the EVENt part is deleted after being read out Parameters lt Event gt string Example STAT OPER EVEN queries the STATus OPERation EVENt register STATus OPERation NTRansition lt Ntransition gt Sets the bits of the NTRansition part of the STATus OPERation register If a bit is set a transition from 1 to 0 in the condition part causes an entry to be made in the EVENt part of the register The disappearance of an event in the hardware is thus registered for example the end of an adjustment Parameters lt Ntransition gt string Example STAT OPER NTR 0 a transition from 1 to O in the condition part of the Status Opera tion register does not cause an entry to be made in the EVENt part STATus OPERation PTRa
11. Response USB 0x0AAD 0x0088 100021 INSTR SYSTem COMMunicate PCIexpress RESource Response PCIe 0x0AAD 4909 100021 INSTR ck ck ck ck EEE EEE 0k 00k 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 ck ck 2 ck 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 XX Query network settings tf KEK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKKKKKKKK KKK KKK SYSTem COMMunicate NETWork COMMon HOSTname Response rssgs100a100021 SYSTem COMMunicate NETWork IPADdress MODE Response AUTO SYSTem COMMunicate NETWork IPADdress Response 10 113 11 91 SYSTem COMMunicate NETWork IPADdress SUBNet MASK Response 255 255 0 0 SYSTem COMMunicate NETWork IPADdress GATeway Response 10 113 0 1 11 1 4 Programming Examples KEKE KKK KKK KKK KK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKKK ck ck ck KK KKK Changing network settings ck Ck ck ck ck KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KK KKKK KK KKK ck ck ck FH A A AH A KH SYSTem PROTect1 STATe OFF 123456 SYSTem COMMunicate NETWork COMMon HOSTname mySGS 8XSTem COMMunicate NETWork IPADdress MODE STATic SYSTem COMMunicate NETWork IPADdress 9 8 7 6 SYSTem COMMunicate NETWork RESTart KKEKKKK ck ck ck ck ck ckck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ckck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck kk Unlock th
12. enne 143 Programming Examples ss 2222 440040200G0000000000000000000 tesa nnn rii Fran RR Iria nun nina idas 143 Performing General Task for Instrument Setup 144 Generating an I Q Modulated Signal 146 Adjusting Network and Remote Channel Settings 148 Advanced Task for Optimizing Pertormance sssseesssesrirsseserrssrrrrrssrttrrnssrrrnssrnnnnnt 149 Enabling and Configuring an Extension Mode 150 Configuring Instruments in the R amp S SGMA GUI sse 152 Common AA eo 153 General Commands ss2 44sss202 44 4000000 0000002000 0400nnatddannnnandaannennannadnenanat d nereein 158 Preset CommandsS s 2 2222 3 45020u24000000B0000HHanaB HH Han Rania anne 159 CALibration Subsystem 2 2224 24 s222044440000060400000000m004 danna 160 CONNector SUDSYStOM AAA o 162 DIAGnostic SUDSYSt n ssssssisssssssssccesssdessessannnsressannate es se o bras a sona icr nung 163 11 8 11 9 11 10 11 10 1 11 10 2 11 10 3 11 10 4 11 11 11 12 11 13 11 14 11 15 11 16 11 17 11 18 11 19 11 20 11 21 11 22 11 23 11 24 12 12 1 12 2 13 13 1 13 2 13 2 1 13 2 2 13 3 13 4 14 EXTension SUDSyYSt n sssssssssssssssnssesrssnnnanesssntassessnsnbat eee anna en 164 FORMat Subsystem z202332 5200020000H00000000 4080000008 ccesastecicecssctedcavessnesteeeeastec se 167 MMEM Ory SUbSYSt m ss s nic ir 168 File Naming Convention
13. 10 Click the Cancel button to discard settings and to close the dialog How to Scan for New Instruments In the R amp S SGMA GUI main panel select Setup gt Instruments The Configure Instruments dialog opens Click the Scan button to trigger the instrument to scan all remote channel interfa ces for connected instruments Tip To limit the amount of the searched instruments and to speed up the scan process select Configure Instruments gt Scan LAN instruments with hostname prefix and enter the prefix the searched hostnames begin with The scan function searches only for instruments whose hostnames begin with the selected prefix All instruments which are connected to one of the available interfaces are switched on and are not locked are displayed in the Available Instruments list The R amp S SGMA GUI obtains all information for connecting to the instrument so further configuration is not necessary How to Activate Instruments for Control from the R amp S SGMA GUI In the R amp S SGMA GUI main panel select Setup gt Instruments The Available Instruments in the Configure Instruments dialog lists all instruments configured in the software Select the newly configured connected or deactivated instrument and set Active gt On to activate it Tip Only active instruments are displayed in the R amp S SGMA GUI main panel How to Edit Instruments In the R amp S SGMA GUI main panel select Setup gt Instrumen
14. Nunca conecte el enchufe en tomas de corriente sucias o llenas de polvo Introduzca el enchufe por completo y fuertemente en la toma de corriente La no observaci n de estas medidas puede provocar chispas fuego y o lesiones No sobrecargue las tomas de corriente los cables alargadores o las regletas de enchufe ya que esto podr a causar fuego o choques el ctricos En las mediciones en circuitos de corriente con una tensi n Ug gt 30 V se deber n tomar las medidas apropiadas para impedir cualquier peligro p ej medios de medici n adecuados seguros limitaci n de tensi n corte protector aislamiento etc Para la conexi n con dispositivos inform ticos como un PC o un ordenador industrial debe comprobarse que stos cumplan los est ndares IEC60950 1 EN60950 1 o IEC61010 1 EN 61010 1 v lidos en cada caso A menos que est permitido expresamente no retire nunca la tapa ni componentes de la carcasa mientras el producto est en servicio Esto pone a descubierto los cables y componentes el ctricos y puede causar lesiones fuego o da os en el producto Si un producto se instala en un lugar fijo se deber primero conectar el conductor de protecci n fijo con el conductor de protecci n del producto antes de hacer cualquier otra conexi n La instalaci n y la conexi n deber n ser efectuadas por un electricista especializado En el caso de dispositivos fijos que no est n provistos de fusibles interruptor auto
15. Remote command SOURce ROSCillator EXTernal SBANdwidth on page 203 Output Frequency Selects the output for the reference oscillator signal The available values depend on the input frequency and the reference oscillator source Table 7 1 Output Frequency Reference Oscillator Source Input frequency Output Frequency Internal 10 MHz 10 MHz 1 GHz External 10 MHz 10 MHz 1 GHz 100 MHz 100 MHz 1 GHz 1 GHz 1 GHz Remote command SOURce ROSCillator OUTPut FREQuency on page 202 REF LO Output Determines the signal provided at the output connector REF LO OUT See also chapter 9 6 How to Define the Signal at the REF LO OUT Connector on page 116 OFF No signal is provided LO The signal of the local oscillator LO is available at the REF LO OUT connector Level and Power On Settings REF The signal of the reference oscillator is available at the REF LO OUT connector Remote command CONNector REFLo OUTPut on page 162 Active Adjustment Data Displays whether the factory or user defined custom calibration value is currently used for the external calibration of the reference oscillator Adjusting the calibration value for the OCXO adjustments is a protected service proce dure that requires a Protection Level 2 password Adjustment Active Available only for Source gt Int Selects adjustment mode OFF The calibrated adjustment value of the internal reference frequency
16. The menu is divided into the password sections and the security settings section In the password section the passwords for securing a controlled access to the instrument are defined and changed A change of passwords for the operating system and security password requires the entry of the old and new password and the conformation of the new password All set tings are only accepted after the Change Password button is pressed O The settings of this dialog are not accessible over remote control e g SCPI com mands Security Setting Change User Password The user name and password are required for remote access to the instrument via VNC FTP or SAMBA Note It is highly recommended to change the default user password before connect ing the instrument to the network User Name Change User Password Indicates the user name used for access to the Linux operating system and valid for VNC FTP and SAMBA access Old Password Change User Password Enter the currently used user password The default password is instrument New Password Change User Password Enter the new user password Confirm Password Change User Password Enter the new password for conformation The new password is only valid after the Change Password button is pressed Change Password Change User Password Changes the password accordingly Change Security Password Note It is highly recommended to change t
17. To generate an I Q modulated signal with higher frequency In this example the R amp S SGU acts as an extension to the R amp S SGS extending its fre quency range to 40 GHz The figure 9 2 shows an example of the test setup How to Generate UO Signals with an R amp S SGS and an R amp S SGU Upconverter A OUT JQ OUT Analog Signal R amp S SGU LIN Q IN g t o E f e Ras soma R amp S SGMA GUI LAN Switch O Fig 9 2 Example of the test setup O For higher setting measuring speeds use a PCle switch and a PCle connections If a common reference frequency is required use the internal reference signal of the signal generator and provide it to the R amp S SGS and the connected signal analyzer e g the R amp S FSW 1 Connect the test equipment as shown on figure 9 2 a Connect the R amp S SGS the R amp S SGU and the controller to a LAN switch b Connect the I Q OUT of the base band signal source to the l Q IN of the R amp S SGU c Connect the I Q OUT of the R amp S SGS to the and Q connectors of the R amp S SGS d Connect the RF OUT of the the R amp S SGS to the LO IN of the R amp S SGU e Connect the TRIG connectors of the the R amp S SGS and the R amp S SGU f Connect the RF OUT of the R amp S SGU to the RF IN of the signal analyzer 2 Select SGMA GUI main panel gt R amp S SGS gt Extension Tip Steps 3 to 5 can be omitted if the R amp S SGS and a single R amp S SGU are
18. iun ore nti tn e teen oni ene EEA 186 SOURce hw CORRection DEXChange SELeGt rrt een 187 ESOURCE lt ShWZECORRECHN VALUE neci cci rte re rr i e Poet ot eec Eon rn e Eb oye E Eee ce 188 ele Real el ER HE SOURceshw PULM DELAy 1 err neret eer een rt regere nn rect T reni rh nenas SOURce lt hw gt PULM DOUBle DELay SOURce lt hw gt PULM DOUBle WIDTh ESOURGE lt hW gt TPULM MODE une da AAA SOURceshw PULM PERIOGd iato rrr tha erret it tree deta SOURCE lt RTE ROLAN HR SOURceshw PULM SOVURCe tnt tr tree A pie entente SOURCE shw gt PULMISTAT Ci cnn t terr buta ernannt aa SOURce lt hw gt PULM TRIGger EXTernal GATE POLarity SOURce hw PULM TRIGger EXTernal IMPedance nont tnr ene ten nnn SOURceshw5 PULM TRIGger EXTermal SLEOPe inen tnt ernennen SOURce lt hw PULMETRIGger lee SOURceshw PULM WIDTh ern rr rre ket an Index Symbols ORG anne 242 OPC 242 RST 251 WAI See 242 Ivar directory 168 180 Adjustment failed 2 220 182 Adjustment data missing 00 0 0 eee eee eee 229 183 Adjustment data invalid nn 229 200 Cannot access hardware 229 201 Hardware revision out of date 4229 202 Cannot access the EEPROM 229 203 Invalid EEPROM data 2229 204 Driver initialization fa
19. 2 Go to folder Build 3 Onthe command line enter cmake 4 Entermake Advanced Remote Control Using PCle Folder Build should now contain the executable SgsDriverDemo Building the example program Windows 1 Copy folders InstrumentDriver and SgsDriverDemo to your hard disk 2 Open SgsDriverDemo vcpro with Visual Studio 3 Build the program Running the example program gt On the command line enter SgsDri Where verDemo RESOURCESTRING cmd e RESOURCESTRING is the Visa resource string of your instrument e g TCPIP ipaddress 5025 SOCKET Or PCIE 0x162f 0x132e serialno INSTR Where ipaddress is the IP addre serialno is its serial number ss or hostname of your instrument and e cmdis an optional command see table The following table list the available commands Command Description Usage q Quit f value Set frequency Query frequency 1 value Set level 1 Query level r value Set RF state value 0 1 ON OFF r Query RF state If you enter an additional optional command SgsDriverDemo will execute it and enter a loop waiting for further commands Example TCPIP 10 111 11 44 5025 SOCK Lists the available commands 10 3 3 Connecting the Controller and th ET e Instrument A PCle connector is provided on the rear panel of the instrument Advanced Remote Control Using PCle Risk of devic
20. EXTension EXTension INSTruments REMote SERial on page 166 EXTension INSTruments SCAN STATe on page 165 EXTension REMote STATe on page 164 Scan Triggers a scan function and searches for instruments connected to the instrument via all of the available interfaces Remote command EXTension INSTruments SCAN STATe on page 165 Test Signal Connections The Test function triggers a test of all signal connections between the instrument and the extension The schematic diagram display the required physical signal connection for the current test setup and the connection state A faulty connection is marked with a red line crossing the drawn blue connection line as shown in figure 7 7 If your connection is marked as faulty check whether the cables are connected properly and if the connection cables are functioning properly Extension Loin SGS Fig 7 7 A faulty connection between an R amp S SGU and an R amp S SGS Note If your connection is marked as faulty check whether the cables are connected properly Check also ifthe connection cables are functioning properly Remote command n a Internal Adjustments 8 General Instrument Settings and Instrument 8 1 Setup This section describes the settings which do not directly affect signal generation gt To access these settings select SGMA GUI gt Instrument Name gt Setup and select the required dialog Diagnostic Test P Hard
21. Info Dialog and Messages in the Info Bar Parameter Description LEV Message level Messages referring to a logical component of R amp S SGMA GUI e g Unicode are marked in red color info messages are marked in black color The following levels might occur e Err Error message e Info Information message e Sys System message e Crit Critical message For detailed information on the message types see chapter 6 2 2 Understanding the Messages in the Info Bar on page 53 SCPI Indicates the SCPI error code Text A list of all currently permanent messages in the order of their occurrence i e the most recent message is displayed first The buttons in the lower part of the Info dialog provide quick access to some func tions for managing these messages For a detailed description on how to clear error messages or display a history of all messages refer to chapter 6 4 5 Managing Mes sages in the Info Dialog on page 64 Function Description Delete Clears the highlighted message This button is available only if the history of the messages is displayed Delete All Clears all messages This button is available only if the history of the messages is displayed Del volatile Clears all brief messages This button is available only if the history of the mes sages is displayed Show History Static Calls the list of all messages that have occurred since instrument switch on
22. SYSTem COMMunicate NETWork IPADdress SUBNet MASK on page 213 Default Gateway Displays the IP address of the default gateway To enter the default gateway manually select Static Address Mode Remote Channels This address identifies the router on the same network as the instrument that is used to forward traffic to destinations beyond the local network It is recommend that a connection of the instrument to the network is coordinated with the network administrator Connection errors may affect the entire network Remote command SYSTem COMMunicate NETWork IPADdress GATeway on page 212 Apply Applies the network settings to the instrument 8 9 Remote Channels The Remote dialog provides access to the settings for remote control gt To access this dialog select SGMA GUI gt Instrument Name gt Setup gt Remote Visa Resource Strings Indicates the VISA resource strings used for remote control of the instrument A sepa rate string is provided for remote control via the different interfaces Note For background information and description of the syntax of the VISA resource strings refer to the description of the corresponding interface in chapter 10 1 Remote Control Interfaces and Protocols on page 124 Remote command SYSTem COMMunicate HISLip RESource on page 214 SYSTem COMMunicate NETWork RESource on page 213 SYSTem COMMunicate SOCKet RESource on page 215 SYSTem COMMunicate USB RE
23. TcpClient TepClient void connectToServer string amp hostname int port void disconnect void transmit string amp txString void receive string amp rxString string getCurrentHostName const int getCurrentPort const private string currentHostName int currentPort int currentSocketDescr SockAddrStruct serverAddress HostInfoStruct currentHostInfo bool clientIsConnected int receiveBufferSize include lt netdb h gt include lt netinet in h gt include lt unistd h gt include TcpClient h TcpClient TcpClient currentHostName currentPort 0 currentSocketDescr 0 ServerAddress currentHostInfo NULL clientIsConnected false receiveBufferSize 1024 TcpClient TcpClient currentHostInfo NULL void TcpClient connectToServer string amp hostname int port Telnet program examples currentHostInfo gethostbyname hostname c str if currentHostInfo NULL currentHostName DI currentPort 0 currentHostInfo NULL clientIsConnected false printf error connecting host n currentHostName hostname currentPort port currentSocketDescr socket AF_INET SOCK_STREAM 0 if currentSocketDescr currentHostName um currentPort Dis currentHostInfo NULL clientIsConnected false printf can t create socket n serverAddress sin family currentHostInfo
24. enn 58 How to Automatically Add New Instruments to the SGMA GUI ssssssss 58 How to Manually Add New Instruments to the GGMA GU 58 How to Scan for New Instruments 59 How to Activate Instruments for Control from the R amp S SGMA GU nen 59 How to Edit Instruments nn nn nn nan nn cn cnn anar ener 59 How to Delete an Instrument ss 60 How to Delete all Instrumente mmm menn 60 How to Reserve the Instrument for Control 60 Finding Out the Default Hostname of the Instrument 61 6 4 4 6 4 5 7 1 7 2 7 3 7 3 1 7 3 2 7 4 7 5 7 5 1 7 5 2 7 6 7 6 1 7 6 2 7 6 3 Lal 7 8 7 8 1 7 8 1 1 7 8 1 2 7 8 1 3 7 8 2 7 8 3 7 9 7 10 8 1 8 2 8 3 8 4 8 5 8 6 Bidirectional Instrument Identification sse 61 Managing Messages in the Info Dialog 64 Signal Generator Settings 65 Operation MOQGe 9 nere dice co ker xxr ko parre EREF E FeERERIEE Feo naines 65 Frequency Phase Settings erre iet t esee ne iine nn aiuta anna 65 Local Oscillator EO Coupling 1e terrre retenti ntn nahen 67 Phase Coh rence 67 Local Oscillator LO Coupling Settings 68 Reference OScillatot cscs csicccccsstctcccssscctdccatcstcccassesectdevsecsetdccusscedcccassteececesssneetccstsenetecs 69 Level and Power On Settidgs omisiones 71 igo ates 72 ume u PP ran
25. lt serial number gt INSTR For details see chapter 10 1 3 USB Library VISA Interface on page 130 PCle Proprietary A PCle connector is located on the PCIe lt vendor ID gt lt product ID gt rear panel of the instrument lt serial number gt INSTR For details see chapter 10 1 4 PCI Library pciecontroller Express Interface on page 131 VISA is a standardized software interface library providing input and output functions to communicate with instruments A VISA installation on the controller is a prerequisite for remote control over LAN when using VXI 11 or HiSLIP protocol or USB However no VISA installation is necessary for remote control while using socket communication For more information about VISA refer to the user documentation Remote Control Interfaces and Protocols For information on how to query the VISA resource strings see chapter 8 9 Remote Channels on page 104 SCPI Standard Commands for Programmable Instruments SCPI commands are used for remote control Commands that are not taken from the SCPI standard follow the SCPI syntax rules The instrument supports the SCPI version 1999 The SCPI standard is based on standard IEEE 488 2 and aims at the standardi zation of device specific commands error handling and the status registers The tuto rial Automatic Measurement Control A tutorial on SCPI and IEEE 488 2 from John M Pieper R amp S order number 0002 3536 00 offers detail
26. od 130 PTRANSIION seen 246 PULM A P 78 Double pulse width mr Mode ll Period 5 iir ard rer aes 78 Pulse Length Width Pulse generator Pulse delay Le West Ao do NS Pulse modulation Double pulse delay needs 78 Double pulse width 578 Mode fn salt Period ens 78 Repetiti nifreguency u nen 78 Q o A A o yo 82 Quadrature ffset a 83 86 enmurs Status Questionim rk scsi nna otra nk t ia pa inen ta neta 239 240 Questionable status register en 248 249 Quotation mark ete aces critt entente tienen 239 R Rackm ouniing kuss O A seele Ready State nenne Recall instrument settings ai Recall intermediate ccccnnccocccnncconocooocncnncnononanonncnccnnns Recommendations remote control programming esses 251 Reducing power consumption seeseseses 106 REF e Le 29 REF EXT Keynes maitre tee 27 REF LO OUT connector 116 Reference frequency adjustment mode 71 Reference Oscillator ici nee 69 acc TT 244 Remote control BASICS anne nenn ee eae 231 Connect 124 Programming examples 143 Rename AA iste Reset delta phase display Reset instrument settings 0 eee erecta Reset values REMO ler a 156 Resource string VISA savers Resource strings Restart 2 e Restart net
27. on page 114 and e chapter 9 5 How to Configure the Local Oscillator LO Coupling Source on page 115 4 Inthe Frequency Phase dialog configure the frequency settings 5 Select the SGMA GUI gt Instrument Name gt Level gt RF Level gt Level and set the RF Level In the same dialog configure the further Level and Power On settings 6 Select the SGMA GUI main panel gt Instrument Name gt UO settings gt Analog Impairments and enable UO impairments How to Generate UO Signals with an R amp S SGS and an R amp S SGU Upconverter In the I Q settings gt General dialog set State gt On to enable the UO modulator 7 Select SGMA GUI main panel gt RF gt On or press the RF ON key on the front panel of the instrument The RF ON key is green The I Q modulated signal is output at the RF connector of the instrument O How to generate an UO modulated signal with higher RF Ifthe R amp S SGS is equiped with one of the options R amp S SGS B112 B112V you can connect an extension an R amp S SGU to it and thus extend the frequency range of the generated l Q signal to 40 GHz for instance Refer to chapter 9 2 How to Generate UO Signals with an R amp S SGS and an R amp S SGU Upconverter on page 111 for more information 9 2 How to Generate I Q Signals with an R amp S SGS and an R amp S SGU Upconverter o Options R amp S SGS B112V and R amp S SGU B120V B140V are required for the UO mod ulation
28. re Moc SGS 100004 lt 1 000 000 000 000 cH 8 an 8 Select Test Signal Connections gt Test to trigger a check of all required signal connections Setups for Connecting an R amp S SGS and an R amp S SGU The diagram displays the connection state of the tested signal connections Ifthe test connections are correct shown by an uninterrupted blue line you can start using the R amp S SGS and the R amp S SGU in extension mode Tip If your connection is marked as faulty a red line is crossing the blue connec tion line check whether the cables are connected properly Check also ifthe con nection cables are functioning properly SGU Lo in SGS Fig 5 6 A faulty connection between an R amp S SGU and an R amp S SGS 5 2 3 Connection with a PCle Switch The R amp S SGS and the R amp S SGU can be connected through a PCle switch as shown in figure 5 7 This setup is recommended for achieving the highest setting measuring speeds Introduction to the Instrument Functions PCle switch connection of an R amp S SGS and an R amp S SGU PCIe 4 R amp S SGS RF OUT R amp S SGMA GUI Pcie PCle zem Switch GS nonpaascHwanz SOMA UPCONVERTER R amp S SGU LOIN Application Program Control Fig 5 7 Connection of an R amp S SGS and an R amp S SGU through a PCle switch 1 Connect the PCle switch to a switched off computer with a single lane PCle cable 2 Connect the R amp S S
29. 0 0 0 0 to ff ff ff ff Example SYSTem COMMunicate NETWork IPADdress 7 8 9 10 sets the IP address of the instrument Manual operation See IP Address on page 103 SYSTem COMMunicate NETWork IPADdress MODE Mode Selects manual or automatic setting of the IP address Parameters Mode AUTO STATic RST AUTO Example SYSTem COMMunicate NETWork IPADdress MODE AUTO the IP address is assigned automatically DHCP Manual operation See Address Mode on page 103 SYSTem COMMunicate NETWork MACaddress lt MacAddress gt Queries the MAC address of the network adapter Return values lt MacAddress gt string SYSTem Subsystem Example SYST COMM NETW MAC queries the MAC address Usage Query only SYSTem COMMunicate NETWork STATus Queries the network configuration state Return values lt State gt 0 1 OFF ON Usage Query only SYSTem COMMunicate NETWork RES Tart Restarts the network connection to the instrument terminates the connection and sets it up again Example SYSTem COMMunicate NETWork RESTart Usage Event SYSTem COMMunicate NETWork COMMon HOSTname lt Hostname gt Sets the individual host name of the R amp S SGS Note it is recommended that you do not change the host name in order to avoid prob lems with the networdk connection However if you change the host name be sure to use an unique name The host name is a protected parameter To change it first dis
30. 1E 3 RST 0 Example See chapter 11 1 2 Generating an UO Modulated Signal on page 146 Manual operation See Gain Imbalance on page 85 SOURce IQ 1MPairment LEAKage l lt I gt SOURce IQ IMPairment LEAKage Q lt Q gt Sets the carrier leakage amplitude for the Q signal component Parameters lt Q gt float Range 5 to 5 Increment 0 01 RST 0 Default unit PCT Example See chapter 11 1 2 Generating an UO Modulated Signal on page 146 Manual operation See Offset on page 85 SOURce IQ IMPairment QUADrature ANGLe Angle Sets the quadrature offset for the digital UO signal SOURce IQ Subsystem Parameters lt Angle gt float Range 8 to 8 Increment 0 01 RST 0 Default unit DEG Example See chapter 11 1 2 Generating an UO Modulated Signal on page 146 Manual operation See Quadrature Offset on page 86 SOURce IQ IMPairment STATe State Activates deactivates the three impairment or correction values LEAKage QUADra ture and IQRatio for the baseband signal prior to input into the UO modulator Parameters State 0 1 OFF ON RST 0 Example See chapter 11 1 2 Generating an UO Modulated Signal on page 146 Manual operation See State on page 85 SOURce IQ CREStfactor lt CrestFactor gt Sets the crest factor of the IQ modulation signal Parameters lt CrestFactor gt float Range 0 to 35 Inc
31. Advanced Remote Control Using PCle 3 On the command line enter make The driver sgshost ko is automatically built 4 Entermake install Device nodes sgsX are created under the folder dev X from 0 to 31 The module sgshost is loaded 5 Enter 1smod to verify the module Making Shared Libraries Accessible Two library files per operating system are provided on the CD included in the delivery e for Linux operating system libsocketcontroller soand libpciecontroller so e for Windows operating system SocketController dll and PCIeController dll These libraries act as the dynamic link libraries for programs using the socket or PCle interface Linux operating system gt To make the libraries accessible perform one of the following a Append the environment variable LD_LIBRARY_PATH with the path of these two files e g by changing the etc environment file b Move these two files to usr lib or 1ib directory Windows operating system gt To make the libraries accessible perform one of the following a Copy these two files to the folder of your executable b Copy these two files to the WINDOWS system32 folder Building a Program The help file xzssgs vxi chm shows all functions of the instrument which you can use in your own remote control program Additionally an example file is provided SgsDriverDemo c Building the example program Linux 1 Copy folders InstrumentDriver and SgsDriverDemo to your hard disk
32. Application Program Fig 10 3 Remote control program using instrument driver VISA available Remote Control Interfaces and Protocols Protocol Remote Control Program Socket rssgs init TCPIP rssgs100a100010 5025 SOCKET rssgs SetFrequency 2e9 VXI 11 rssgs init TCPIP rssgs100a100010 inst0 INSTR rssgs SetFrequency 2e9 HiSLIP rssgs init TCPIP rssgs100a100010 hislip0 INSTR rssgs SetFrequency 2e9 USBTMC rssgs init USB 0x0aad 0x0088 1000010 INSTR rssgs SetFrequency 2e9 PCle rssgs init PCIe 0x162f 0x132e 1000010 INSTR rssgs SetFrequency 2e9 e Remote control program using instrument driver VISA not available Protocol Proprietary Socket e pcie socket Instrument Driver Application Program Fig 10 4 Remote control program using instrument driver VISA not available Protocol Remote Control Program Socket rssgs init TCPIP rssgs100a100010 5025 SOCKET rssgs SetFrequency 2e9 PCle rssgs init PCIe 0x162f 0x132e 1000010 INSTR rssgs SetFrequency 2e9 10 1 2 LAN Interface To be integrated in a LAN the instrument is equipped with a LAN interface consisting of a connector a network interface card and protocols For remote control via a network the PC and the instrument must be connected via the LAN interface to a common network with TCP IP network proto
33. EMI Suppression Electromagnetic interference EMI may affect the measurement results To suppress generated Electromagnetic Interference EMI e Use suitable shielded cables of high quality For example use double shielded RF and LAN cables Note USB cables are of varying and often poor quality Therefore check the qual ity of each individual USB cable as described in the service manual e Always terminate open cable ends e Note the EMC classification in the data sheet Unpacking and Checking the Instrument Check the equipment for completeness using the delivery note and the accessory lists for the various items Check the instrument for any damage If there is damage imme diately contact the carrier who delivered the instrument Make sure not to discard the box and packing material Packing material Retain the original packing material If the instrument needs to be transported or ship ped at a later date you can use the material to protect the control elements and con nectors Putting into Operation 2 1 3 2 1 4 Risk of damage during transportation and shipment Insufficient protection against mechanical and electrostatic effects during transportation and shipment can damage the instrument e Always make sure that sufficient mechanical and electrostatic protection is provi ded e When shipping an instrument the original packaging should be used If you do not have the original packaging use sufficient
34. Instrument Name gt Level gt RF Level This dialog comprises settings like the RF level and level limit Mode Allows to optimize the RF output signal for applications where improved harmonic dis tortion or improved wideband noise is required Normal In normal mode the generator provides an RF output signal with high signal to noise ratio as well as low distortion according to the data sheet Low Noise This setting forces the generator to optimize the signal to noise ratio Low Distortion In this mode the generator reduces distortions of the RF signal to a minimum Remote command SOURce POWer LMODe on page 192 Offset Sets a level offset Level and Power On Settings This value represents the level shift of a downstream instrument as for example an attenuator or an amplifier and is indicated in the status bar of the display It does not change the level at the RF output Remote command SOURce POWer LEVel IMMediate OFFSet on page 194 Setting Characteristic Selects the characteristic for the level setting For some general applications the instrument operation can be optimized by selecting one of the predefined level setting characteristics Auto The instrument provides the highest dynamic range and the fastest setting times according to the data sheet The RF signal is shortly blanked during the moment the step attenua tor is switched on Uninterru
35. Setup gt Remote gt Remote Channels gt Device Identify The green LAN LED on the front panel of the instrument blinks e Press the ID key on the instrument s front panel The Edit Instrument dialog of the respective instrument opens Configuring a CW Signal with the R amp S SGS100A Web GUI The R amp S SGS100A Web GUI is an alternative way to operate the R amp S SGS There is no installation needed It can be used with all devices and operating systems including tablets and smart phones which have one of the following web browsers installed e Mozilla Firefox e Google Chrome e Microsoft Internet Explorer 9 or later In order to connect to the R amp S SGS from an external device both of them must have access to the same network e use a shared network The feature set of the R amp S SGS100A Web GUI is limited to the most common settings needed especially for modifying the output signal For additional actions like firmware updates or adjustments please use the R amp S SGMA GUI You can operate the R amp S SGS100A Web GUI and the R amp S SGMA GUI simultane ously Furthermore you can enable the Update function upper right corner to allow an automatic update of the settings shown in the R S SGS100A Web GUI if the set tings were changed via other software As a prerequisite for this example the R amp S SGS has to be connected to the same net work as the device used for controlling the instrument Additionally one
36. Siedlungsabfall entsorgt werden sondern m ssen getrennt gesammelt werden Weitere Informationen siehe Seite 7 gt bb smab gt DP gt Warnung vor Laserstrahl Produkte mit Laser sind je nach ihrer Laser Klasse mit genormten Warnhinweisen versehen Laser k nnen aufgrund der Eigenschaften ihrer Strahlung und aufgrund ihrer extrem konzentrierten elektromagnetischen Leistung biologische Sch den verursachen F r zus tzliche Informationen siehe Kapitel Betrieb Punkt 7 1171 0000 41 08 Seite 2 Grundlegende Sicherheitshinweise Signalworte und ihre Bedeutung Die folgenden Signalworte werden in der Produktdokumentation verwendet um vor Risiken und Gefahren zu warnen kennzeichnet eine unmittelbare Gef hrdung mit hohem Risiko die Tod oder GEFAHR schwere K rperverletzung zur Folge haben wird wenn sie nicht vermieden wird kennzeichnet eine m gliche Gef hrdung mit mittlerem Risiko die Tod oder A WARNUNG schwere K rperverletzung zur Folge haben kann wenn sie nicht vermieden wird kennzeichnet eine Gefahrdung mit geringem Risiko die leichte oder mittlere K rperverletzungen zur Folge haben k nnte wenn sie nicht vermieden wird weist auf die M glichkeit einer Fehlbedienung hin bei der das Produkt ACHTUNG Schaden nehmen kann Diese Signalworte entsprechen der im europ ischen Wirtschaftsraum blichen Definition f r zivile Anwendungen Neben dieser Definition k nnen
37. address will be automatically assigned to the instrument How to Switch Between the Operating States 9 9 How to Switch Between the Operating States The figure 9 4 gives an overview of the operating states of the instruments and how to trigger the switch over between them Booting RESTart Setup gt Restart RESTart POWER ON STANDBY Standby POWER SWITCH ON Fig 9 4 Operating states RESTart STANdby Setup gt Standby Setup gt Restart Shut Down Instru ments and Exit POWER ON STANDBY POWER SWITCH ON OFF Shut Down Instruments and Exit POWER ON STANDB POWER SWITCH OFF Setup gt Standby SCPI commands R amp S SGMA GUI controls Hardkey controls on the front rear panel ofthe instrument The table 9 2 provides a short description of the operating states and their indication Table 9 2 Indication of the operating states Operating State Description Indication Off The instrument is shut down All LEDs on the front panel of the instrument are off Booting The instrument boots the operating system and starts the instrument firmware If the previous session was terminated reg ularly the instrument uses the last setup With the relevant instrument settings The green POWER ON STAND BY key blinks How to Switch Between the Operating States Operating Description Indication State Standby The s
38. and enable RF gt State gt On The extension adopts these values and states automaticaly To confirm disable the Extension gt Available Instruments gt Extension Name gt Select gt Off and compare the values of the parameters SGMA GUI gt Extension Instrument Name gt Freq Lev Extension Connected The connection state indicator visualizes the state of selected extension e grey the connection to the extension is not activated Extension gt Available Instruments gt Instrument gt Select gt Off e green the extension is connected to the master instrument and can be manually and remotely operated e red the extension is in standby or locked state or is performing a time consuming operation Available Instruments Lists all available instruments that may serve as an extension to the R amp S SGS Each instrument is represented by Symbolic Name Alias name of the instrument as it is defined in the main panel of R amp S SGMA GUI Channel Hardware channel Socket LAN USB or PCle used by the extension as remote control channel Select State of the remote connection to the extension The R amp S SGMA GUI indicates an activated extension mode as fol lows en nn Extension to SGS 100014 Remote command EXTension BUSY STATe on page 166 EXTension INSTruments NAME on page 164 INSTruments REMote CHANnel on page 165 EXTension INSTruments REMote LAN NAME on page 165 I I
39. can be specified via an allocated step command for each parameter which can be set via UP DOWN e INF NINF Remote Control Basics INFinity Negative INFinity NINF represent the numeric values 9 9E37 or 9 9E37 respectively INF and NINF are only sent as instrument responses e NAN Not A Number NAN represents the value 9 91E37 NAN is only sent as a instru ment response This value is not defined Possible causes are the division of zero by zero the subtraction of infinite from infinite and the representation of missing values Example Setting command SENSe LIST FREQ MAXimum Query SENS LIST FREQ Response 3 559 Queries for special numeric values The numeric values associated to MAXimum MINimum DEFault can be queried by adding the corresponding mnemonics to the command They must be entered follow ing the quotation mark Example SENSe LIST FREQ MAXimum Returns the maximum numeric value as a result Boolean Parameters Boolean parameters represent two states The ON state logically true is represen ted by ON or a numeric value 1 The OFF state logically untrue is represented by OFF or the numeric value 0 The numeric values are provided as the response for a query Example Setting command HCOPy DEV COL ON Query HCOPy DEV COL Response 1 Text parameters Text parameters observe the syntactic rules for mnemonics i e they can be entered using a
40. s et autoris s par Rohde amp Schwarz En cas de remplacement de pi ces concernant la s curit notamment interrupteur d alimentation transformateur d alimentation r seau ou fusibles celles ci ne doivent tre remplac es que par des pieces d origine Apr s chaque remplacement de pieces concernant la s curit une v rification de s curit doit tre effectu e contr le visuel v rification du conducteur de protection mesure de la r sistance d isolement et du courant de fuite essai de fonctionnement Cela permet d assurer le maintien de la s curit du produit Batteries et accumulateurs cellules Si les instructions concernant les batteries et accumulateurs cellules ne sont pas ou sont insuffisamment respect es cela peut provoquer des explosions des incendies et ou des blessures graves pouvant entrainer la mort La manipulation de batteries et accumulateurs contenant des lectrolytes alcalins par exemple cellules de lithium doit tre conforme la norme EN 62133 1171 0000 43 08 Page 6 Consignes de securite fondamentales Les cellules ne doivent tre ni d mont es ni ouvertes ni r duites en morceaux Ne jamais exposer les cellules ou batteries la chaleur ou au feu Ne pas les stocker dans un endroit o elles sont expos es au rayonnement direct du soleil Tenir les cellules et batteries au sec Nettoyer les raccords sales avec un chiffon sec et propre Ne jamais court circuiter les cellules ou batteri
41. 1 nie aan 199 SOURCES PUEM POLjry estas cea tate RECO ta EAE AAE ten 199 SOURce shw PULM SOURCE ireira u en ann naar dena 199 ESOURGE lt hW gt PULM ST TE use ae aa 200 SOURce lt hw gt PULM TRIGger EXTernal GATE POLarity renerrreeene 200 SOURce lt hw gt PULM TRIGger EXTernal IMPedance 200 SOURce lt hw gt PULM TRIGger EXTernal SLOPe 201 ESOURCeshwe PULM TRIGGER MODE ici aan 201 ESOURCeShwerPUEMSWID TO ee 201 SOURce PULM Subsystem SOURce lt hw gt PULM DELay lt Delay gt Sets the pulse delay Parameters lt Delay gt float Range 0 to 100s Increment 10 ns RST 10 ns Example PULM DEL 13 us 13 us elapse after a trigger before the first pulse is generated Manual operation See Pulse Delay on page 78 SOURce lt hw gt PULM DOUBle DELay Delay Sets the delay from the start of the first pulse to the start of the second pulse Parameters Delay float Range 40 ns to 100s Increment 10ns RST 1ns Example PULM DOUB DEL 22 us 22 us elapse between the beginning of the first pulse and the beginning of the second pulse in double pulse mode Manual operation See Double Pulse Delay on page 78 SOURce lt hw gt PULM DOUBle WIDTh Width Sets the width of the second pulse in case of double pulse generation Example PULM DOUB WIDT 33 us sets a width of 33 us for th
42. 128 Serial StElbig sr eh Era na cent asa 104 UE 104 bodNeereco EIS 130 WEA a A ERS 124 W Wait Remote een 157 W rningS sidad ld 227 WHITE S ACO nee 239 Z Zeroconf APIA Protocol terrre 23
43. 18 118 E M 26 Startup complete eere eee ete reines 216 State VO modulation zn Impairments Pulse modulation Static IP address lost Connection san 103 Status el 250 Status byte E ue 154 157 status byte STB eee 247 Status messages AMERO nennen 227 Status registers az ele e EE 246 ENABIE A een 246 EVENt 246 model 245 NTRansition 246 parts sum 245 PTRansition 246 Status reporting system ns 243 Application een 249 Common commands 22053 STRACHE ee 244 Storing 226 Subnet mask ii 103 SUMXES cirrosis teg 234 Synchronization bandwidth esses 70 Syntax elements SEPI MT 239 Systemidirecl ry un nennen 168 T Telnet seele 124 TRIG connector Signa aisne eek 79 80 Trigger Conneclor E 30 Event remote ett reads 157 Trigger connector mode een 79 80 Trigger mode Pulse modulatior te cmn tenet 79 U Update package up S 122 Updating R amp S SGMA GUI nennen 21 USB Tonnecling 2 nie en Connector S Interfaces eric USB device 1 2 n rrr nti ica USB install See Service Manual its 122 User name V WISA HiSLIP string LAN string A oer Perte ert etai ee Porte OR Ru Resource SUING a t piena te ned tos ao
44. 5 Status Reporting System on page 243 for detailed information STATus Subsystem RST on page 156 has no effect on the status registers Value ranges e Queries return the current value of the respective register which permits a check of the device status Return values A decimal value in the range 0 to 32767 2 1 e The configuration commands set the respective register thus determining which status changes of the R amp S SGS cause the status registers to be changed Setting values A decimal value in the range 0 to 32767 7215 1 SHRED EE Kee le Te EE 204 SC HR N T EI Ee RE LEE 204 STATUS O RAL nennen Rae pn ea eth Equo ale ae 205 i STAT Us OPERatIomNTRAnsiHopi cuu eda dct A aan an 205 STATUS OPERalonPTRansilO coin 205 STATUS PRESO dais 205 STATUS QUEStionable CONDIition iii 206 I STATus QUEStlenable Eessen 206 STATUS ee EE A EE 206 STATUS QUEStionable NTRansition nennen 206 SI STATUSsIOUEStonable FT RArisltlOW 2 32 2 1 tained i ben aaa aan 207 STATUS QUEUES NEXT iced rune ae 207 STATus OPERation CONDition Condition Sets the content of the CONDition part of the STATus OPERation register This part contains information on the action currently being performed in the instrument The content is not deleted after being read out because it indicates the current hardware status Parameters Condition string Example STATus OPERation CONDition
45. Enter the Security Password 5 Confirm the update with Accept The software transfers the firmware file and automatically starts the update proce dure During the update the message Updating Firmware is displayed in the Info line The update process is indicated by an LED running light Note The update procedure requires a restart of the instrument The restart is per formed automatically The instrument is not accessible during that time How to Install anew Firmware Version on the Instrument 6 Wait until the message Updating Firmware disappears and the update is comple ted The green POWER ON STAND BY LED is on Tip Calibration Error If the Info line shows the message Calibration Error select SGMA GUI main panel gt Instrument Name gt Setup gt Internal Adjustments gt Adjust All to trigger internal adjustment 7 If required install the new R amp S SGMA GUI For detailed description refer to chapter 2 3 1 Installing the R amp S SGMA GUI Soft ware on an External PC on page 21 8 If the instrument and the controller PC are connected over the PCIe interface and the external PC does not support hot plugging it is required to restart the external PC Firmware Update through a Session Control Protocol SCP instrument it is mandatory that the new instrument s firmware is installed prior to the o If an update to a new firmware version is required for both the R amp S SGMA GUI and the update of
46. Fast Settings The Socket interface can be utilized not only to transfer text messages e g SCPI com mands but also to carry register based remote control messages The latter mode is called fast settings mode The Fast Socket communication is based on the Ethernet protocol which does not support routing Therefore a controller PC can only control devices within its own network segment using the Fast Socket method To use the advantage of the fast settings the following prerequisites must be fulfilled e On Windows operating systems the fast socket driver must be installed e The application program must be run with root administrator rights e The fast settings must be enabled by means of the function rssgs_useFastSettings see also chapter 10 3 4 Enabling Fast Settings on page 138 The instrument driver will automatically use the fast settings method whenever possi ble currently only for the parameters frequency level RF state IQ modulator state IQ wideband state and will send SCPI messages in all other cases 10 4 1 Setting Up a Remote Control Connection via Fast Socket Windows Operating Systems To set up a remote control connection via Fast Socket for Windows operating systems perform the following steps 1 Connect the controller and the instrument see chapter 2 3 2 Connecting a Remote PC via LAN on page 22 2 Install the protocol driver to the controller see chapter 10 4 2 Installing the Proto col Drive
47. If a bit is set a transition from 1 to O in the condition part causes an entry to be made in the EVENt part of the register Parameters lt PTransition gt string Example STAT OPER PTR 32767 all transitions from 0 to 1 in the condition part of the Sta tus Questionable register cause an entry to be made in the EVENt part STATus QUEue NEXT Queries the oldest entry in the error queue and then deletes it Positive error numbers denote device specific errors and negative error numbers denote error messages defined by SCPI If the error queue is empty O No error is returned The command is identical to SySTem ERRor NEXT on page 210 Return values lt Next gt string Example STATUS QUEue queries the oldest entry in the error queue Response 0 no error no errors have occurred since the error queue was last read out Usage Query only 11 21 SYSTem Subsystem The SYSTem subsystem contains a series of command s for general functions which do not directly affect signal generation SC HR Elle annees E 208 SNS TE MERA ne nannten 208 SYS TemERRONCODE ALEA nn en aan 209 SYSTemiERRorCODEENEXT ooo A coto aSa eaaet 209 SYSTEM ERROR 1813 rs 210 RN EK EE scio dut 210 SYSTEMS ERRO ORDERS 210 SYSTEM VERSION ai acid 211 SYSTem Subsystem SYSTem COMMunicate NETWork PADQress uas iut rca rta nee 211 SYSTem COMMunicate NETWork IPADdress MODE 211 SYSTem COMMuni
48. KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KK FH A kv KH A k A AA SOURce ROSCillator SOURce INTernal KKEKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KK KKK Enable internal LO source KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK AA SOURCe LOSCillator SOURce INT KKEKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK EEE EEK A A A KKK KKK ck kk Define and enable impairments Enable modulation KKEKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK EEE EEE KK KKK KKK SOURce IQ IMPairment LEAKage I 1 SOURce IQ IMPairment LEAKage Q 1 SOURce IQ IMPairment IQRatio MAGNitude 1 Sets the gain imbalance to 1 SOURce IQ IMPairment IQRatio MAGNitude Response 0 087 dB SOURce IQ IMPairment QUADrature ANGLe 2 SOURce IQ WBSTate ON SOURce 1Q CREStfactor 0 05 SOURce IQ IMPairment STATe ON SOURCe IQ STATe ON KEKE KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KK KKK KKK EEK Enable output of the generated signal at the RF connector KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KK FH A k KH k FH A KH ko kx OUTPut STATe ON ck ck ck ck ck KKK KK KKK KKK KKK KKK KK KKK KKK KKK KK KK KK KK KK KKK KK TH TA KH A FH ko sk ko AH KH AH kc ko ko ko ko Unlock the instrument KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK FH A AK AH A FH A AA UNL 72349234 Programming Ex
49. KKK KKK TH ck ck ck ck A AH AH KH UNL 72349234 11 1 5 Enabling and Configuring an Extension Mode In the following example we assume that a remote PC is connected to the instrument the remote PC and the instrument are switched on and a connection between them is established the required application program is running on the remote PC We assume that at least one R amp S SGU is connected to the instrument directly or over net work switch i e there is a remote control connection between the instrument and the extension we assume that the required signal connections between the instrument and the extension are established too ff KKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK Reset instrument first ck ck ck ck ck 0k 0k 0k 0k 0k 0k 0k 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 ck ck 2 ck 2 ck ck 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 EX EX RST CLS SYSTem PRESet RESTart SYSTem FPReset Programming Examples KKEKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKKKK KKK KKK KKK Lock the instrument to the controller ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck 0k ck 0k 0k 0k 0k 00k KK KKK KK KK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK TH ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck TA A A A A A A KR LOCK 72349234 Lock instrument to avoid interference by other controllers Use an arbitrary number Response 1 Request granted i e the instrument is locked Abort program if re
50. Output of high signal to mark the transition state when frequency and level change Pulse Video Out Output of the internally generated pulse video modulating signal The video signal level corresponds to the RF envelope Pulse Mod Ext Trigger Input for an external trigger signal used to trigger the pulse genera tor Pulse Mod Ext Source Input for an externally provided pulse modulation signal Used when an external pulse modulator source is provided at the connector Remote command CONNector TRIGger OMODe on page 163 Trigger Mode Selects between continuos pulse modulation or pulse modulation triggered by an exter nal signal Auto generates the modulation signal continuously Ext Single generates the signal each time an external trigger event occurs Trigger Connector Settings Ext Gated generates the signal triggered by an external gate signal Remote command SOURce lt hw gt PULM TRIGger MODE on page 201 Ext Trigger Input Slope available only for Trigger Mode gt Ext Triggered Sets the polarity of the active slope of an applied external trigger signal Remote command SOURce lt hw gt PULM TRIGger EXTernal SLOPe on page 201 Gate Input Polarity available only for Trigger Mode gt Ext Gated Sets the polarity of the active slope of an applied gate signal Remote command SOURce lt hw gt PULM TRIGger EXTernal GATE POLarity on page 200 7 7 Trigger
51. S SGS100A Signal Generator Settings E zn SSeS SS 7 10 Extension Depending on the installed option your R amp S SGS generates an RF signal with fre quency range up to 12 75 GHz Some test cases however require even higher fre quencies A general setup would thus include an upconverter connected to the signal generator and you would have to manually and or remotely control both the signal gen erator and the upconverter The R amp S SGS equipped with one of the options R amp S SGS B112 B112V provides the build in extension mode for controlling the R amp S SGU upconverter If you connect an R amp S SGU to the R amp S SGS this upconverter acts as an extension to your instrument extending its frequency range to 20 GHz for instance Refer to chapter 5 2 Setups for Connecting an R amp S SGS and an R amp S SGU on page 37 for a description of the possi ble setups The extension mode provides the following advantages e Simplified calibration of the R amp S SGU and single point of control In this setup a controller does not need to access the extension i e the R amp S SGU directly Instead the R amp S SGS acts as a controller to it and depending on the required output signal parameters performs all required settings automatically The signal generator settings of the extension are disabled for direct configuration in the R amp S SGMA GUI However you can still remotely control the extension using the corresponding SCPI commands e Ex
52. SOURce Subsystem SOURce OPMode lt OpMode gt Sets the operation mode Parameters lt OpMode gt NORMal BBBYpass NORMal normal operation BBBYpass Baseband bypass mode RST NORMal Example See chapter 11 1 2 Generating an UO Modulated Signal on page 146 Manual operation See Operation Mode on page 65 SOURce FREQuency CWIFIXed Cw Sets the RF frequency at the RF output connector of the selected instrument Parameters lt Cw gt float RST 1 GHz Example See chapter 11 1 2 Generating an UO Modulated Signal on page 146 Manual operation See Frequency on page 56 SOURce LOSCillator SOURce lt Source gt Selects the source of the local oscillator signal Parameters lt Source gt INTernal EXTernal INT use built in oscillator EXT use signal at REF LO IN con nector Example See chapter 11 1 2 Generating an UO Modulated Signal on page 146 Manual operation See Source on page 68 SOURce PATH COUNt The command queries the number of installed RF paths Return values lt Count gt integer Range 1 to INT_MAX RST 1 11 14 SOURce CORRection Subsystem Example PATH COUN queries the number of RF paths Response 1 the instrument is equipped with one RF path Usage Query only SOURce CORRection Subsystem The output level is corrected in the CORRection subsystem Correction is performed by user def
53. State Activates pulse modulation The R amp S SGMA GUI indicates an activated pulse modulation as follows ON scs 100020 Remote command SOURce lt hw gt PULM STATe on page 200 Pulse Modulation Source Selects between the internal Pulse Generator or an External pulse signal for the modulation In the later case the instrument expects the pulse modulation signals at the TRIG connector Remote command SOURce lt hw gt PULM SOURce on page 199 Polarity Sets the polarity of the active slope of the modulation signal for Source gt External Remote command SOURce lt hw gt PULM POLarity on page 199 External Impedance Selects the input impedance for an external pulse modulation signal Remote command SOURce lt hw gt PULM TRIGger EXTernal IMPedance on page 200 7 6 2 Pulse Generator Settings gt To access the pulse connector trigger settings select SGMA GUI gt Instrument Name gt Pulse Modulation gt Pulse Genrator Comprises the settings necessary to configure the internal pulse modulation signal Pulse Mode Sets the operating mode of the pulse generator Single generates a single pulse in one pulse period see figure 7 1 Double generates two pulses in one pulse period see figure 7 2 Remote command SOURce lt hw gt PULM MODE on page 198 Pulse Modulation Pulse Period Sets the repetition rate ofthe generated pulse signal see Pulse M
54. The most recent messages are displayed at the top of the list When the button is pressed again the list of current messages is displayed Refer to chapter 6 4 5 Managing Messages in the Info Dialog on page 64 for infor mation on how to manage messages 6 2 2 Understanding the Messages in the Info Bar Messages indicate information warnings and errors They are displayed in the info line in different colors depending on their importance and display duration The follow ing messages are displayed Error There are two options Critical errors are errors that prevent the instrument from working e g a HW failure Critical errors are displayed in red color System errors are errors that concern the operating system e g wrong file path System errors are displayed in black color e Information Main Panel The information e g file not found is displayed in black color e Warning A warning indicates a less significant error and is displayed in black color e Brief message Brief messages report automatic settings in the program e g switching on illegal entries that are not accepted by the program e g range violations They are dis played in the info line on a yellow background They are displayed on top of status information or permanent messages Brief messages usually do not demand user actions and disappear automatically after a short period of time They are stored in the history however
55. USB connections available e Coherent LO input and output connectors also usable as MIMO input output and phase coherent UO demodulation e Broadband analogue input for vector modulation I Q e Linux operating system e Graphical user interface R amp S SGMA GUI to set up and control one or more R amp S SGS instruments simultaneously from one remote computer available for Windows and Linux systems Documentation Overview The user documentation for the R amp S SGS consists of the following parts e Getting Started printed manual e Documentation CD ROM with Online help system chm as a standalone help User Manual for base unit and options Service manual Data sheet and product brochure Links to useful sites on the R amp S internet R amp S SGMA GUI Online Help The Online Help is embedded in the R amp S SGMA GUI software It offers quick context sensitive access to the complete information needed for operation and programming The online help contains help on operating the R amp S SGS and all available options 1 3 Typographical Conventions Getting Started This manual is delivered with the instrument in printed form and in PDF format on the Documentation CD ROM It provides the information needed to set up and start work ing with the instrument Basic operations and typical measurement examples are described The manual includes also general information e g safety instructions User Manua
56. a scan for the available extension instruments Setting parameters State 0 1 OFF ON 1 starts scan 0 aborts scan RST OFF Return values State 0 1 OFF ON 1 scan is running 0 scan finisched RST OFF Example see chapter 11 1 5 Enabling and Configuring an Extension Mode on page 150 Manual operation See Available Instruments on page 89 EXTension INSTruments REMote CHANnel Channel Queries the remote channels of the available extension instruments Possible interfa ces are LAN USB SOCKet PCIe Parameters lt Channel gt lt Channellnstr 1 gt lt Channellnstr 2 gt Returns a list of the used remote channels of the available extensions one interface per instrument If an extension uses more than one remote channels returned is the fastest one Example see chapter 11 1 5 Enabling and Configuring an Extension Mode on page 150 Usage Query only Manual operation See Available Instruments on page 89 EXTension INSTruments REMote LAN NAME Queries the IP addresses instrument names of the available extension instruments Return values lt PAddress gt lt IPAdr_Inst 1 gt lt IPAdr_Inst 2 gt Example see chapter 11 1 5 Enabling and Configuring an Extension Mode on page 150 EXTension Subsystem Usage Query only Manual operation See Available Instruments on page 89 EXTension INSTruments REMote SERial lt Serial gt Queirie
57. actions allergiques surviennent telles qu ruption cutan e ternuements fr quents rougeur de la conjonctive ou difficult s respiratoires il faut imm diatement consulter un m decin pour en clarifier la cause et viter toute atteinte la sant Avant le traitement m canique et ou thermique ou le d montage du produit il faut imp rativement observer la section Elimination des d chets point 1 1171 0000 43 08 Page 5 Consignes de securite fondamentales Selon les fonctions certains produits tels que des systemes de radiocommunication RF peuvent produire des niveaux lev s de rayonnement lectromagn tique tant donn la vuln rabilit de l enfant na tre les femmes enceintes doivent tre prot g es par des mesures appropri es Les porteurs de stimulateurs cardiaques peuvent galement tre menac s par les rayonnements lectromagn tiques L employeur l exploitant est tenu d valuer et de rep rer les lieux de travail soumis un risque particulier d exposition aux rayonnements et de pr venir les dangers ventuels En cas d incendie il se peut que le produit d gage des mati res toxiques gaz liquides etc susceptibles de nuire la sant Il faut donc en cas d incendie prendre des mesures ad quates comme par exemple le port de masques respiratoires et de v tements de protection Si un produit laser est int gr dans un produit Rohde amp Schwarz par exemple lecteur CD DVD il ne faut
58. adjustment failed CALibration FREQuency MEASure starts the adjustment of frequency and level CALibration LEVel MEASure starts adjustments for maximum level accuracy Options R amp S SGS B106V or R amp S SGS B112V required for modulator functions CALibration IQModulator FULL CALibration IQModulator LOCal kckckck ck kckck RRA ck kk ck ck ck ckock RARA ck kk ck kk ko ck RARA ck Sk kk kk ko ck RARA AAA kk k ko k kc ko kck oko Query the entries in the error queue CKCkCkckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckck ck ck ck ck KKK SYSTem SERRor Query static errors S8XSTem ERRor CODE COUNT SYSTem ERRor CODE NEXT SYSTem ERRor NEXT STATus QUEue NEXT SYSTem ERRor CODE ALL SYSTem ERROr ALL Query error queue CkCkCckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckck ck ck ck ck ck ck EEK Query system information ck Ck Ck Ck Ck Ck Ck KKK KKK KKK KK KKK KK KKK KKK KKK KKK KK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKKKKKKKKKKKKKKEK SYSTem VERSion KKRKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKEK Activate eco mode KEK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKKK KKK KK KKK SYSTem EMODe EM1 KEK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKKK KKK KK KKK Q
59. ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 XX Activate the signal output KKEKK KKK KKK KKK KK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKKK KKK KK KKK SOURce PGENerator OUTPut STATe 1 SOURCe PULM STATe 1 OUTPut1 STATe 1 Example Generating a pulse train signal This example shows a command sequence to create a pulse train signal Prior to the selection of the pulse train mode make sure that you have generated and selected a pulse train data list Otherwise the instrument generates an error EEE EEE 0k 0k 0k 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 ck 2 ck ck ck ck ck ck ck 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 EX EX Reset the instrument to start from an initial state SOURce PULM Subsystem ck Ck Ck Ck ck ck ck ck ck Ck ck KKK KKK KKK Ck Ck Ck Ck Ck Ck Ck Ck Ck KK Ck Ck Ck Ck Ck Ck Ck Ck Ck KKK KKK KKK KKK Ck Ck kk Sk kk kc kc k ck kk ck RST CLS KKEKKKKKK KKK KKK ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK ck ck ck KKK ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck AH A ck Set the RF signal frequency and level ck ck ck ck EEE 0k 0k 0k 0k 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 EX EX SOURce FREQuency CW 4000000000 SOURce POWer LEVel IMMediate AMPLitude 25 Jy KACKEN Create a pulse train data list c
60. cleared How to call the history 1 In the Info dialog click the History button A list of all messages that have occurred since the instrument switch on is dis played The most recent messages are displayed at the top of the list 2 Click the History button once more A list of current messages is displayed T 7 1 7 2 Operation Mode oignal Generator Settings This section summarizes the settings necessary to configure the instrument for signal generation The description in this section follows the menu tree structure of the graph ical user interface Each of the discussed topis follows a common structure providing basic background information and reference to the user interface For step by step instructions for fulfilling typical tasks refer to chapter 9 Performing Configuration Tasks on page 109 Operation Mode You can operate the R amp S SGS in two modes normal mode and baseband bypass mode In baseband bypass mode an external IF signal fed in at the or Q connectors is directly routed to the RF OUT connector The level of the signal can be adjusted Refer to figure 5 8 for visualization of the signal flow gt To access the Operation Mode dialog select SGMA GUI gt Instrument Name gt Operation Mode Operation Mode Sets the operation mode Normal The complete signal processing chain is used Baseband Bypass The IF signal fed in at the or Q connectors is directly routed
61. con nected using PCle or USB or by a direct LAN connection because the SGS will automatically activate the SGU 3 Press the ID key on the front panel of the R amp S SGU only required if the compo nents are connected via a company network 4 Inthe Extension dialog trigger Scan How to Enable a Baseband Bypass Mode Ths scan functions finds out the connected R amp S SGU 5 Select the R amp S SGU from the list and set Available Instruments gt Select gt On to enable it as an extension A green status indicator Connected indicates the successfully established remote connection to the extension 6 Select Test Signal Connections gt Test to trigger a check of all required signal connections Loin Trig SGS The diagram displays the connection state of the tested connections 7 Select SGMA GUI gt R amp S SGS gt Freq 20 GHz Lev 30 dBm and enable RF gt State gt On The extension adopts these values and states automatically Generated is an I Q signal with RF 20 GHz and Level 30 dBm 9 3 How to Enable a Baseband Bypass Mode 1 Provide an external analog signal at the or Q connector or on both at the rear of the instrument Refer to figure 5 8 for visualization of the signal flow 2 Select SGMA GUI gt Instrument Name gt Operation Mode gt Baseband Bypass How to Configure the Reference Oscillator Source Some instrument s functions like Frequency and I Q settings are
62. controller The R amp S SGMA GUI and the instrument provide the Device Identification function for this purpose How to find an instrument in the R amp S SGMA GUI gt If several instruments have been configured and activated in the R amp S SGMA GUI press the ID button on the instrument s front panel to trigger device identification The Edit Instrument dialog of this instrument opens Working with R amp S SGMA GUI Field Edit Instrument gt Symbolic Name displays the name of the instrument as shown in the R amp S SGMA GUI main panel Working with R amp S SGMA GUI Dialog Edit Instrument does not appear If this dialog does not open perform the following e Check whether the instrument is correctly connected to the external PC on which you work with the R amp S SGMA GUI e Check if the instrument is configured in the R amp S SGMA GUI and perform if neces sary the steps described in chapter 6 4 2 Handling Instruments in the R amp S SGMA GUI on page 58 e Select SGMA GUI gt Setup gt Instruments check the state of the instrument in the Configure Instruments gt Available Instruments table and activate it if disabled esse Scan LAN instruments with host name prefix How to identify an instrument in an instrument set gt To identify the instrument in an instrument set use one of the device identification functions a select SGMA GUI gt Setup gt Instruments gt Available
63. customersupport china rohde schwarz com ROHDE amp SCHWARZ 1171 0200 22 06 00 1 1 1 2 1 3 2 1 2 1 1 2 1 2 2 1 3 2 1 4 2 1 5 2 1 6 2 1 7 2 2 2 3 2 3 1 2 3 2 2 3 2 1 2 3 2 2 2 3 2 3 2 3 3 2 3 4 3 1 3 2 4 1 4 2 Contents roro nadia 11 E e 11 Documentation OVE rvieW ssssssssssssiesssnssmssaasiensnnagemensnnnaseeesanssanesenanaaensses 11 Typographical Conventions ss 12 Preparing Tor Use iii 14 Putting into Operation nee 14 sre 15 Unpacking and Checking the Instrument cnn 15 ACCOSSONY BM tes 16 Placing or Mounting the Instrument Ha ea 16 Switching the Instrument On and Off 17 Function Check een veteas 19 Default Settings pd bec u IE Ere Andenne At 19 Linux Operating SYSTEM sise 20 Connecting an External PC and Devices 20 Installing the R amp S SGMA GUI Software on an External PC 21 Connecting a Remote PC via LAN an 22 Connecting the Instrument to the Network en 22 Assigning the IP Address ia 23 Automatically adding instruments to the GOGMA GU 23 Connecting a Controller via PCI Express nana nana 24 Connecting a Controller or an USB Device via USB 24 Instrument TO UF rr 26 Front Panel Tour 26 Rear Panel Tour iii ciel ee ES See ee 28 First steps with the Instrument 31 Configuring a CW Signal with the R amp S SGMA GUI eese 31 Configuring a CW Signal with the
64. eso se debe tener en cuenta que el producto solo pueda ser operado por personal especializado o personas instruidas en profundidad con las capacidades correspondientes Si fuera necesaria indumentaria de seguridad para el uso de productos de Rohde amp Schwarz encontraria la informaci n debida en la documentaci n del producto en el capitulo correspondiente Guarde bien las informaciones de seguridad elementales asi como la documentaci n del producto y entr guelas a usuarios posteriores Tener en cuenta las informaciones de seguridad sirve para evitar en lo posible lesiones o da os por peligros de toda clase Por eso es imprescindible leer detalladamente y comprender por completo las siguientes informaciones de seguridad antes de usar el producto y respetarlas durante el uso del producto Deber n tenerse en cuenta todas las dem s informaciones de seguridad como p ej las referentes a la protecci n de personas que encontrar n en el cap tulo correspondiente de la documentaci n del producto y que tambi n son de obligado cumplimiento En las presentes informaciones de seguridad se recogen todos los objetos que distribuye el grupo de empresas Rohde amp Schwarz bajo la denominaci n de producto entre ellos tambi n aparatos instalaciones as como toda clase de accesorios Los datos espec ficos del producto figuran en la hoja de datos y en la documentaci n del producto Se alizaci n de seguridad de los productos Las siguientes s
65. fied in greater detail by querying the STATus QUEStionable status register 4 MAV bit message available The bit is set if a message is available in the output queue which can be read This bit can be used to enable data to be automatically read from the instrument to the controller 5 ESB bit Sum bit of the event status register It is set if one of the bits in the event status register is set and enabled in the event status enable register Setting of this bit indicates a serious error which can be specified in greater detail by polling the event status register 6 MSS bit master status summary bit The bit is set if the instrument triggers a service request This is the case if one of the other bits of this registers is set together with its mask bit in the service request enable register SRE 7 STATus OPERation status register summary bit The bit is set if an EVENT bit is set in the OPERat ion status register and the associated ENABle bit is set to 1 A set bit indicates that the instrument is just performing an action The type of action can be determined by querying the STATus OPERation status register Remote Control Basics 14 1 5 4 Event Status Register ESR and Event Status Enable Register ESE The ESR is defined in IEEE 488 2 It can be compared with the EVENt part ofa SCPI register The event status register can be read out using command ESR The ESE corresponds to the ENABle part
66. file Example See Working with Files and Directories on page 170 Usage Event SCPI confirmed MMEMory MSIS lt Msis gt Defines the drive or network resource in the case of networks for instruments with windows operating system using msis MSIS Mass Storage Identification String Note Instruments with Linux operating system ignore this command since Linux does not use drive letter assignment Usage SCPI confirmed MMEMory RDIRectory Directory Removes an existing directory from the mass memory storage system If no directory is specified the subdirectory with the specified name is deleted in the default directory Setting parameters lt Directory gt string String parameter to specify the directory to be deleted Example See Working with Files and Directories on page 170 Usage Event Fast Speed Commands MMEMory STORe STATe lt savrcl_state_nr gt lt file_name gt Stores the current instrument setting in the specified file The instrument setting must first be stored in an internal memory with the same num ber using the common command SAV Setting parameters lt savrcl_state_nr gt Corresponds to the specific lt number gt defined with the SAV command e g SAV 4 lt file_name gt String parameter to specify the file name with extension savrcltxt Example See Storing and Loading Current Settings on page 170 Usage Event 11 11 Fast Speed Commands This section describes
67. in the manual the instrument itself is case insensitive Numeric suffixes If a command can be applied to multiple instances of an object e g specific channels or sources the required instances can be specified by a suffix added to the command Numeric suffixes are indicated by angular brackets lt 1 4 gt lt n gt lt i gt and are replaced by a single value in the command Entries without a suffix are interpreted as having the suffix 1 Example Definition HCOPy PAGE DIMensions QUADrant lt N gt Command HCOP PAGE DIM QUAD2 This command refers to the quadrant 2 o Different numbering in remote control For remote control the suffix may differ from the number of the corresponding selec tion used in manual operation SCPI prescribes that suffix counting starts with 1 Suffix 1 is the default state and used when no specific suffix is specified Some standards define a fixed numbering starting with O If the numbering differs in manual operation and remote control it is indicated for the corresponding command Optional mnemonics Some command systems permit certain mnemonics to be inserted into the header or omitted These mnemonics are marked by square brackets in the description The instrument must recognize the long command to comply with the SCPI standard Some commands are considerably shortened by these optional mnemonics Example Definition HCOPy IMMediate Command HCOP IMM is equiva
68. in the past When reading the queue the instrument starts with the first occurred error event All status registers have the same internal structure SRE ESE The service request enable register SRE can be used as ENABle part ofthe STB ifthe STB is structured according to SCPI By analogy the ESE can be used as the ENABle part of the ESR 141 52 Structure of a SCPI Status Register Each standard SCPI register consists of 5 parts Each part has a width of 16 bits and has different functions The individual bits are independent of each other i e each hardware status is assigned a bit number which is valid for all five parts Bit 15 the most significant bit is set to zero for all parts Thus the contents of the register parts can be processed by the controller as positive integers States events or summary bits of other registers sme Pr 15 14 13 12 CONDition part 3 2 1 0 A ERRRREN 15 14 13 12 PTRansition part 3 2 1 0 15 14 13 12 NTRansition part 3 2 1 0 LELIIILSIITIJIAIELEI y Y Y Y _ gt 15 14 13 12 EVENt part s xo o POSE a its Summary bit of SCPI register written into a bit of the STB or into the CONDition bit of a superordinate register Logical AND of EVENt and ENABle bits 1
69. instrument operation can be ensured The Info window with a list of current messages and a detailed descrip tion of each message can be opened with the Info button see also chapter 6 2 1 Info Dialog on page 52 Status Information The status messages are displayed in the Info line of the R amp S SGMA GUI main panel The status information gives the user an overview of the main operating states and set tings of the instrument The states are indicated for information only and do not neces sitate any action by the user Status Information displayed in the Info line AttFixed Attenuator fixed mode is active The uninterrupted level settings are made in a fixed range without attenuator switching The variation range is set automatically when this mode is activated The range is dis played with the parameter SGMA GUI gt Instrument Name gt Level gt Attenuator Fixed Range Error Messages Messages indicate errors in the instrument They are displayed in the info line in differ ent colors depending on their importance and display duration Errors e g no calibra tion data are displayed in red information e g file not found and warnings in black Warnings indicate less significant errors e g the instrument operates outside specified data See also chapter 6 2 1 Info Dialog on page 52 and chapter 6 2 2 Understanding the Messages in the Info Bar on page 53 Volatile messages Volatile messages report automa
70. instruments systems and all accessories For product specific information see the data sheet and the product documentation Safety labels on products The following safety labels are used on products to warn against risks and dangers Symbol Meaning Symbol Meaning Notice general danger location O ON OFF Power Observe product documentation gt Caution when handling heavy equipment D Standby indication Danger of electric shock Direct current DC gt 1171 0000 42 08 Page 1 Basic Safety Instructions To identify any terminal which is intended for connection to an external conductor for protection against electric shock in case of a fault or the terminal of a protective earth Symbol Meaning Symbol Meaning d Caution Hot surface Paw Alternating current AC Protective conductor terminal Direct alternating current DC AC Earth Ground Class Il Equipment to identify equipment meeting the safety requirements specified for Class Il equipment device protected by double or reinforced insulation Frame or chassis Ground terminal EU labeling for batteries and accumulators For additional information see section Waste disposal Environmental protection item 1 Be careful when handling electrostatic sensitive devices EU labeling for separate collection of electrical and electronic devices For additional information see section Waste disposa
71. is used This value is determined at one of the R amp S service centers dur ing calibration ON A user defined adjustment value is used The value is entered under Adjustment DAC Value This allows the frequency to be impaired freely for example to simu late a frequency error The instrument is no longer in the calibrated state However the cali bration value is not changed and the instrument resumes the calibra ted state after switching the Adjustment State to Off Remote command SOURce ROSCillator INTernal ADJust STATe on page 203 DAC Value Enters a user defined adjustment value for the internal reference frequency This value is not used unless Adjustment Active On is selected Remote command SOURce ROSCillator INTernal ADJust VALue on page 202 7 5 Level and Power On Settings This section explains the level settings of the R amp S SGS The instrument can be equip ped optionally with an active electronic step attenuator R amp S SGS B26 Configuring RF Level gt To change the RF level of the selects instrument perform one of the following a Select SGMA GUI main panel gt Level and enter the desired value Level and Power On Settings b Select SGMA GUI gt Instrument Name gt Level gt RF Level gt Level and enter the desired value Changes of the RF level have an immediate effect on the output signal 7 5 1 RF Level To access the RF level settings select SGMA GUI gt
72. is expected to work properly The range limits depend on several parameters like Mode Setting Characteristic the UO signal s crest factor etc Remote command SOURce POWer RANGe LOWer on page 195 SOURce POWer RANGe UPPer on page 195 Limit Sets the level limit The value specifies the upper limit of the level at the RF OUT connector message appears if an attempt is made to set a level above this limit and the level at the RF out put is confined to the upper limit However the level indication is not influenced The value is not affected by an instrument preset function This parameter is influenced only by the Factory Preset and its factory value is equal to the upper limit Remote command SOURce POWer LIMit AMPLitude on page 194 Readjust Recalculates the instrument internal settings optimized for the current level Not required for automatic modes Remote command SOURce POWer ALC SONCe on page 192 7 5 2 Power On EMF To access the power on EMF settings select SGMA GUI gt Instrument Name gt Level gt Power On EMF This dialog comprises the settings for the power on behavior of the instrument Power On State Selects the state which the RF output takes after the instrument is switched on RF Off The output is deactivated when the instrument is switched on Pulse Modulation Previous Setting When the instrument is switched on the output takes the same
73. ki eva ddr nahen 107 e ben 107 Keyboard Tests nete eee een 107 External Adjustments 2 2 eerie titre 0000H0000 sinu nana ns SSES Piana nna uua 108 Performing Configuration Tasks ceres 109 How to Generate an UO Modulated Signal 109 How to Generate I Q Signals with an R amp S SGS and an R amp S SGU Upconverter 111 How to Enable a Baseband Bypass Mode 113 How to Configure the Reference Oscillator Source 114 How to Configure the Local Oscillator LO Coupling Source 115 How to Define the Signal at the REF LO OUT Connector 116 How to Connect and Configure Instruments for Optimum Phase Coherence 116 How to Restore the LAN Connection to an Instrument 117 How to Switch Between the Operating States 118 How to Use Computer Names nes 120 How to Optimize Performance sens 120 How to Install a new Firmware Version on the Instrument 121 How to Activate Options neenon enne AR sasana eanan saas 123 How to Manually Set a PCle Direct Connection between an R amp S SGS and an R amp S A ETE 123 Network and Remote Control Operation 124 Remote Control Interfaces and Protocols eene 124 Remote Control Programs and Libraries 125 EAN Ite aCe c e ee 127 VISA Res
74. ment For technical data of the connectors refer to the data sheet 100 240 V Fig 3 2 Rear panel view Protection of mechanical components To avoid damage of the SMA connectors it is essential to limit the tightening torque to 60 Ncm Use an adequate 8 mm torque wrench and not an ordinary open end wrench PCI EXPRESS CONNECTOR The PCle Peripheral Component Interconnect Express single lane interface allows remote control with optimized speed For details see chapter 2 3 3 Connecting a Controller via PCI Express on page 24 USB CONNECTOR The USB universal serial bus interface Type Micro allows you to connect various external devices e g e If the interface is configured as a device interface a remote computer can be con nected for firmware update manual operation via the R amp S SGMA GUI software or for remote control of the instrument e Ifthe interface is configured as a host interface a memory stick for file transmis sion can be connected For details see chapter 2 3 4 Connecting a Controller or an USB Device via USB on page 24 IESSE User Manual 1173 9105 02 10 28 R amp S SGS100A Instrument Tour LAN CONNECTOR Ev EEE WO The LAN Ethernet interface allows you to connect the R amp S SGS to other devices e g a remote computer for firmware update manual operation via the R amp S SGMA GUI software or for remote control of the instrument The connection to the remote co
75. nine M 74 Pulse Modulation ennt 000000000 Bonn Hanau hen E Hanna Iri nga DER P gn n nenn 75 Pulse Modulation Gettinges narran 76 Pulse Generator Settings 77 Pulse Connector Trigger Settings 79 Trigger Connector Settings cis aia 80 UO Modulation and Signal Impairment ses 81 O 81 Gain and Gain Imbalance si 81 land D Offset nu Re AR AN Re nn 82 TE Le E ann canteens Aa En de aie CREER RR Ada 83 General UO Settings is 84 Analog Impairment Settings 85 PROS E 86 EXON SION 87 General Instrument Settings and Instrument Setup 91 Internal Adjustments oi 91 Hardware Configuration seen 93 Software OPtiONS iii 94 Install SW OPtlONS coin 96 Protections ns nemen e laico 97 LA d DE 97 R amp S SGS100A Contents 8 7 8 8 8 9 8 10 8 11 8 12 8 13 8 13 1 8 13 2 8 14 9 1 9 2 9 3 9 4 9 5 9 6 9 7 9 8 9 9 9 10 9 11 9 12 9 13 9 14 10 10 1 10 1 1 10 1 2 10 1 2 1 10 1 2 2 10 1 2 3 Maintenance 100 Network Settings e 101 Remote Channels 2 tarte iinun rina n nni aka n Ens a earn 104 Factory Preset e M 105 M 106 Standby and Restart iiie ii 106 Diagnostic and Tests nies eee eie ient acci inna tea
76. on page 223 New Instrument Calls the Add Edit Instruments dialog Delete Instrument Removes the selected instrument from the list of Available Instruments Edit Instrument Calls the Add Edit Instruments dialog Clear Instrument Removes all instruments from the list of Available Instruments Export Opens the standard file save browser for saving the list of the available instruments in a mapping file The mapping files have the file extension map so the file name typed in is automatically equipped with this extension A mapping file provides a cross reference between the instruments symbolic names and their respective remote control parameters The information in the mapping file is grouped in rows where one row corresponds to one configured instrument The rows have the following structure lt InstrumentType gt lt SymbolicName gt IP Address Hostname gt lt RemoteChannel gt lt SerialNumber gt Operating Menu and Toolbar File Edit Format View Help SGMA GUI Instrument mapping version 1 SGS SGS rsgs100a100002 LAN 100002 SGU SGU rsgs100a100008 LAN 100008 SGT SGT rsgs100a100006 LAN 100006 Fig 6 1 Mapping file example Tip In a remote control application program address the instruments by their symbolic names and retrieve the remain required settings from the mapping file This workflow is especially useful for frequent exchange of instruments Remote command INSTruments MAPPing FILE on
77. only Manual operation See Visa Resource Strings on page 104 SYSTem Subsystem SYSTem COMMunicate SOCKet RESource Queries the visa resource string for remote control via LAN interface using TCP IP socket protocol Return values lt Resource gt string Example SYSTem COMMunicate SOCKet RESource Response TCPIP 10 113 1 150 5025 S0CKET Usage Query only Manual operation See Visa Resource Strings on page 104 SYSTem COMMunicate USB RESource Queries the visa resource string for remote control via the USB interface Return values Resource string Example SYSTem COMMunicate USB RESource queries the VISA resource string for remote control via the USB interface Response USB 72 000000 INSTR Usage Query only Manual operation See Visa Resource Strings on page 104 SYSTem PROTect lt ch gt STATe lt State gt lt Key gt Activates deactivates the specified protection level Parameters lt State gt select RST 1 Setting parameters lt Key gt integer The respective functions are disabled when the protection level is activated No password is required for activation A password must be entered to deactivate the protection level The pass word for the first level is 123456 This protection level can be used to lock out internal adjust ments Example SYSTem PROTect1 STATe ON activates protection level 1 Internal adjustments are only possi ble after deactivatin
78. operation See Execute Factory Preset on page 105 CALibration Subsystem CALIbration ALLEMBAS UTE eessen gege eegene eebe etr Eege Sien 160 CALibration xFREQuency MEASure essere nennen enne 160 CAlibration lQ MSAUABBEF LER oia 2 2 160 RUN MT e e ET E e Sal anregt 161 CALibration LEVel MEASure 0s42020420400000H0H0H0n0HEnEnnR nn nenn nun annia sn sa mann 161 CALibration LEVEL TEMPETAtUTE 72 ane ana u a 161 3CALibration FREQuency TEMPerat re n ciis nennen 161 CALibration 1QModulator TEMPerature nennen nnne aa sns nn nsns 161 IC ABIBration OE X Tels un nes energie nee 161 CALibrations lt hw gt ROSCillator DATAIMODE 2 ico toti Eat catho nno td dano dd 162 xoALibrationshwsiROSCIlater DATA He aa 162 CALibration ALL MEASure Starts all internal adjustments for which no external measuring equipment is needed Return values lt All gt 0 1 OFF ON Example See chapter 11 1 1 Performing General Task for Instrument Setup on page 144 Usage Query only Manual operation See Adjust All on page 92 CALibration FREQuency MEASure Performs all adjustments which affect the frequency Return values lt Synthesis gt 0 1 OFF ON Example See chapter 11 1 1 Performing General Task for Instrument Setup on page 144 Usage Query only Manual operation See Synthesis on page 92
79. or WAI 2 Poll the operation complete state periodically by means of a timer using the sequence lt short timeout gt OPC 3 A return value LSB of 1 indicates that the overlapped command has finished In case of a timeout the operation is ongoing 4 Reset timeout to former value 5 Clear the error queue with SYStem ERRor to remove the 410 Query interrup ted entries Using several threads in the controller application As an alternative provided the programming environment of the controller application supports threads separate threads can be used for the application GUI and for control ling the instrument s via SCPI A thread waiting for a OPC thus will not block the GUI or the communication with other instruments 14 1 5 Status Reporting System The status reporting system stores all information on the current operating state of the instrument and on errors which have occurred This information is stored in the status registers and in the error queue You can query both with the commands of the STATus Subsystem 14 1 5 1 Hierarchy of the Status Registers The figure 14 1 shows the hierarchical structure of information in the status registers ascending from left to right Remote Control Basics Output Queue U Error Event Queue AL Service Request to controller at transition from O to 1 0 4 9 pOT AA PE L2 p 2 QUES SCHIEN MAY SCHEN ES gt OPER be 7
80. padding to prevent the instrument from moving around inside the box Pack the instrument in antistatic wrap to protect it from electrostatic charging e Secure the instrument to prevent any movement and other mechanical effects dur ing transportation The carrying handles at the front and side of the casing are designed to lift or carry the instrument Do not apply an excessive external force to the handles Observe the information on transporting heavy instruments in the basic safety instruc tions included at the front of the printed manual and on the supplied CD ROM Accessory List The instrument comes with the following accessories e Power cable e Getting Started printed manual e R amp S SGS User Documentation CD Rom Placing or Mounting the Instrument The R amp S SGS is designed for use under laboratory conditions either on a bench top or in a rack using a rack adapter kit order number see data sheet Bench Top Operation If the R amp S SGS is operated on a bench top the surface should be flat The instrument can be used in horizontal position standing on its feet Putting into Operation Risk of injury and instrument damage if stacking instruments A stack of instruments may tilt over and cause injury Furthermore the instruments at the bottom of the stack may be damaged due to the load imposed by the instruments on top Observe the following instructions when stacking instruments e Never stack more than thr
81. page 222 Scan LAN instruments with host name prefix Sets the prefix the searched host names begin with Use this function to limit the amount of the searched instruments and to speed up the scan process For example set this field to RsSGS RsSGU RsSGT if you want to search for all available instruments Tip If you start a scan for an instrument with a set IP adress and it doesn t appear in the list of available instruments it may be due to the prefixes written in this field You can perform another scan while leaving this field empty Remote command INSTruments SCAN HNPRefix on page 223 6 1 2 2 Add Edit Instruments The dialog provides access to the main instrument s settings such as Symbolic Name Instrument Type and connection settings Operating Menu and Toolbar o Active v On Refer to chapter 6 4 2 Handling Instruments in the R amp S SGMA GUI on page 58 for information on how to configure and manage instruments in R amp S SGMA GUI Instrument Nr Automatically assigned number that indicates the instrument s index in the list of Avail able Instruments Symbolic Name Selects the alias name of the instrument Remote command INSTruments NAME on page 222 Instrument Type Selects the instrument s family Remote command INSTruments TYPE on page 224 Active Activates deactivates the display of the instrument s settings in the main panel Note Only instruments in an
82. parfait tat de s curit Pour le maintenir dans cet tat et en garantir une utilisation sans danger l utilisateur doit respecter l ensemble des consignes remarques de s curit et avertissements qui se trouvent dans ce manuel Le groupe Rohde amp Schwarz se tient votre disposition pour toutes questions relatives aux pr sentes consignes de s curit Il incombe l utilisateur d employer ce produit de mani re appropri e Le produit est exclusivement destin l utilisation en industrie et en laboratoire et ou si cela a t express ment autoris galement aux travaux ext rieurs il ne peut en aucun cas tre utilis des fins pouvant causer des dommages corporels ou mat riels L exploitation du produit en dehors de son utilisation pr vue ou le non respect des consignes du fabricant se font sous la responsabilit de l utilisateur Le fabricant d cline toute responsabilit en cas d utilisation non conforme du produit Le produit est pr sum faire l objet d une utilisation conforme lorsqu il est utilis conform ment aux consignes de la documentation produit correspondante et dans la limite de ses performances voir fiche technique documentation consignes de s curit ci apr s L utilisation du produit exige des comp tences en la mati re et des connaissances de base de l anglais Par cons quent le produit ne devra tre utilis que par un personnel qualifi ou des personnes form es de mani re approfondie et p
83. represents all characters up to the end of the file name therefore stands for all files in a directory men When used in conjunction with the commands the parameter lt file name gt is speci fied as a string parameter with quotation marks It can contain either the complete path including the drive only the path and the file name or only the file name The file name must include the file extension The same applies for the parameters lt directory name gt and lt path gt Depending on how much information is provided either the values specified in the parameter or the values specified with the command MMEM CDIR default directory are used for the path and the drive settings in the commands Before the instrument settings can be stored in a file they have to be stored in an inter mediate memory using common command SAV lt number gt The specified number is subsequently used in the MMEMory STORe STATe on page 177 command Also subsequently to loading a file with instrument settings with command MMEMory LOAD STATe on page 175 these settings have to be activated with the common com mand RCL lt number gt MMEMory Subsystem 11 10 2 Extensions for User Files The following table lists all available file extensions for user files Table 11 1 Automatically assigned file extensions in the instrument Function Contents File suffix R amp S SGMA GUI Save As Open Software settings savrcl
84. see also command synchronization and OPC Usage Event General Commands 11 3 General Commands ge E E 158 ORARE EE 158 NOON MEI 158 EE 158 RESTart Restarts the instrument Usage Event STANdby Switches the instruments to stand by state To return the instrument from standby to ready state send the SCPI command RESTart Usage Event LOCK lt LockRequestld gt Sends a lock request ID which uniquely identifies the controller to the instrument Parameters lt LockRequestld gt Number 0 test query to prove whether the instrument is locked Controller ID request lock from the controller with the specified Controller ID Return values lt Value gt Number 0 request refused the instrument is already locked to other lt Lock Request Id gt i e to another controller 1 request granted Example LOCK 12345 Response 1 UNL 12345 Usage Query only Manual operation See Exclusive Access on page 50 a UNLock lt Unlockld gt Unlocks an instrument locked to a controller with Controller ID lt Unlock Id gt 11 4 Preset Commands Setting parameters lt Unlockld gt Number Unlock ID which uniquely identifies the controller to the instru ment The value must match the Controller ID lt Lock Request Id set with the command LOCK 0 Clear lock regardless of locking state Usage Setting only Manual operation See Exclusive Access on page 50 Preset Command
85. short or long form Like any parameter they have to be separated from the header by a white space In the case of a query the short form of the text is provided Example Setting command HCOPy PAGE ORIentation LANDscape Query HCOP PAGE ORI Response LAND Character strings Strings must always be entered in quotation marks or Remote Control Basics Example HCOP ITEM LABel Testl or HCOP ITEM LABel Testl Block data Block data is a format which is suitable for the transmission of large amounts of data A command using a block data parameter has the following structure Example FORMat READings DATA 45168xxxxxxxx The ASCII character introduces the data block The next number indicates how many of the following digits describe the length of the data block In the example the 4 follow ing digits indicate the length to be 5168 bytes The data bytes follow During the trans mission of these data bytes all end or other control signs are ignored until all bytes are transmitted 0 specifies a data block of indefinite length The use of the indefinite format requires a NL END message to terminate the data block This format is useful when the length of the transmission is not known or if speed or other considerations prevent segmentation of the data into blocks of definite length 14 1 3 4 Overview of Syntax Elements The following table provides an overview of the syntax elements The col
86. state as it had when the instrument was switched off Remote command OUTPut STATe PON on page 179 7 6 Pulse Modulation This section explains the pulse modulation settings of the R amp S SGS The equipment layout for generating the pulse modulation signal includes the option Pulse Modulator R amp S SGS K22 To configure and perform a pulse modulation you need to select the modulation signal source and provide the corresponding settings Modulation Signal Sources The R amp S SGS provides the following signal sources for the signal modulation e Internal A high performance pulse generator that allows you to generate either single or double pulse signals e Externally supplied signal the instrument expects the pulse modulation signals at the TRIG connector Pulse Modulation Signal Waveforms The high performance pulse generator enables you to generate single or double pulse signals Fig 7 1 Pulse Generator Single Pulse Mode 1 Pulse Period 2 Pulse Width 3 Pulse Delay Pulse Modulation Fig 7 2 Pulse Generator Double Pulse Mode 1 Pulse Period 2 Pulse Width 3 Double Pulse Width 4 Double Pulse Delay 7 6 1 Pulse Modulation Settings gt To access the pulse modulation settings select SGMA GUI gt Instrument Name gt Pulse Modulation The Pulse Modulation dialog contains all parameters required to configure pulse modulation and pulse signal generation
87. the R amp S SGMA GUI one can also controll the R amp S SGS using programmed commands from a remote PC The description in this section requires basic knowledge of the remote control opera tion Definitions specified in the SCPI standard are not provided Nevertheless you will find some basic information to the SCPI syntax command lists and general programming recommendations in chapter 14 1 Remote Control Basics on page 231 In addition this chapter provides information on the status reporting sys tem of the instrument 10 1 Remote Control Interfaces and Protocols The instrument supports several interfaces for remote control The following table gives an overview Table 10 1 Remote control interfaces and protocols Interface Protocols VISA address string and Library Remarks Local Area HiSLIP High Speed LAN Instrument Protocol A LAN connector is located on the Network IVI 6 1 rear panel of the instrument TOPIPSSTH SShislipOlss LAN nn The interface is based on TCP IP and e VXI 11 supports various protocols TCPIP host address inst0 INSTR For details see chapter 10 1 2 LAN Library VISA Interface on page 127 e socket communication Raw Ethernet simple Telnet TCPIP host address LAN device name lt port gt SOCKET Library VISA or socketcontroller USB USBTMC A USB connector is located on the USB lt vendor ID gt lt product ID gt rear panel of the instrument
88. the R amp S SGMA GUI to the new version 1 Connect the R amp S SGS and a Windows PC to the same network 2 Onthe PC open a windows explorer window 3 To connect to the R amp S SGS enter the name of the instrument or its IP address in the windows taskbar 4 Enter the user name and password to connect to the R amp S SGS The default user name is instrument and the password is instrument A folder opens containing the share and the update folder 5 Open the update folder and copy the new firmware update file in it The update starts automatically O Unsuccessful or Erroneous Firmware Update An erroneous or unsuccessful installation of firmware update package is indicated by a combination of red and one orange LEDs on the front panel Refer to the Service Manual for a description of the displayed error code or contact the customer support center The description and the official company contact addresses are provided on the CD included in the delivery How to Activate Options 9 13 How to Activate Options A firmware update prior to the activation of the SW option may be required Refer to the description of the SW option for the required firmware version See also chapter 9 12 How to Install anew Firmware Version on the Instrument on page 121 for instruction on how to update the firmware version 1 Select SGMA GUI main panel gt Instrument Name gt Setup gt Install SW Options 2 Select Option Key and ent
89. the RF signal s peak envelope power Return values lt PEP gt float Example see chapter 11 1 2 Generating an UO Modulated Signal on page 146 Usage Query only Manual operation See PEP on page 56 SOURce POWer RANGe LOWer SOURce POWer RANGe UPPer Queries the minimum maximum level range in the current level mode Return values lt Upper gt float Usage Query only Manual operation See Level Range on page 74 11 18 SOURce PULM Subsystem This subsystem contains the commands for setting the pulse modulation Programming Examples Example Performing pulse modulation This example shows a command sequence to perform pulse modulation G ck ck ck ck ck ck ck 0k 0k 0k 00k 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 ck ck 2 2 2 ck 2 2 2 2 2 EX EX Reset the instrument to start from an initial state ES KKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK RST CLS ES KKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK Set the RF signal frequency and level ck ck ck ck ck 0k 0k 0k 0k 0k 0k 0k 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 ck ck 2 ck ck 2 ck ck 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 XX EX SOURce FREQuency CW 4000000000 SOURce POWer LEVel IMMediate AMPLitude 25 KKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK SOURce PULM Subsystem Configure the pulse modulation setti
90. the default hostname unchanged 1 Open SGMA GUI gt Instrument Name gt Setup gt Network Settings dialog The computer name is displayed under Hostname 2 Select SGMA GUI gt Instrument Name gt Setup gt Protection and enable the Pro tection Level 1 The parameter Hostname in the Network Settings dialog is now enabled for configuration 3 Change the Hostname 4 Press the POWER ON STAND BY key to restart the instrument Note The Factory Preset function restores the factory value of the parameter Hostname 9 11 How to Optimize Performance In its factory preset state the instrument uses predefined frequency and level setting designed for best performance The predefined settings e g the Level modes Auto and Normal or the use of calibrated value of the internal reference signal ensure that the instrument automatically selects the optimal settings depending on the configured RF frequency and level However in some special application cases it might be necessary to choose different settings or to optimize the signal for the particular application This section describes instructions on how to achieve this How to Install anew Firmware Version on the Instrument Restoring the default settings Use the R amp S SGMA GUI main panel gt Instrument name gt Preset or the R amp S SGMA GUI main panel gt Instrument name gt Setup gt Factory Preset function to return the instrument to its
91. the error text there is an explanation as to the respective error Device Specific Error Messages The following table contains all error messages specific for the instrument in alphabeti cal order as well as an explanation of the error situation The positive error codes mark the errors specific of the instrument The device specific error messages set bit 3 in the ESR register The index provides a list of the error messages sorted according to their error codes Device Specific Error Messages Error Code 180 Error Adjustment failed Description Adjustment could not be executed Remedy The adjustment data have to be generated first by an internal or external adjustment or to be loa ded into the device 182 Adjustment data miss ing Adjustment data are missing The adjustment data have to be generated first by an internal or external adjustment or to be loa ded into the instrument 183 Adjustment data inva lid Adjustment data are invalid and must be restored The adjustment data have to be generated again by an internal or external adjustment or to be loa ded into the instrument 200 201 Cannot access hard ware Hardware revision out of date The data transmission to a module was unsuccessful A later version of certain parts of the instrument is necessary to execute the function selected The module is not installed not properly installed or mi
92. the instrument is recognized by the software If you want to get additional information about the instrument click on the Device Name For additional information on other settings hold the mouse cursor over the specific setting Error messages are also displayed in the R amp S SGS100A Web GUI If you want to hide an error message click on it 4 n the menu bar on the left side press Preset to restore the predefined instru ment s settings 5 Select Frequency and adjust the setting as required 6 Select RF On to enable the output of the CW signal A signal with the set frequency is output at the RF OUT connector at the rear panel of the R amp S SGS User Manual 1173 9105 02 10 34 Setups for Instrument Control 5 System Overview The R amp S SGS RF Source is a signal generator intended either for the generation of IQ modulated signals or as a pure local oscillator LO source in the frequency range of 1 MHz to 12 75 GHz Optimized for use in automated test equipment ATE the instrument offers very fast settling times in an exceptionally small formfactor and low power consumption The R amp S SGS can be equipped optionally with an active electronic step attenuator a high stability reference oscillator and LO connectors for coupling multiple generators to a common LO source 5 1 Setups for Instrument Control The R amp S SGS is an instrument designed for the automated test equipment ATE needs To maintain the smal
93. to 12 75 GHz additionally the hardware option R amp S SGS B112V An example of how to configure the instrument to generate a continuous wave CW signal is provided in chapter 4 First steps with the Instrument on page 31 How to Generate an UO Modulated Signal To generate an UO modulated signal 1 Connect the test equipment and provide the external analog signal to be modula ted at the and Q connectors of the instrument The figure 9 1 shows an example of the test setup A signal generator e g R amp S AFQ100B is used as a source of the external analog signal The R amp S Signal Gen erator provides its internal reference signal to the R amp S SGS and the connected sig nal analyzer e g the R amp S FSW aJuaJajay REF LO IN y R amp S SGMA GUI euBis payeinpo O I 08 0000 2 TI 9 Fig 9 1 Example of the setup Tip Refer to the Operating Manual of the R amp S Signal Generator and the R amp S Sig nal Analyzer for information on how to configure the corresponding instrument 2 Select SGMA GUI main panel gt Instrument Name gt Reference Oscillator gt Ext and adjust the settings as required 3 Select SGMA GUI main panel gt Instrument Name gt Frequency Phase gt LO Cou pling Source gt Int Tip For detailed description on how to select the reference frequency source and the LO Coupling source refer to e chapter 9 4 How to Configure the Reference Oscillator Source
94. to the RF OUT connector Note The Baseband Bypass is a special operation mode See also chapter 9 3 How to Enable a Baseband Bypass Mode on page 113 Remote command SOURce OPMode on page 180 Frequency Phase Settings Depending on the installed options the instrument provides an adjustable output fre quency in the frequency range of 1 MHz to 6 GHz or to 12 75 GHz Frequency Phase Settings gt To access this dialog select SGMA GUI gt Instrument Name gt Frequency Phase ms js Delta Phase 0 0 deg Reset Delta Phase Display Local Oscillator LO Coupling Source Im REF LO Output REF i The frequency and phase related settings are provided in this dialog Configuring the RF Frequency gt To change the RF frequency of the selected instrument perform one of the follow ing a Select SGMA GUI main panel gt Freq and enter the desired frequency b Select SGMA GUI gt Instrument Name gt Frequency Phase gt Frequency and enter the desired frequency Changes of the RF frequency have an immediate effect on the output signal Frequency Sets the RF frequency at the RF output connector of the selected instrument Remote command SOURce FREQuency CW FIXed on page 180 Delta Phase Sets the phase of the RF signal The current phase of the signal is used as the refer ence This function allows for example the phase of the output signal to be synchron ized with th
95. 184 SOURce lt hw gt CORRection DEXChange AFILe SELect anna 184 SOURce lt hw gt CORRection DEXChange AFILe SEParator COLUMN 185 SOURce lt hw gt CORRection DEXChange AFILe SEParator DECimal 185 SOURce lt hw gt CORRection DEXChange EXECUtE nenn 186 SOURce lt hw gt CORRection DEXChange MODE nennen 186 SOURce lt hw gt CORRection DEXChange SELect nn 187 SOURcexhw CORRectionCSET SELbecl iiie croco eni Lore tiene nasce 187 ESOURce shwer GORRectoR STATS utenti iria 188 SOURce lt hw gt CORRection VALUE eene nnne eren nnns nnns nnn nenene 188 SOURce CORRection CSET CATalog Requests a list of user correction tables The individual lists are separated by commas SOURce CORRection Subsystem The lists are stored with the fixed file extensions uco in a directory of the user s choice The directory applicable to the commands is defined with the command MMEMory CDIR Return values lt Catalog gt Example Usage string MMEM CDIR var sgs ucor selects the directory for the user correction files CORR CSET CAT queries which correction tables are available Response UCOR1 UCOR2 UCOR3 the correction tables UCOR1 UCOR2 and UCOR3 are availa ble Query only SOURce lt hw gt CORRection C
96. 2 Reie Re Ee e 192 Re Re Oe e EE 193 ESOURCeTIPOWerSOHaracternslio 21 ee einen 193 SOURce POWer LEVel MMediate AMPLitude anna 194 E SOURce POWerf LEVell IMMediate OFFSet u u 0u ern 194 ESOURcCe EPOWer LIMit AMPLitUde iiiter oett et ic i eod erede ede n es 194 SOURCE FOWer PEP ns einher 195 SOURCES e e Tee EE 195 ESOURCE POWEerRANGEUPPer u nennen 195 SOURce POWer Subsystem SOURce POWer ALC DSENsitivity Sensitivity Sets the power detector sensitivity Used for compatibility reasons only Parameters lt Sensitivity gt OFF LOW MED HIGH RST OFF SOURce POWer ALC STATe lt State gt Activates deactivates automatic level control Parameters lt State gt 1 OFFTable OFF ONTable AUTO ON RST ONTable Example See chapter 11 1 2 Generating an UO Modulated Signal on page 146 SOURce POWer ALC SONCe Briefly activates level control for correction purposes Usage Event Manual operation See Readjust on page 74 SOURce POWer ATTenuation RFOFf MODE lt Mode gt Determines the attenuator s state after the instrument is switched on Parameters lt Mode gt MAX FATTenuated FIXed UNCHanged RST MAX SOURce POWer ATTenuation SOVer OFFSet lt Offset gt Sets the switch over offset value of the attenuator Parameters lt Offset gt float Range 10 to 10 Increment 0 1
97. 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 ck ck 2 ck 2 ck 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 EX EX Export the configuration into a mapping file KKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK INSTruments MAPPing FILE d mapping files mapping map ck ck ck ck EEE 0k 0k 0k 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 ck ck ck ck 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 XX Enable exclusive access for the selected instrument KKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK INSTruments EACCess STATe Response 0 0 0 INSTruments EACCess STATe ON OFF OFF Locks the first instrument 11 2 Common Commands Common commands are described in the IEEE 488 2 IEC 625 2 standard These commands have the same effect and are employed in the same way on different devi ces The headers of these commands consist of followed by three letters Many common commands are related to the Status Reporting System Available common commands Common Commands MOP RE 155 MOP RE 155 gl GE 155 RE 156 We DEE 156 WIRD EE 156 EE ee REESEN 156 RE 156 OTB ASP nement A Altea 157 e E 157 SECH EE 157 ls Tm 157 CLS Clear status Sets the status byte STB the standard event register ESR and the EVENt part of the QUEStionable and the OPERation registers to zero The command does not alter the mask and transition parts of the registers It clears the output buffer
98. 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 XX EX RST CLS ck ck ck ck ck ck 0k 0k 0k 0k 0k 00k 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 ck ck ck ck 2 ck ck 2 2 ck 2 2 2 2 2 2022 Lock the instrument to the controller ck ck ck ck EEE 0k 0k 0k 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 ck 2 ck ck ck 2 ck 2 2 2 ck 2 2 2 2 2 2 0202 LOCK 72349234 Lock instrument to avoid interference by other controllers Use an arbitrary number Response 1 Request granted i e the instrument is locked Abort program if request is refused ck ck ck ck ck 0k 0k 0k 0k 0k 0k 0k 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 ck ck 2 ck ck 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 20202 Select normal operation mode fd KKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK SOURce OPMode NORMal ck ck ck ck ck 0k 0k 0k 00k 0k 0k 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 ck ck ck ck ck 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 ko Set RF frequency and level 11 KKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK Programming Examples SOURce FREQuency CW 2 GHz SOURce PHASe 0 SOURce PHASe REFerence SOURce POWer 10dBm SOURce POWer PEP KEKE KKK KKK KKK KKK KK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK EEE EEK A A A A A AH A A KE Enable internal reference frequency source KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK
99. 2 ENABle part 3121110 Fig 14 2 The status register model Remote Control Basics Description of the five status register parts The five parts of a SCPI register have different properties and functions CONDition The CONDition part is written into directly by the hardware or the sum bit of the next lower register Its contents reflect the current instrument status This register part can only be read but not written into or cleared Its contents are not affected by reading PTRansition NTRansition The two transition register parts define which state transition of the CONDition part none 0 to 1 1 to O or both is stored in the EVENt part The Positive TRansition part acts as a transition filter When a bit ofthe CONDition part is changed from 0 to 1 the associated PTR bit decides whether the EVENT bit is set to 1 PTR bit 1 the EVENT bit is set PTR bit 0 the EVENT bit is not set This part can be written into and read as required Its contents are not affected by reading The Negative TRansition part also acts as a transition filter When a bit of the CONDition part is changed from 1 to 0 the associated NTR bit decides whether the EVENT bit is set to 1 NTR bit 1 the EVENT bit is set NTR bit 0 the EVENT bit is not set This part can be written into and read as required Its contents are not affected by reading EVENt The EVENt part indicates whether an event h
100. 3 2 1 The necessary files are provided on the CD included in the delivery The files are stored in folder software Contents of folder software e InstrumentDriver C source code files which provide a functional application programming interface API to R amp S SGS instruments Required if you want to control an instrument via PCle e LinuxKernelDriver C source code files from which you can build a Linux kernel mode driver for the R amp S SGS PCle remote control interface SGMA GUI Graphical user interface program for one or more instruments Runs on a remote PC e SgsDriverDemo C source code module for a demo program using the instrument driver API e SharedLibraries Dlls Shared libraries Dlls for remote control channels Socket and PCle To be used with the instrument driver Building and Installing the Hardware Driver The hardware driver defines the way to communicate with the instrument via PCle interface For Windows operating systems the hardware driver is installed automatically together with the installation of the R amp S SGMA GUI software See also section Installation of R amp S SGMA GUI Software in the Getting Started man ual For Linux operating system the source code of the driver is provided on the CD inclu ded in the delivery In order to build and install this driver root authority is required 1 Copy folder LinuxKernelDriver to your hdd 2 Go to directory host 10 3 2 2 10 3 2 3
101. 30 10 dBm gt Note The SCPI command SOURce POWer LEVel IMMediate AMPLitude sets the level of the Level display that means the level containing off set while SOURce POWer POWer sets the level at the RF output connector Remote command SOURce POWer LEVel IMMediate AMPLitude on page 194 SOURce POWer POWer on page 193 REF Ref Oscillator Source Determines whether the internal built in oscillator TXCO or OXCO is used as a refer ence source or if an external reference is used The internal reference oscillator OCXO requires the additional option R amp S SGS B1 To feed in an external instrument reference use the input connector REF LO IN To output the reference frequency at the output REF LO OUT select SGMA GUI gt Instrument Name gt Ref Oscillator gt REF LO Output gt REF See also chapter 9 4 How to Configure the Reference Oscillator Source on page 114 Int The internal reference signal of 10 MHz is used Ext An external reference signal is used The frequency of the external reference signal must be selected with the parameter SGMA GUI gt Instrument Name gt Ref Oscillator gt Ex Ref Input Frequency Remote command SOURce ROSCillator SOURce on page 202 Working with R amp S SGMA GUI This section explains how to work with the R amp S SGMA GUI software and perform con figuration tasks for manual operation of the instruments S
102. 4 Consignes de securite fondamentales Si un produit est connect de fa on stationnaire tablir avant toute autre connexion le raccordement du conducteur de protection local et du conducteur de protection du produit L installation et le raccordement ne peuvent tre effectu s que par un lectricien ou lectronicien qualifi Sur les appareils stationnaires sans fusible ni disjoncteur automatique ou dispositif de protection similaire int gr s le circuit d alimentation doit tre s curis de sorte que toutes les personnes ayant acc s au produit et le produit lui m me soient suffisamment prot g s contre tout dommage Chaque produit doit tre prot g de mani re appropri e contre les ventuelles surtensions par exemple dues un coup de foudre Sinon les utilisateurs sont expos s des risques de choc lectrique Ne jamais introduire d objets non pr vus cet effet dans les ouvertures du bo tier tant donn que cela peut entra ner des courts circuits dans le produit et ou des chocs lectriques incendies ou blessures Sauf sp cification contraire les produits ne sont pas prot g s contre l infiltration de liquides voir aussi la section tats et positions de fonctionnement point 1 Il faut donc prot ger les produits contre l infiltration de liquides La non observation de cette consigne entraine le risque de choc lectrique pour l utilisateur ou d endommagement du produit ce qui p
103. 400 57600 115200 RST 115200 Example SYSTem COMMunicate SERial BAUD 115200 determines 115200 baudrate SYSTem COMMunicate SERial PARity lt Parity gt Sets the parity for the serial remote control interface Parameters lt Parity gt NONE ODD EVEN RST NONE Example SYST COMM SER PAR NONE selects parity NONE SYSTem Subsystem SYSTem COMMunicate SERial RESource Queries the visa resource string for the serial remote control interface This string is used for remote control of the instrument Return values lt Resource gt string Example SYSTem COMMunicate SERial RESource queries the VISA resource string Response ASRL1 1INSTR Usage Query only SYSTem COMMunicate SERial SBITs lt SBits gt Sets the number of stop bits for the serial remote control interface Parameters lt SBits gt 112 RST 1 Example SYST COMM SER SBIT 2 selects 2 stop bits SYSTem COMMunicate HISLip RESource Queries the VISA resource string used for remote control of the instrument with HiSLIP protocol Return values Resource string Example SYSTem COMMunicate HISLip RESource Response TCPIP 192 1 2 3 hislip0 INSTR Usage Query only Manual operation See Visa Resource Strings on page 104 SYSTem COMMunicate PClexpress RESource Queries the visa resource string for remote control via the PCle interface Return values Resource string Usage Query
104. ANGe LOW r rero nk 195 ele e Ee 195 SOURce POWer SCHaracteristio c rrr rennen n rr c n REO Re e tX YT TER 193 SOURce POWerf LEVell IMMediate OFFSet isa 194 SOURce POWerf LEVell IMMediate AMPLitude ss 194 SOURce ROSCIllator EXTermalFREGQd ency c ttt sein SOURce ROSGCIllator EXTeralSBANdwidth 2 5 1 erret ier ir iier eO e a ben SOURce ROSCillator OUT Put FRE QUENCY esee nnne enne TE TNTE NEEE SOURce ROSCillator SOURCE orc rtr ee nen nennen SOURce ROSCillator INTernal ADJust VALue SOURce ROSCillator INTernal ADJust S TA Te eere rrr mrt nnn nnne 203 SOURce lt hw gt CORRection CSET DATA FREQUENCY inner 182 SOURce hw CORRection CSET DATA FREQuency POINts sess 182 SOURceshw gt CORRection CSET DA TA PO We nennen 183 SOURce lt hw gt CORRection CSET DATA POWer POINtS ie 183 SOURce lt hw gt CORRection CSETLSELOCE u rennen en ana SOURce lt hw gt CORRection DEXChange AFILe SELect SOURce lt hw gt CORRection DEXChange AFILe SEParator COLUMN 185 SOURce hw CORRection DEXChange AF ILe SEParator DECimal esee 185 SOURce hw CORRection DEXChangse EXECUte 4er oin tenuit rihanna tk eiui 186 SOURceshw CORRection DEXChange MOBDBE
105. C Ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck kk ck Select the directory MMEM CDIR var user Lists Create and or select the pulse train data file SOURCe PULM TRAin SEL P FIVE Enter the pulse train data SOURCe PULM TRAin ONTime 10ns 30ns 40ns 20ns 10ns SOURCe PULM TRAin OFFTime 30ns 40ns 50ns 40ns 30ns SOURCe PULM TRAin REPetition 10 1 3 10 6 cC Ck Ck ck ck ck ck kk kk KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK Select pulse train mode ck ck ck KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK Ck Ck Ck Ck Ck Ck Ck Ck Ck Ck ck ck KKK Select the internal modulation generator and the pulse mode SOURce PULM SOURce INTernal SOURCe PULM MODE PTRain ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck KK KKK KK KKK KK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK ckckckockckckckckck ck kckok Activate the signal output y ck ck ck ck ck ck EEE 00k 0k 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 22 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 ck ck 2 ck ck ck ck ck 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2027 SOURce PGENerator OUTPut STATe 1 SOURce PULM STATe 1 OUTPut1 STATe 1 FSOURCSEHW gt PUEM DELW Lan aaa an 198 FSOURce lt hw gt PULM DOUBle DELaY u a 198 SOURceshw PUENIDOUBle WIDThR 222222 ea ea 198 SOURceshw PUEM NODE 2 2 ee ae needs 198 SOURceshw pEPUEM PER GG 2 2 2
106. CO is used as a refer ence source or if an external reference is used The internal reference oscillator OCXO requires the additional option R amp S SGS B1 To feed in an external instrument reference use the input connector REF LO IN To output the reference frequency at the output REF LO OUT select SGMA GUI gt Instrument Name gt Ref Oscillator gt REF LO Output gt REF See also chapter 9 4 How to Configure the Reference Oscillator Source on page 114 Int The internal reference signal of 10 MHZ is used Reference Oscillator Ext An external reference signal is used The frequency of the external reference signal must be selected with the parameter SGMA GUI gt Instrument Name gt Ref Oscillator gt Ex Ref Input Frequency Remote command SOURce ROSCillator SOURce on page 202 Ext Ref Input Frequency Available only for Source gt Ext Selects the frequency of the external reference signal An external reference signal with a frequency of 10 MHz 100 MHz or 1000 MHz can be used see alsotable 7 1 Remote command SOURce ROSCillator EXTernal FREQuency on page 202 Synchronization Bandwidth Available only for Source gt Ext Selects the synchronization bandwidth for an external reference signal The wideband setting is provided for using very good reference sources of high spectral purity Wide Synchronization bandwidth is app 250 Hz Narrow Synchronization bandwidth is app 40 Hz
107. Combination not possible To define the signal at the REF LO OUT connector 1 Inthe Frequency Phase gt Local Oscillator LO Coupling dialog select the LO Source as required 2 In the Reference Oscillator dialog select the Ref Oscillator Source as required 3 In the Frequency Phase gt Local Oscillator LO Coupling dialog set the REF LO Output Consider the dependencies see table 9 1 9 7 How to Connect and Configure Instruments for Opti mum Phase Coherence Using the LO input output connectors two or more instruments can be coupled to ach ieve optimum phase coherence between their RF output signals The first instrument in the chain delivers the LO signal at the REF LO OUT connector to the REF LO IN con nector of second instrument If required more instruments can be connected in the same way The first instrument is set such that the internal synthesizer generates the system LO frequency In all following instruments the internal synthesizer is switched off and the LO signal from the REF LO IN connector drives the UO modulator or the CW path To connect the instruments 1 Connect the instruments as a daisy chain see figure 9 3 i e connect the REF LO IN connector of each further instrument to the REF LO OUT connector of the previ ous one 2 Optionally provide an external reference signal for the first instrument User Manual 1173 9105 02 10 116 How to Restore the LAN Connection
108. Connection State The three colors of the state indicator in front of the instrument s name distinguish between the following states e grey the instrument is configured and activated in the R amp S SGMA GUI but there is no connection to the instrument e green the instrument is active the connection is working and the instrument can be manually and remotely operated e red the instrument is in one of the following states Standby state To operate the instrument manually it has to be switched to ready state see To return the instrument from standby to ready state on page 119 Instrument locked The red state indication together with the message Instrument Locked in the Info line indicates that the instrument is locked for Exclusive Access from another SGMA GUI or controller The instrument is performing a time consuming operation e g a selftest Maximum Frequency The numbers in the rectangular box on the left of the instrument s name indicate the maximum frequency of the instrument When the Eco Mode is turned on then this rectangular is colored in green and the fre quency shown in the rectangular corresponds to the maximum frequency available in this mode Pulse Modulation A Jl sign on the left of the instrument s name indicates that the pulse modulation is switched on Local Oscillator A 9 sign on the left of the instrument s name indicates that the internal Local Oscillator is switched off Instrument Name D
109. Connector Settings The dialog provides settings to determine the signal at the input output of the multi pur pose TRIG connector gt To access the pulse connector trigger settings select SGMA GUI gt Instrument Name gt Connector Comprises the settings necessary to configure the signal at the signal at the input output of the multi purpose TRIG connector Trigger Connector Mode Determines the signal at the input output of the multi purpose TRIG connector Signal Valid Output of high signal to mark valid frequency and level settings Not Signal Valid Output of high signal to mark the transition state when frequency and level change Pulse Video Out Output of the internally generated pulse video modulating signal The video signal level corresponds to the RF envelope Pulse Mod Ext Trigger Input for an external trigger signal used to trigger the pulse genera tor IO Modulation and Signal Impairment Pulse Mod Ext Source Input for an externally provided pulse modulation signal Used when an external pulse modulator source is provided at the connector Remote command CONNector TRIGger OMODe on page 163 7 8 1 Q Modulation and Signal Impairment The R amp S SGS offers UO modulation with external analog UO signals 1 Q modulation with an external analog UO signal is possible for the instrument equipped with fre quency options R amp S SGS B106V B112V The external signal is input via the and Q c
110. Control Panel gt Add Remove Programs and select the entry SGMA GUI V VV VVV VVV The script file identifies and removes all currently installed R amp S SGMA GUI soft ware items Connecting a Remote PC via LAN The R amp S SGS is equipped with a network interface and can be connected to an Ether net LAN local area network The interface can be used for example e To connect an external computer for manual control of the instrument by means of the R amp S SGMA GUI software e To operate the device by a remote control program See chapter 10 Network and Remote Control Operation on page 124 This section describes how to configure the LAN interface It includes the following top ics e chapter 2 3 2 1 Connecting the Instrument to the Network on page 22 e chapter 2 3 2 2 Assigning the IP Address on page 23 e chapter 2 3 2 3 Automatically adding instruments to the SGMA GUI on page 23 Connecting the Instrument to the Network There are two methods to establish a LAN connection to the instrument e Anon dedicated network Ethernet connection from the instrument to an existing network e A dedicated network connection Point to point connection between the instru ment and a single computer In both cases an IP address has to be assigned to the instrument and the computer see chapter 2 3 2 2 Assigning the IP Address on page 23 Connecting an External PC and Devices Setting Up a Network LAN Connectio
111. Count recv currentSocketDescr receiveBuffer receiveBufferSize 0 if receivedByteCount lt 0 throw string error while receiving data n rxString string receiveBuffer receiving receivedByteCount receiveBufferSize delete receiveBuffer string TcpClient getCurrentHostName const return currentHostName int TcpClient getCurrentPort const return currentPort TelnetClient cpp include lt iostream gt include TcpClient h void printUsage cout lt lt usage EthernetRawCommand lt server ip gt scpi command lt lt endl int main int argc char argv int errorCode 0 no error Telnet program examples bool useSingleCommand false string singleCommand string hostname int port string input TcpClient client switch argc case 3 useSingleCommand true singleCommand argv 2 case 2 hostname argv 1 break default printUsage return 1 try client connectToServer hostname port bool terminate false while terminate char buffer 1024 if useSingleCommand input singleCommand send string else cin getline buffer 1024 input buffer if input end terminate true if terminate client transmit input send string int qPos input find 2 0 receive string only when needed ZEIL qPos gt 0 string rcStr client receive r
112. ERMINA TOR gt clears the output buffer 14 1 6 General Programming Recommendations Initial instrument status before changing settings Manual operation is designed for maximum possible operating convenience In con trast the priority of remote control is the predictability of the instrument status Thus when a command attempts to define incompatible settings the command is ignored and the instrument status remains unchanged i e other settings are not automatically adapted Therefore control programs should always define an initial instrument status e g using the RST command and then implement the required settings Command sequence As a general rule send commands and queries in different program messages Other wise the result ofthe query may vary depending on which operation is performed first see also Preventing Overlapping Execution Reacting to malfunctions The service request is the only possibility for the instrument to become active on its own Each controller program should instruct the instrument to initiate a service 14 2 Telnet program examples request in case of malfunction The program should react appropriately to the service request Error queues The error queue should be queried after every service request in the controller pro gram as the entries describe the cause of an error more precisely than the status regis ters Especially in the test phase of a controller program the error queue sh
113. Express Interface A PCI Express PCle connector is provided on the rear panel of the instrument Refer to chapter 10 3 Advanced Remote Control Using PCle on page 134 for a description of how to set up a remote control connection via PCle and the permitted cables Via PCI Express some commands can be sent to the instrument with optimized speed memory mapped remote control e g frequency or level settings This allows mini mum setup time PCle Resource String The syntax of the used PCle resource string is PCIe vendor ID product ID gt lt serial number gt INSTR where e PCle denotes the used interface e vendor ID is the manufacturer ID for Rohde amp Schwarz product ID is the product identification of the R amp S instrument serial number is the individual serial number on the rear of the instrument e INSTR indicates the instrument resource class optional You can retreive the PCle resource string from the SGMA GUI gt Instrument Name gt Setup Remote dialog Example PCle 0x162f 0x132e 100021 INSTR 0x162f is the vendor ID for Rohde amp Schwarz 0x132e is the product ID for the R amp S SGS 100021 is the serial number of the particular instrument 10 2 d 10 2 1 Starting a Remote Control Session Starting a Remote Control Session The instrument and the controller have to be connected with a suitable cable and switched on A remote control program must open a conn
114. F output connector of the instrument Parameters Amplitude float Range 20 to 25 Increment 0 01 RST 10 Example See chapter 11 1 4 Advanced Task for Optimizing Perform ance on page 149 Manual operation See Level on page 56 SOURce POWer LEVel IMMediate OFFSet Offset Note The level offset is also effective for level sweeps The command specifies the constant level offset of a downstream attenuator amplifier If a level offset is entered the level entered with SOURce POWer POWer no longer corresponds to the RF output level The following correlation applies POWer RF output level POWer OFFSet Entering a level offset does not change the RF output level but rather the query value of POWer Parameters lt Offset gt float Range 100 to 100 Increment 0 1 RST 0 Manual operation See Offset on page 72 SOURce POWer LIMit AMPLitude Amplitude Sets the upper limit of the RF signal power The value is not affected by an instrument preset and RST function This parameter is influenced only by the factory preset SYST FPR and its factory value is equal to the upper limit Parameters lt Amplitude gt float Range 120 to 25 Increment 0 01 Default unit dBm Example See chapter 11 1 4 Advanced Task for Optimizing Perform ance on page 149 SOURce PULM Subsystem Manual operation See Limit on page 74 SOURce POWer PEP Queries
115. For details see To connect the AC supply on page 18 Configuring a CW Signal with the R amp S SGMA GUI 4 First steps with the Instrument This section provides examples on how to configure the R amp S SGS to generate a con tinuous wave CW signal via the R amp S SGMA GUI and the R amp S SGS100A Web GUI 4 1 Configuring a CW Signal with the R amp S SGMA GUI The R amp S SGS in this example is a base unit equipped with the frequency option R amp S SGS B106 As a prerequisite for this example the R amp S SGS has to be connected to a remote PC The R amp S SGMA GUI software has to be installed on this remote PC and the instru ment is added to the list of Available Instruments REF LO OUT 000005 82u8J8j8M REF IN J RF IN 9 Fig 4 1 Example of the setup For information on how to fulfill these requirements refer to chapter 2 3 2 1 Connecting the Instrument to the Network on page 22 chapter 2 3 1 Installing the R amp S SGMA GUI Software on an External PC on page 21 chapter 2 3 2 3 Automatically adding instruments to the SGMA GUI on page 23 1 Check the front panel of the R amp S SGS The POWER ON STANDBY and LAN key have to be green 2 On the connected remote PC start the R amp S SGMA GUI software application The main panel of the application opens The panel provides a quick access to the main settings of the configured and activated instruments The display shows one row per in
116. GS and the R amp S SGU to the PCle switch 3 Switch on the R amp S SGS and the R amp S SGU The POWER ON STANDBY keys of both instruments have to be green and not blinking 4 Switch on the computer 5 On the computer start one of the following a the R amp S SGMA GUI b an application program for remote control of the instruments 6 Manually or remotely activate the R amp S SGU as an extension to the R amp S SGS The logical connection between an R amp S SGS and an R amp S SGU is established by the o driver layer of a program e g the R amp S SGMA GUI or the library PCleController dll Linux libpciecontroller so of a remote control program on the PC Such a program has to be running on the PC so that an R amp S SGS is able to communicate with an R amp S SGU 5 3 Introduction to the Instrument Functions This section is intended to give a brief introduction to the instrument s function The description of the related user interface parameters is provided in the corresponding section in chapter 7 Signal Generator Settings on page 65 For detailed information on how to work with the instrument and to perform basic and advanced operating and configuration tasks refer to chapter 9 Performing Configura tion Tasks on page 109 The figure 5 8 provides a simplified block diagram of the instrument Introduction to the Instrument Functions For better understanding of the instrument functions and the signal flow the bloc
117. HCP server the first time the device is registered on the network Alternatively you can also assign its LAN device name You can find the IP address in the SGMA GUI gt Instrument Name gt Setup gt Remote dialog and also adjust it manually if required See below the characteristics of the VISA resource strings for the corresponding inter face protocols The highlighted characters are crucial HiSLIP TCPIP host address hislipO INSTR hislip0 HiSLIP device name designates that the interface protocol HiSLIP is used mandatory hislipO is composed of HiSLIP device name HiSLIP port and must be assigned For details of the HiSLIP protocol refer to chapter 10 1 2 2 HiSLIP Protocol on page 129 VXI 11 TCPIP host address instO INSTR e inst0 LAN device name indicates that the VXI 11 protocol is used optional Remote Control Interfaces and Protocols instO currently selects the VXI 11 protocol by default and can be omitted For details of the VXI 11 protocol refer to chapter 10 1 2 3 VXI 11 Protocol on page 130 Socket Communication TCPIP host address port SOCKET e port determines the used port number e SOCKET indicates the raw network socket resource class Socket communication requires the specification of the port commonly referred to as port number and of SOCKET to complete the VISA resource string with the associ ated protocol used The registered port for socket commu
118. Instruments gt Instrument gt Edit gt Edit Instrument and trigger Device Identify b select SGMA GUI gt Instrument Name gt Setup gt Remote gt Remote Channels and trigger Device Identify The green LAN LED on the front panel of the instrument blinks Working with R amp S SGMA GUI 6 4 5 Managing Messages in the Info Dialog How to get additional information on the message gt Inthe Info dialog click a message to select it In the lower section of the dialog additional information on the highlighted mes sage is displayed How to display all messages gt Inthe Info dialog click the History button A history of all messages that have occurred since the R amp S SGMA GUI software was started is listed in the upper dialog pane The most recent message is dis played first How to delete an error message gt Inthe Info dialog select the highlighted message and click the Delete button Tip This button is available only when the history of the messages is displayed The highlighted message is cleared How to delete all error messages gt Inthe Info dialog click the Delete All button Tip This button is available only when the history of the messages is displayed All messages are cleared How to delete all brief messages Inthe Info dialog click the Del volatile button Tip This button is available only when the history of the messages is displayed All brief messages are
119. Manual operation NEGative POSitive RST POSitive PULM TRIG EXT SLOP NEG The pulse generator is triggered on the negative slope of the external trigger signal See Ext Trigger Input Slope on page 80 SOURce lt hw gt PULM TRIGger MODE lt Mode gt Selects the trigger mode for pulse modulation Parameters lt Mode gt Example Manual operation AUTO EXTernal EGATe AUTO The pulse modulation is generated continuously EXTernal The pulse modulation is triggered by an external trigger event The trigger signal is supplied via the trigger connector EGATe The pulse modulation is gated by an external gate signal The trigger signal is supplied via the trigger connector RST AUTO PULM TRIG MODE EXT selects triggering by an external trigger event See Trigger Mode on page 79 SOURce lt hw gt PULM WIDTh lt Width gt Sets the width of the generated pulse The width determines the pulse length The pulse width must be at least 20ns less than the set pulse period Parameters lt Width gt Example Manual operation float Range 20 ns to 100s Increment 10ns RST 2 us PULM WIDT 33 us sets a width of 33 us for the pulse See Pulse Width on page 78 SOURce ROSCillator Subsystem 11 19 SOURce ROSCillator Subsystem SOURcel ROSCillator EXTernal FREQuency 202 SOURce ROSCillator OUTPut FREQuency esser
120. ORR DEXC EXEC starts the import of the ASCII file data into the user correction file Usage Event SOURce lt hw gt CORRection DEXChange MODE Mode Selects if user correction lists should be imported or exported Depending on the selec tion her the file select command define either the source or the destination for user correction lists and ASCII files Parameters Mode IMPort EXPort RST IMPort SOURce CORRection Subsystem Example CORR DEXC MODE IMP selects that ASCII files with frequency and level value pairs are imported and transferred into user correction lists CORR DEXC AFIL SEL var sgs ucor csv selects that ASCII file ucor csv is imported CORR DEXC SEL var sgs ucor imp selects that the ASCII file ucor csv is imported into user cor rection list ucor_imp SOURce lt hw gt CORRection DEXChange SELect lt Filename gt Selects the user correction list to be imported or exported The user correction files are stored with the fixed file extensions uco in a directory of the user s choice The directory applicable to the commands is defined with the com mand MMEMor y CDIR A path can also be specified in command SOUR CORR DEXC SEL in which case the files are stored or loaded in the specified directory Parameters lt Filename gt string Example CORR DEXC MODE IMP selects that ASCII files with frequency a
121. PI command is used when the instrument is in extension mode Enables you to run an internal adjustment only on the extension instrument CONNector Subsystem Parameters lt OExtension gt 0 1 OFF ON RST 0 Example CAL OEXT ON activates the mode for calibrating only the extension instrument CAL LEV MEAS calibrates only the extension instrument CAL OEXT OFF deactivates the mode for calibrating only the extension instru ment CALibration lt hw gt ROSCillator DATA MODE Mode Defines whether the factory provided or a custom defined calibration value is used to adjust the reference oscillator Parameters lt Mode gt FACTory CUSTomer RST FACTory Example CALibrationl ROSCillator DATA MODE CUSTomer CALibrationl ROSCillator DATA 35600 Manual operation See Active Adjustment Data on page 108 CALibration lt hw gt ROSCillator DATA lt Data gt Sets the calibration value for the custom defined external adjustment Parameters lt Data gt integer Range 0 to INT_MAX RST 0 Example see CALibration lt hw gt ROSCillator DATA MODE on page 162 Manual operation See Calibration Value on page 108 11 6 CONNector Subsystem GONNeelorREFLA OUTPUt u a adriana tapes 162 CONNector TRIGIEROMODE u 163 CONNector REFLo OUTPut lt Output gt Determines the signal provided at the output connector REF LO OUT rear of the instrument DIAGnos
122. Put AMODe lt AMode gt Switches the mode of the attenuator at the RF output SOURce Subsystem Parameters lt AMode gt AUTO FlXed APASsive AUTO The attenuator is switched automatically The level settings are made in the full range APASsive The attenuator is switched automatically The level settings are made only for the passive reference curcuits The high level ranges are not available FIXed The level settings are made without switching the attenuator When this operating mode is switched on the attenuator is fixed to its current position and the resulting variation range is defined RST AUTO Example See chapter 11 1 2 Generating an UO Modulated Signal on page 146 OUTPut STATe PON lt Pon gt Selects the state which the RF output assumes when the instrument is switched on Parameters lt Pon gt OFF UNCHanged RST UNCHanged Example See chapter 11 1 4 Advanced Task for Optimizing Perform ance on page 149 Manual operation See Power On State on page 74 OUTPut STATe lt State gt Activates deactivates the RF output Parameters lt State gt 0 1 OFF ON Example See chapter 11 1 2 Generating an UO Modulated Signal on page 146 Manual operation See RF ON OFF on page 56 11 13 SOURce Subsystem Ree 180 ESOUReE FREQueney CWIFIXedl niet 180 ESOURce LOS Cao SOURCE ea ee Ra nl 180 SOURCE PATHICOUNE un an sense nassen 180
123. R amp S SGS100A Web GUI 33 o A nnmnnn nnmnnn 35 Setups for Instrument Control 35 5 1 1 5 1 2 5 1 3 5 2 5 2 1 5 2 2 5 2 3 5 3 6 1 6 1 1 6 1 2 6 1 2 1 6 1 2 2 6 1 2 3 6 1 2 4 6 1 3 6 2 6 2 1 6 2 2 6 3 6 4 6 4 1 6 4 2 6 4 2 1 6 4 2 2 6 4 2 3 6 4 2 4 6 4 2 5 6 4 2 6 6 4 2 7 6 4 2 8 6 4 3 Manual Operation from the R amp S GCGMA GU 35 Remote Control from a Controller 36 Control of an R amp S SGS from an R amp S Signal Generator 36 Setups for Connecting an R amp S SGS and an R amp S SGU 37 Direct Connection u en e koe ea aere 37 Connection in a Company Network ss 38 Connection with a PCle Switch 41 Introduction to the Instrument Functions eese 42 Understanding the R amp S SGMA GUI Software 44 Operating Menu and Toolbar sense 44 adt ee ernennen ahnen kann da 45 SETUP dE UE 46 Configure Instruments 46 Add Edit Instruments sr 48 Software Options Dialogue 51 Diese dcl 51 alo 51 Info Dialog and Messages in the Info Bar 52 MO DIE OG ec ia 52 Understanding the Messages in the Info Bar 53 C a 54 Working with R amp S SGMA GU uunusssnsnnsnnnnnnannnnnnnnnnnannnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnannnnnnnn 57 Storing and Loading Settings 57 Handling Instruments in the R amp S SGMA GUI
124. R amp S9SGS100A SGMA RF Source User Manual ILL 1173 9105 02 10 T iD 3 D co D tn o m Test amp M This document describes the R amp S SGS100A stock no 1416 0505 02 and its options e R amp S SGS100A B1 1416 2408 02 e R amp S SGS100A B26 1416 1353 02 e R amp S SGS100A B106 106V 1416 2308 02 1416 2350 02 R amp S SGS100A B112 112V 1416 1553 02 1416 1576 02 e R amp S SGS100A K22 1416 2650 02 e R amp S SGS100A K90 1416 2608 02 The firmware of the instrument makes use of the operating system LINUX and other valuable open source software packages For information see the Open Source Acknowledgement on the user documentation CD ROM included in delivery Rohde amp Schwarz would like to thank the open source community for their valuable contribution to embedded computing 2015 Rohde amp Schwarz GmbH amp Co KG M hldorfstr 15 81671 M nchen Germany Phone 49 89 41 29 0 Fax 49 89 41 29 12 164 Email info rohde schwarz com Internet www rohde schwarz com Subject to change Data without tolerance limits is not binding R amp S is a registered trademark of Rohde amp Schwarz GmbH amp Co KG Trade names are trademarks of the owners The following abbreviations are used throughout this manual R amp S9SGS100A is abbreviated as R amp S SGS R amp S SGMA GUI is abbreviated as R amp S SGMA GUI R amp S SGU100A is abbreviated as R amp S SGU R amp S FSW is abbre
125. RST 0 SOURce POWer LMODe lt LevMode gt Selects the level mode SOURce POWer Subsystem Parameters lt LevMode gt NORM LNOise LDIStortion NORM automatic selection of the best settings LNOISe settings for lowest noise LDIStortion settings for lowest distortions Example See chapter 11 1 4 Advanced Task for Optimizing Perform ance on page 149 Manual operation See Mode on page 72 SOURce POWer POWer lt Amplitude gt Sets the level at the RF output connector This value does not consider a specified offset The command SOURce POWer LEVel IMMediate AMPLitude sets the level of the Level display that means the level containing offset Parameters lt Amplitude gt float Range 20 to 25 Increment 0 01 RST 10 Example POW POW 15 sets the RF level at output to 15 dBm Manual operation See Level on page 56 SOURce POWer SCHaracteristic lt Characteristic gt Selects the characteristic for the level setting Parameters lt Characteristic gt AUTO UNINterrupted CVSWr USER MONotone UNINterrupted uninterrupted level setting CVSWr constant VSWR MONotone strictly monotone RST AUTO Example See chapter 11 1 4 Advanced Task for Optimizing Perform ance on page 149 Manual operation See Setting Characteristic on page 73 SOURce POWer Subsystem SOURce POWer LEVel IMMediate AMPLitude Amplitude Sets the RF level at the R
126. SET DATA FREQuency lt Frequency gt Transfers the frequency data to the table selected with CORRection CSET SELect The numerical suffix at SOURce must not be used for this command Parameters lt Frequency gt Example Frequency 1 Frequency 2 Range 300 kHz to RFmax depending on model CORR CSET var sgs ucorl selects the table ucor1 CORR CSET DATA FREQ 100MHz 102MHz 103MHz enters the frequency value in the table ucor1 SOURce lt hw gt CORRection CSET DATA FREQuency POINts The command queries the number of frequency values in the selected table The numerical suffix at SOURce must not be used for this command Return values lt Points gt Example Usage integer Range 0 to 10000 RST 0 CORR CSET var sgs selects the table ucor1 CORR CSET DATA FREQ POIN queries the number of frequency values in the table ucor1 Response 440 the table ucor1 contains 440 frequency values Query only SOURce CORRection Subsystem SOURce lt hw gt CORRection CSET DATA POWer lt Power gt Transfers the level data to the table selected with SOURce lt hw gt CORRection CSET SELect RST does not affect data lists The numerical suffix at SOURce must not be used for this command Parameters Power Power 1 Power 2 Example CORR CSET var sgs ucorl selects the table ucor1 CORR CSET DATA POW 1dB 0 8dB 0 75dB enters the level valu
127. SOUR CORR ON activates user correction SOURce lt hw gt CORRection VALue Queries the current value for user correction Return values lt Value gt float Range 100 to 100 Increment 0 01 RST 0 Example CORR VAL queries the value currently used for level correction Response 3 the correction value is 3 dB Usage Query only SOURce lQ Subsystem SOURCE IO STATE u a a 189 SOURceJ IQ IMPairment IQRatio MAGNitude Rn nn ernennen 189 E SOURcE I 1MPairment EEAKageil u a ae 189 SOURcel 1Q 1MPairment LEAKage Q iii 189 SOURce 1Q 1IMPairment QUADrature ANGLE 189 ESOURceLEHIGHMPaitment S TA Te tco aE tar inr es 190 SOURCel IQ el RESACIOM RR 190 ESOURCE O WBS Tale cick EE 190 SOURce lQ Subsystem SOURce IQ STATe State Switches the I Q modulation on and off Parameters lt State gt 0 1 OFF ON RST 0 Example See chapter 11 1 2 Generating an UO Modulated Signal on page 146 Manual operation See Mod State on page 56 SOURce IQ 1MPairment IQRatio MAGNitude lt IqRatio gt Sets the ratio of modulation to Q modulation amplification imbalance The input may be either in dB or The resolution is 0 001 dB an input in percent is rounded to the closest valid value in dB A query returns the value in dB Parameters IqRatio float Range 1 to 1 Increment
128. Source on page 215 SYSTem COMMunicate PCIexpress RESource on page 214 Factory Preset Device Identity Triggers the device identification function The LAN LED on the front panel of the selected instrument blinks See also chapter 6 4 4 Bidirectional Instrument Identification on page 61 8 10 Factory Preset The Factory Preset dialog provides a function to reset the instrument s settings to their factory states 1 To access this dialog select SGMA GUI gt Instrument Name gt Setup gt Factory Preset Execute Factory Preset Resets instrument to factory configuration Security settings and user data are not effected 2 Select Execute Factory Preset The instrument s settings are reset to their factory states Security settings and user data are not effected Execute Factory Preset Reset the instrument s settings to their factory state Note Because Factory Preset resets the Remote Channel Settings and Network Settings to the default values executing factory preset via remote control may termi nate the connection to the instrument if these settings had been configured to values different to the default ones The factory preset function resets nearly all instrument settings In addition to the regu lar preset a Factory Preset resets also the following values e Power on settings Level dialog e Network settings including hostname Setup gt Network Setting dialog
129. To connect an USB device to the interface ofthe R amp S SGS always connect the USB Type Micro A connector to the R amp S SGS Refer to the documentation of the USB device to find out which USB connector type you can connect to the USB device The figure 2 2 illustrates schematically the required connector type to emphasize on the different connector shape Fig 2 2 USB Type Micro A connectors If you connect an R amp S SGS to an R amp S SGU via an USB cable perform the steps as described in chapter 5 2 Setups for Connecting an R amp S SGS and an R amp S SGU on page 37 Using an USB Adapter You can use an USB adapter to customize the connectors of an USB cable to the requirements of the instrument For example you can use a Type A Micro A adapter to customize a standard USB cable with Type A and Type Micro B connectors for the connection of an R amp S SGS acting as a host to an R amp S SGU acting as an USB device In some cases you can also use a Type A Micro B adapter to establish a connection to the instrument To check whether the adapter you have is suitable or not you can connect an USB stick with an LED through the adapter to the instrument If the LED of the USB stick lights up after a connection to the instrument then you can use this adapter for further applications with the instrument Front Panel Tour 3 Instrument Tour The following topics will help you get familiar with the instrument and perform the first step
130. UE y ha salido de nuestra planta en estado impecable segun los estandares t cnicos de seguridad Para poder preservar este estado y garantizar un funcionamiento libre de peligros el usuario debera atenerse a todas las indicaciones informaciones de seguridad y notas de alerta El grupo de empresas Rohde amp Schwarz esta siempre a su disposici n en caso de que tengan preguntas referentes a estas informaciones de seguridad Adem s queda en la responsabilidad del usuario utilizar el producto en la forma debida Este producto est destinado exclusivamente al uso en la industria y el laboratorio o si ha sido expresamente autorizado para aplicaciones de campo y de ninguna manera deber ser utilizado de modo que alguna persona cosa pueda sufrir da o El uso del producto fuera de sus fines definidos o sin tener en cuenta las instrucciones del fabricante queda en la responsabilidad del usuario El fabricante no se hace en ninguna forma responsable de consecuencias a causa del mal uso del producto 1171 0000 42 08 Page 7 Instrucciones de seguridad elementales Se parte del uso correcto del producto para los fines definidos si el producto es utilizado conforme a las indicaciones de la correspondiente documentaci n del producto y dentro del margen de rendimiento definido ver hoja de datos documentaci n informaciones de seguridad que siguen El uso del producto hace necesarios conocimientos t cnicos y ciertos conocimientos del idioma ingl s Por
131. XChange AFlLe SEParator DECimal Decimal Selects the decimal separator used in the ASCII data between decimal point and comma with floating point numerals Parameters Decimal DOT COMMa RST DOT SOURce CORRection Subsystem Example CORR DEXC MODE EXP selects that the user correction list is exported into an ASCII file CORR DEXC AFIL SEL var sgs import ucor csv selects ASCII file ucor csv as destination for the user correction list data CORR DEXC AFIL SEP COL TAB the pairs of frequency and level values are separated by a tabu lator CORR DEXC AFIL SEP DEC DOT selects the decimal separator dot CORR DEXC SEL var sgs import ucor imp selects that the user correction list ucor_imp is imported into ASCII file ucor csv SOURce lt hw gt CORRection DEXChange EXECute Starts the export or import of the selected file When import is selected the ASCII file is imported as user correction list When export is selected the user correction list is exported into the selected ASCII file Example CORR DEXC MODE IMP selects that ASCII files with frequency and level value pairs are imported and transferred into user correction lists CORR DEXC AFIL SEL var sgs import ucor csv selects that ASCII file ucor csv is imported CORR DEXC SEL var sgs import ucor imp selects that the ASCII file ucor csv is imported into user cor rection list ucor imp C
132. Xed RANGE UPPE P orinar ee en en 178 e Selen OUTPULESTAT EE TAP TANS RON BE PASEA ne ae RESTA EE SOURce lt hw gt PRESet sees m STAN iSTATus OPERallon e elt re 204 O 0 nue 204 STATUS OPERAUONINTRANSIION ss cence oerte en EELER SE need tp gere te ee u 205 STATUS OPERAatiON PTRanSitiON DEE 205 STATUS OPERAUON E WEE 205 STATUS PRES nannten ara 205 STATUS QUEStionabl e CONDITION EE 206 STATus QUEStlonable ENABIO etin tente trier tenes no erigere en rennen 206 STATus QUEStionable NTRansillOn cator a ardent ane menthe 206 STATus QUEStionable PTRansition STATUS e REITER A EE SCHRAM NIE QUEUE NEXT KE 207 S5YSTem COMMunicate HISEip RESQUICE E 214 SYSTem COMMunicate NETWork IPADdress ii 211 SYSTem COMMunicate NETWork IPADdress MODE iii 211 S5YSTem COMMunicate NETWork MACAaddressS cuina er Rica rect rer cH eL 211 SYSTem COMMunicate NETWork RESource SYSTem COMMunicate NETWork RESTAR use SYSTtem COMMunicate NETWorkSTATUS Posa a ae 212 SYSTem COMMunicate NETWork COMMon HOSTname nono conocio nan nc cnn nono nennen 212 SYSTem COMMunicate NETWork IPADdress GATeway ss 212 SYSTem COMMunicate NETWork IPADdress SUBNet MASK eeee sees teeeeeeeseneenneeeeee 213 coy Siem COMM
133. Zellen nicht oder unzureichend beachtet kann dies Explosion Brand und oder schwere Verletzungen von Personen unter Umst nden mit Todesfolge verursachen Die Handhabung von Batterien und Akkumulatoren mit alkalischen Elektrolyten z B Lithiumzellen muss der EN 62133 entsprechen 1 Zellen d rfen nicht zerlegt ge ffnet oder zerkleinert werden 2 Zellen oder Batterien d rfen weder Hitze noch Feuer ausgesetzt werden Die Lagerung im direkten Sonnenlicht ist zu vermeiden Zellen und Batterien sauber und trocken halten Verschmutzte Anschl sse mit einem trockenen sauberen Tuch reinigen 1171 0000 41 08 Seite 6 Grundlegende Sicherheitshinweise Zellen oder Batterien d rfen nicht kurzgeschlossen werden Zellen oder Batterien d rfen nicht gefahrbringend in einer Schachtel oder in einem Schubfach gelagert werden wo sie sich gegenseitig kurzschlie en oder durch andere leitende Werkstoffe kurzgeschlossen werden k nnen Eine Zelle oder Batterie darf erst aus ihrer Originalverpackung entnommen werden wenn sie verwendet werden soll Zellen oder Batterien d rfen keinen unzul ssig starken mechanischen St en ausgesetzt werden Bei Undichtheit einer Zelle darf die Fl ssigkeit nicht mit der Haut in Ber hrung kommen oder in die Augen gelangen Falls es zu einer Ber hrung gekommen ist den betroffenen Bereich mit reichlich Wasser waschen und rztliche Hilfe in Anspruch nehmen Werden Zellen oder Batterien die alkalische Elek
134. able protection level 1 with command SYSTem PROTect lt ch gt STATe on page 215 Parameters lt Hostname gt string Example SYSTem PROTectl STATe OFF 123456 SYSTem COMMunicate NETWork HOSTname SIGGEN sets the individual computer name of the R amp S SGS Manual operation See Hostname on page 102 SYSTem COMMunicate NETWork IPADdress GATeway Gateway Sets the IP address of the default gateway Parameters Gateway string Range 0 0 0 0 to ff ff ff ff Example SYSTem COMMunicate NETWork IPADdress GATeway 1 2 3 4 sets the IP address of the default gateway SYSTem Subsystem Manual operation See Default Gateway on page 103 SYSTem COMMunicate NETWork IPADdress SUBNet MASK Mask Sets the subnet mask Parameters lt Mask gt string Example SYSTem COMMunicate NETWork IPADdress SUBNet MASK 255 255 0 0 determines the subnet mask Manual operation See Subnet Mask on page 103 SYSTem COMMunicate NETWork RESource Queries the VISA resource string used for remote control of the instrument with VXI 11 protocol Return values Resource string Example SYSTem COMMunicate NETWork RESource Response TCPIP 192 1 2 3 INSTR Usage Query only Manual operation See Visa Resource Strings on page 104 SYSTem COMMunicate SERial BAUD Baud Sets the baudrate for the serial remote control interface Parameters Baud 2400 4800 9600 19200 38
135. active state can be controlled from the R amp S SGMA GUI Remote command INSTruments ACTive STATe on page 221 Operating Menu and Toolbar Exclusive Access Checks whether the instrument is locked by another user and if not locks the instru ment When an instrument is locked it is reserved and can be operated manually or remote exclusively from the remote PC on which the R amp S SGMA GUI is running or from which the SCPI command is sent For interfaces using VISA i e for LAN and USB enabling the Exclusive Access trig gers the standard viLock request For remote control over PCle or Socket the lock request is performed on a higher application level Note It is recommended to lock the instrument prior to further configuration Locked instruments will not be found by the scan function The instrument has to be unlocked to allow operation from another remote PC Note The two functions Exclusive Access and monitoring are mutually exclusive Disable Exclusive Access if the instrument is monitored by an external PC Remote command INSTruments EACCess STATe on page 221 LOCK on page 158 UNLock on page 158 Device Identity Triggers the device identification function The LAN LED on the front panel of the selected instrument blinks See also chapter 6 4 4 Bidirectional Instrument Identification on page 61 Hardware Channel Selects the hardware interface used by the remote channel Remote command INST
136. age 189 Quadrature Offset Sets the quadrature offset see chapter 7 8 1 3 Quadrature Offset on page 83 Remote command SOURce IQ IMPairment QUADrature ANGLe on page 189 7 9 Preset Calls up a defined instrument setup All parameters and switching states are preset also those of inactive operating modes The default instrument settings provide a reproducible initial basis for all other settings However functions that concern the inte gration of the instrument into a measurement setup are not changed e g reference oscillator settings Overview of the most important preset states The following list gives an overview of the presets for the most important generator set tings The other presets can be found in the information accompanying the remote commands e RF frequency 1 GHz e Reference frequency Internal adjustment off e RF output switched off e Modulator State Off Settings that are not affected by the SGMA GUI gt Instrument Name gt Preset func tion e Reference frequency settings Ref Oscillator dialog e Power on settings Level dialog e Network settings Setup dialog e Password and settings protected by passwords Setup dialog e Eco Mode state Setup gt Eco Mode dialog To preset the R amp S SGMA GUI itself and all configured instruments to their predefined state use the SGMA GUI gt File gt New function SCPI command SYSTem PRESet on page 159 R amp
137. amples 11 1 3 Adjusting Network and Remote Channel Settings In the following example we assume that a remote PC is connected to the instrument the remote PC and the instrument are switched on and a connection between them is established ck ck ck ck ck Ck 0k 0k EEE 0k 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 ck 2 ck ck ck ck ck ck 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 EX EX Reset instrument first CKCkCckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckck ck ck ck ck ck ck kk RST CLS ck ck ck ck ck Ck 0k 0k EEE 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 22 22 2 2 ck ck 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 XX Lock the instrument to the controller KEKE KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKKKKKKK ck ck ck KKK LOCK 72349234 Lock instrument to avoid interference by other controllers Use an arbitrary number Response 1 Request granted i e the instrument is locked Abort program if request is refused ES SS Query the VISA resource strings ck ck ck ck ck ck 0k 0k EEE 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 ck ck 2 ck 2 ck ck 2 ck 2 2 2 2 2 20202 SYSTem COMMunicate NETWork RESource Response TCPIP 10 113 11 91 INSTR SYSTem COMMunicate SOCKet RESource Response TCPIP rssgs100a100021 5025 SOCKET SYSTem COMMunicate USB RESource
138. ance with safety class EN61010 1 Connect the instrument only to a socket with earthing contact To start up the instrument 1 Connect the instrument to the AC supply 100 240 V LN Hz 2 To turn the power on press the main power switch to position On To switch between standby and ready state gt Press the POWER ON STAND BY key briefly to switch the instrument from the standby to ready state or vice versa In ready state the button is green The instrument is ready for operation All mod ules are power supplied and the R amp S SGS initiates its startup procedure In standby state the button is orange The standby power mode keeps the power Switch circuits and the remote control system active Start up and booting The instrument boots the operating system and starts the instrument firmware During the booting process the green POWER ON STAND BY key blinks If the previous ses sion was terminated regularly the instrument uses the last setup with the relevant instrument settings Once the startup procedure has been terminated the instrument is ready for operation In the R amp S SGMA GUI select Instrument Preset function to return the instrument to its defined reset preset state if the current setup is no longer relevant To customize the start settings use the SGMA GUI gt File gt Save As Open function To shut down the Instrument To shut down the R amp S SGS proceed as described below User M
139. and DIAGnostic POINt CATalog Query parameters lt Name gt string Return values lt Value gt number Default unit V or C Example See chapter 11 1 1 Performing General Task for Instrument Setup on page 144 Usage Query only 11 8 EXTension Subsystem EXTension REMOSSTATES 0 ends a a EA dat 164 EXTension INS Truments NAME sense inn esse sus 164 EXTension INSTruments SCANT STATE iii 165 EXTension INSTruments REMote CHANnel ene ses nn nnns aaa ssh nsi 165 EXTension INSTruments REMote LAN NAME esten ssnh sensn sa sensn sisse 165 EXTension INSTruments REMote SERial aueri i auren iai riara iaae 166 LEX Tension BUSY EC KN KC KE 166 TEXT ONSION SELEEE iet E A AAA 166 EK e 167 EXTension REMote STATe Queries the state of the remote control connection to the extension Return values State 0 1 OFF ON 1 ON connected OJOFF not connected Example see chapter 11 1 5 Enabling and Configuring an Extension Mode on page 150 Usage Query only Manual operation See Available Instruments on page 89 EXTension INSTruments NAME Queries the list of the symbolic names of the available extension devices Usage Query only Manual operation See Available Instruments on page 89 EXTension Subsystem EXTension INSTruments SCAN STATe State Starts
140. anual 1173 9105 02 10 18 Putting into Operation 2 1 6 2 1 7 Risk of losing data If you switch off the running instrument using the rear panel switch or by disconnecting the power cord the instrument loses its current settings Always press the POWER ON STANDBY key first to shut down the application prop erly 1 Press the POWER ON STAND BY key to save the current setup shut down the operating system and set the instrument to standby state The POWER ON STAND BY LED must be orange Tip If the instrument is operated manually via the R amp S SGMA GUI select SGMA GUI gt Instrument Name gt Setup gt Standby 2 To turn the power off press the main power switch to position O Off None of the front panel LEDs should be on Function Check The instrument automatically monitors the main functions when it is switched on and monitors them continuously during operation A detected fault is indicated by an Error message displayed in the info line of the R amp S SGMA GUI together with a brief error description For an in depth identification of the error press the SGMA GUI gt Info button In response a description of the error s is displayed For more information refer to the Error Messages section in the User Manual In addition to the automatic monitoring the R amp S SGS offers the following capabilities to ensure correct functioning e Internal Adjustments In the R amp S SGMA GUI select the I
141. as occurred since the last reading it is the memory of the condition part It only indicates events passed on by the transition filters It is permanently updated by the instrument This part can only be read by the user Reading the register clears it This part is often equated with the entire register ENABle The ENABle part determines whether the associated EVENt bit contributes to the sum bit see below Each bit of the EVENt part is ANDed with the associated ENAB1e bit symbol amp The results of all logical operations of this part are passed on to the sum bit via an OR function symbol ENABle bit 0 the associated EVENt bit does not contribute to the sum bit ENABIe bit 1 if the associated EVENt bit is 1 the sum bit is set to 1 as well This part can be written into and read by the user as required Its contents are not affected by reading Sum bit The sum bit is obtained from the EvENt and ENABle part for each register The result is then entered into a bit of the CONDition part of the higher order register 14 1 5 3 Remote Control Basics The instrument automatically generates the sum bit for each register Thus an event can lead to a service request throughout all levels of the hierarchy Status Byte STB and Service Request Enable Regist
142. ator To use an external LO source 1 Provide the signal of an external LO source to the REF LO IN connector of the instrument Note The Local Oscillator input output requires the additional software option R amp S SGS K90 2 Select SGMA GUI gt Instrument Name gt Frequency Phase gt LO Coupling Source gt Ext Tip When you select Source gt Ext the icon appears in the R amp S SGMA GUI next to the instrument s name eue SGS The signal provided by the external frequency source is directly routed to the input of the I Q modulator and used as carrier frequency To use the internal LO source gt Select SGMA GUI gt Instrument Name gt Frequency Phase gt LO Coupling Source gt Int The output signal of the internal synthesizer is used R amp S SGS100A Performing Configuration Tasks 9 6 How to Define the Signal at the REF LO OUT Connec tor The Ref Oscillator and the LO use the same REF LO IN connector Hence it is not possible to use both an external reference source and an external LO source signal at the same time The signal at the REF LO OUT connector also depends on the selected Reference Oscillator and LO sources The following table gives an overview of this dependency Table 9 1 Selection available at the REF LO OUT connector depending on the LO and Reference Oscillator Sources LO Coupling Source Ref Oscillator Source Int Ext Int OFF REF LO OFF LO Ext OFF REF LO
143. ay be operated only under the operating conditions and in the positions specified by the manufacturer without the product s ventilation being obstructed If the manufacturer s specifications are not observed this can result in electric shock fire and or serious personal injury or death Applicable local or national safety regulations and rules for the prevention of accidents must be observed in all work performed 1 Unless otherwise specified the following requirements apply to Rohde amp Schwarz products predefined operating position is always with the housing floor facing down IP protection 2X use only indoors max operating altitude 2000 m above sea level max transport altitude 4500 m above sea level A tolerance of 10 shall apply to the nominal voltage and 5 to the nominal frequency overvoltage category 2 pollution degree 2 2 Do not place the product on surfaces vehicles cabinets or tables that for reasons of weight or stability are unsuitable for this purpose Always follow the manufacturer s installation instructions when installing the product and fastening it to objects or structures e g walls and shelves An installation that is not carried out as described in the product documentation could result in personal injury or even death 3 Do not place the product on heat generating devices such as radiators or fan heaters The ambient temperature must not exceed the maximum temperature specified in the product documentatio
144. ble or to disable the settings protected by a security password The default is 123456 Note It is highly recommended to change the default security password before con necting the instrument to the network To change the security password select SGMA GUI gt Instrument Name gt Setup gt Security gt Change Security Password The settings are only accepted after the Accept button is pressed Accept Security Settings Accept a new entry or selection and change the settings accordingly 8 7 Maintenance The R amp S SGS provides a special dialog for performing some maintenance procedures like installing firmware packages gt To access this dialog select SGMA GUI gt Instrument Name gt Setup gt Mainte nance Install firmware package None Install firmware package PCle Interface Mode Update All SGSs Install FW package on extension Security Password Operation Selects the desired maintenance operation Network Settings Select Package Available only for Operation gt Install Firmware Package Selects the firmware package to be installed see also chapter 9 12 How to Install a new Firmware Version on the Instrument on page 121 Update All Available only for Operation gt Install Firmware Package Enable this function to perform a simultaneous firmware update on all instruments that are in active state and are connected to this controller Note A firmware up
145. cStr cout lt lt rcStr lt lt endl Telnet program examples if useSingleCommand terminate true catch const string errorString cout lt lt errorString lt lt endl client disconnect return errorCode List of Commands GALibration ALLEMEAS re u ee et Re ie ee 160 CALibration FREQuency TEMP erature cerit ae 161 GALibration FREQuency MEASure inno aa aerea n rr ere ersehen kh PER Re ona 160 CALibration IQModulator FULL 1 iei eme en a Ludo en 160 GALibration IOModulator EOGCale t ee eu 161 CALibration IQModulator TEMPerature CALibration LEV el TEMPerature deed d EE anna 161 SAbibration EEVelb MEASUEe cto etti ro eon ea Ot eed ert ei bea toti Ben 161 BE Bee ue AE DEE 161 GALibr ation lt hw gt ROSGillator DATA MODE 2 ae aan ne sta 162 GALibration hw gt ROSCIllatorEDA TA umsetzen a 162 i CONN6GcIOEREEIO OUTP Ute recor a prre tereti eara v ta else 162 CONNEC ctor TRIGGER OMOBDA eere rrt rennen dne en td 163 DIAGNostic POINECA Tal e 163 DIAGhostic MEASurel POINE incre ner re tnt eR E eee nina 163 EXTension CECR RT 166 EXTension INSTruments NAME 164 EXTension INS Truments REMot e CHANG isis ccs Haren reellen 165 EXTension INSTruments REMote LAN NAME iii 165 EXTension INSTruments REMote SERIal 2 1 t reta etr ee 166 EXTension INSTruments SCANE S TAT 6
146. can also be specified in command SOUR CORR DEXC AFIL SEL in which case the files are stored or loaded in the specified directory SOURce CORRection Subsystem Parameters lt Filename gt lt ascii file name gt Example CORR DEXC MODE IMP selects that ASCII files with frequency and level value pairs are imported and transferred into user correction lists CORR DEXC AFIL SEL var sgs import ucor csv selects that ASCII file ucor csv is imported CORR DEXC SEL var sgs import ucor imp selects that the ASCII file ucor csv is imported into user cor rection list ucor imp SOURce lt hw gt CORRection DEXChange AFlLe SEParator COLumn Column Selects the separator between the frequency and level column of the ASCII table Parameters Column TABulator SEMicolon COMMa SPACe RST COMMa Example CORR DEXC MODE EXP selects that the user correction list is exported into an ASCII file CORR DEXC AFIL SEL var sgs import ucor csv selects ASCII file ucor csv as destination for the user correction list data CORR DEXC AFIL SEP COL TAB the pairs of frequency and level values are separated by a tabu lator CORR DEXC AFIL SEP DEC DOT selects the decimal separator dot CORR DEXC SEL var sgs import ucor imp selects that the user correction list ucor imp is imported into ASCII file ucor csv SOURce lt hw gt CORRection DE
147. cate NETWork MACaddress nn snnt anns 211 SYSTem cOMMurnicate NETWON STATUS ana aaa 212 SYSTem COMMtnicate NETWork RESTalt 2 2 ETa repa E EE TAE 212 SYSTem COMMunicate NETWork COMMon HOSTname esee 212 SvGtem COMMunicate N E TWorklIPADdreseslGATeway nnn 212 SYSTem COMMunicate NETWork 1IPADdress SUBNet MASK 213 SYSTem COMMu icate NETWork RESOUrCE eese nnne nnne nnne 213 SYSTem COMMunicate SERial BAUD iii 213 SYSTem COMMunicate SERIal PARIM une 213 SYSTem COMMunicate SERial RESource ness enses aas sse nsns 214 SYSTem COMMunicate SERial SBITS u a 214 SYSTem COMMunicate HISLip RESOUrCE iii 214 SYSTem COMMunicate PCIexpress RESOUrcCe iii 214 SYSTem COMMunicate SOCKet RESource esses nennen nennen nnne nnn nenne 215 GvGTem COMMunicate LUSbBREGourcei iii 215 Sy STem PROTEelEech gt L STATE aea ce e a a nn 215 3 SYSTem STARtup COMPlete 2 1 nennen 216 SYSTem HARDware ASSembly lt dir gt NAME ie 216 SYSTem HARDware ASSembly lt dir gt PNUMber iii 216 SYSTem HARDware ASSembly lt dir gt REVISION 216 SYSTem HARDware ASSembly lt dir gt SNUMber i 217 SYSTem SOFTware OPTion lt dir gt DESignation
148. ces e g a memory stick The following interfaces are provided on the rear panel of the instrument see also chapter 3 2 Rear Panel Tour on page 28 Connecting an External PC and Devices e PCI Express refer to chapter 2 3 3 Connecting a Controller via PCI Express on page 24 e USB interface refer to chapter 2 3 4 Connecting a Controller or an USB Device via USB on page 24 e LAN interface refer to chapter 2 3 2 Connecting a Remote PC via LAN on page 22 2 3 1 Installing the R amp S SGMA GUI Software on an External PC The R amp S SGMA GUI is delivered in the latest version available on the CD ROM inclu ded in the instrument s delivery Software updates as well as the Release Notes describing the improvements and modifications are provided on the Internet at the download site of the Rohde amp Schwarz home page This home page always offers the latest information on your R amp S SGMA GUI The R amp S SGMA GUI software is provided as separate installation package for the dif ferent operating systems This description focuses on the handling of the Windows 32 version The file naming conventions and the installation instructions for the other operating systems are analo gous The R amp S SGMA GUI installation package for Windows 32 operating system consists of the file SGMA GUI V VV VVV VVV exe The version numbers in the file names vary with each update To install the R amp S SGMA GUI the following hardware a
149. ch call of SYSTem ERRor NEXT provides one entry from the error queue If no error messages are stored there any more the instrument responds with 0 No error The error queue should be queried after every SRQ in the controller program as the entries describe the cause of an error more precisely than the status registers Espe cially in the test phase of a controller program the error queue should be queried regu larly since faulty commands from the controller to the instrument are recorded there as well Remote Control Basics 14 1 5 8 Reset Values of the Status Reporting System The following table contains the different commands and events causing the status reporting system to be reset None of the commands except of RST and SYSTem PRESet affect the functional instrument settings In particular DCL does not change the instrument settings Table 14 6 Resetting the status reporting system Event Switching on supply DCL RST or STA CLS voltage SDC SYS Tus PRE Power On Status Device Tem PRE Set Clear Clear Set Selected Device Effect 0 1 Clear Clear STB ESR yes yes Clear SRE ESE yes Clear PPE yes Clear error queue yes yes yes Clear output buffer yes yes yes 1 1 1 Clear command processing yes yes yes and input buffer 1 The first command in a command line that immediately follows a lt PROGRAM MESSAGE T
150. chaden hervorrufen Die nationalen Vorschriften zur Entsorgung sind zu beachten 4 Falls beim Umgang mit dem Produkt Gefahren oder Betriebsstoffe entstehen die speziell zu entsorgen sind z B regelm ig zu wechselnde K hlmittel oder Motoren le sind die Sicherheitshinweise des Herstellers dieser Gefahren oder Betriebsstoffe und die regional g ltigen Entsorgungsvorschriften einzuhalten Beachten Sie ggf auch die zugeh rigen speziellen Sicherheitshinweise in der Produktdokumentation Die unsachgem e Entsorgung von Gefahren oder Betriebsstoffen kann zu Gesundheitssch den von Personen und Umweltsch den f hren Weitere Informationen zu Umweltschutz finden Sie auf der Rohde amp Schwarz Home Page 1171 0000 41 08 Seite 8 Consignes de s curit fondamentales Lisez et respectez imp rativement les instructions et consignes de s curit suivantes Les usines et sites du groupe Rohde amp Schwarz veillent la conformit des produits du groupe avec les normes de s curit en vigueur dans un souci constant de garantir aux clients le plus haut niveau de s curit possible Nos produits ainsi que les accessoires n cessaires sont fabriqu s et test s conform ment aux r gles de s curit en vigueur Le respect de ces r gles est v rifi r guli rement par notre syst me d assurance qualit Le pr sent produit a t fabriqu et contr l conform ment au certificat de conformit CE ci joint et a quitt l usine dans un
151. ci n en o sobre medios de transporte como p ej gr as carretillas elevadoras de horquilla carros etc Es responsabilidad suya fijar los productos de manera segura a los medios de transporte o elevaci n Para evitar da os personales o da os en el producto siga las instrucciones de seguridad del fabricante del medio de transporte o elevaci n utilizado Si se utiliza el producto dentro de un vehiculo recae de manera exclusiva en el conductor la responsabilidad de conducir el vehiculo de manera segura y adecuada El fabricante no asumir ninguna responsabilidad por accidentes o colisiones No utilice nunca el producto dentro de un vehiculo en movimiento si esto pudiera distraer al conductor Asegure el producto dentro del vehiculo debidamente para evitar en caso de un accidente lesiones u otra clase de da os Eliminaci n protecci n del medio ambiente 1 Los dispositivos marcados contienen una bateria o un acumulador que no se debe desechar con los residuos dom sticos sin clasificar sino que debe ser recogido por separado La eliminaci n se debe efectuar exclusivamente a trav s de un punto de recogida apropiado o del servicio de atenci n al cliente de Rohde amp Schwarz Los dispositivos el ctricos usados no se deben desechar con los residuos dom sticos sin clasificar sino que deben ser recogidos por separado Rohde amp Schwarz GmbH amp Co KG ha elaborado un concepto de eliminaci n de residuos y asume plenamente los debe
152. col They are connected using an RJ45 cable shielded or unshielded twisted pair category 5 The TCP IP net work protocol and the associated network services are preconfigured on the instru Remote Control Interfaces and Protocols ment Software for instrument control and for specified protocols only the VISA pro gram library must be installed on the controller E Identifying instruments in a network If several instruments are connected to the network each instrument has its own IP address and associated resource string The controller identifies these instruments by means of the resource string 10 1 2 1 VISA Resource Strings The VISA resource string is required to establish a communication session between the controller and the instrument in a LAN The resource string is a unique identifier composed of the specific IP address of the instrument and some network and VISA specific keywords TCPIP host address LAN device name INSTR e TCPIP designates the network protocol used e host address is the IP address or host name of the device See also chapter 6 4 3 Finding Out the Default Hostname of the Instrument on page 61 e LAN device name defines the protocol and the instance number of a sub instrument e INSTR indicates the instrument resource class optional The IP address host address computer name is used by the programs to identify and control the instrument It is automatically assigned by the D
153. current list 241 229 No files found 469 e EE Unknown list type specified 242 229 Error messages display list 210 Eirorigqueue ana spinnen kr 247 Error queue query nennen 208 209 210 Error queues recommendations ESD mec TS 14 ESE event status enable register 248 Ebenen tee 244 ESR event status register ssssss 248 EVENT secos 246 Event status enable register ESE 248 REMOTE sr 154 Event status register ESR 248 Remote ise 154 Expiration date of Option erre 96 Ext trigger Gate polarity cre nr entren 80 Input slope trt teer tenete tes 80 Extension mode Higher frequency uses 111 External controller External devices External impedance Pulse modulation eege da 77 External reference COMNEC ON einen 27 29 Input frequeriey u es 70 F Factory nee 105 Factory recovery See Service Manual sess 122 Fast Settings cozii aani 134 139 File list erince nee nad 171 Firmware update ee e nee ten 101 Several instruments 121 Update all 35 101 Firmware Version ausser one hate ness rona es Rhe cene eed perus 96 Floating licences rm netter niet 96 Frequency 56 66 Ll iimitte 6GElz ee nere tte tret 106 Frequency range extension 111 Pull GaN QC race tere r
154. d automatically in a predefined directory and loaded by default when starting the instrument again The files with instrument settings are not accessible Save Standard quick save of the settings of the current session if a file name previously has been applied If not the Save As dialog is opened Save as Opens the standard file save browser for saving the settings of the current session R amp S SGMA GUI files have the file extension savrcl so the name typed in is equip ped with this extension The complete settings of a session are saved Exit Quits the R amp S SGMA GUI The current settings of the instrument s session are saved and loaded by default when starting the software again Note The instruments configured in the R amp S SGMA GUI are not shut down Shut down instruments and exit Quits the R amp S SGMA GUI and switches the connected instruments to the standby state see alsochapter 9 9 How to Switch Between the Operating States on page 118 Operating Menu and Toolbar 6 1 2 Setup Menu The setup menu provides access to dialogs for setting the general settings of the soft ware like dialogs for managing the connected instruments or dialogs providing infor mation about the installed options 6 1 2 1 Configure Instruments This dialog is the central point for managing the instrument that will be configured and operated via the R amp S SGMA GUI New instruments can be created and appended to the list of ava
155. d in at the REF LO IN input connector is used as signal source When you select Source gt Ext the icon appears in the R amp S SGMA GUI next to the instrument s name eme ss Note The Local Oscillator input output requires the additional soft ware option R amp S SGS K90 Remote command SOURce LOSCillator SOURce on page 180 REF LO Output Determines the signal provided at the output connector REF LO OUT See also chapter 9 6 How to Define the Signal at the REF LO OUT Connector on page 116 OFF No signal is provided LO The signal of the local oscillator LO is available at the REF LO OUT connector 7 4 Reference Oscillator REF The signal of the reference oscillator is available at the REF LO OUT connector Remote command CONNector REFLo OUTPut on page 162 Reference Oscillator The R amp S SGS is equipped with an internal TXCO reference oscillator If equipped with the additional HW option R amp S SGS B1 an OXCO can be used as an internal refer ence frequency source for the synthesizer Moreover an external reference signal source can be connected to the REF LO IN connector of the instrument Refer to figure 5 8 for visualization of the signal flow gt To access this dialog select SGMA GUI gt Instrument Name gt Reference Oscilla tor Ext Ref Input Frequency mn REF Ref Oscillator Source Determines whether the internal built in oscillator TXCO or OX
156. d in chapter 11 8 EXTension Subsystem on page 164 User Manual 1173 9105 02 10 87 Extension To access the extension mode settings and enable the extension mode 1 Select SGMA GUI gt Instrument Name gt Extension Tip Steps 2 and 3 can be omitted if the R amp S SGS and a single R amp S SGU are con nected using PCle or USB or by a direct LAN connection In this case R amp S SGS will automatically activate the R amp S SGU 2 Trigger Scan to find all available instruments that can serve as an extension to the particular instrument 3 Select an instrument from the list and set Available Instruments gt Select gt On to enable it as an extension A green status indicator Connected indicates the successfully established remote connection to the extension 4 Select Test Signal Connections gt Test to trigger a check of all required signal connections The diagram displays the connection state of the tested connections The R amp S SGMA GUI indicates the extended frequency range of the master instru ment and the activated extension mode ea Extension to SGS 100014 You cannot access the signal generation settings of an instrument working in extension mode The extension is controlled via the master instrument To display the R amp S SGU settings click on the X button next to the instrument s name Select for example SGMA GUI gt Master Instrument Name gt Freq 20 GHz Lev 30 dBm
157. d in the order in which they have been received In order to make sure that commands are actually carried out in a cer tain order each command must be sent in a separate command line D As a general rule send commands and queries in different program messages 14 1 4 1 Preventing Overlapping Execution To prevent an overlapping execution of commands one of the commands OPC OPC or WAI can be used All three commands cause a certain action only to be carried out after the hardware has been set By suitable programming the controller can be forced to wait for the corresponding action to occur Table 14 1 Remote Control Basics Synchronization using OPC OPC and WAI Com mand OPC Action Sets the Operation Complete bit in the ESR after all previous commands have been exe cuted Programming the controller e Setting bit O in the ESE e Setting bit 5 in the SRE e Waiting for service request SRQ OPC Stops command processing until 1 is returned This is only the case after the Oper ation Complete bit has been set in the ESR This bit indicates that the previous setting has been completed Sending OPC directly after the command whose processing should be terminated before other commands can be executed WAI Stops further command processing until all commands sent before WAI have been exe cuted Sending WAI directly after the command whose processing should be ter
158. date and the required subsequent restart and the automatically ini tiated internal adjustment process of the controller may be a time consuming operation This feature accelerates the update process and the required restart ofthe external PC can be executed once after the update operation of all instruments is completed Security Password Enters the password that is required to enable or to disable the settings protected by a security password The default is 123456 Note It is highly recommended to change the default security password before con necting the instrument to the network To change the security password select SGMA GUI gt Instrument Name gt Setup gt Security gt Change Security Password The settings are only accepted after the Accept button is pressed Accept Accept the selected operation and perform the required procedure PCle Interface Mode Sets the PCle interface mode for the R amp S SGS Endpoint Standard mode Root Com The mode needed for a direct PCle connection of an R amp S SGS and plex an R amp S SGU 8 8 Network Settings The instrument is equipped with a network interface and can be connected to an Ether net LAN local area network The Network Settings dialog provides access to the network settings Network Settings Risk of network errors Connection errors can affect the entire network If your network does not support DHCP or if you choose to disable dynamic TCP IP config
159. de leur puissance lectromagn tique extr mement concentr e les lasers peuvent causer des dommages biologiques Pour plus d informations voir le chapitre Fonctionnement point 7 1171 0000 43 08 Page 2 Consignes de s curit fondamentales Mots d alerte et significations Les mots d alerte suivants sont utilis s dans la documentation produit pour avertir des risques et dangers DANGER Indique une situation dangereuse imm diate qui si elle n est pas vit e comporte un risque lev de blessures graves ou mortelles Indique une situation dangereuse possible qui si elle n est pas vit e comporte un risque mod r de blessures graves ou mortelles comporte un risque faible de blessures mineures ou mod r es Indique la possibilit d une fausse man uvre susceptible d endommager le produit A ATTENTION Indique une situation dangereuse qui si elle n est pas vit e Ces mots d alerte correspondent a la d finition habituelle utilis e pour des applications civiles dans l espace conomique europ en Des d finitions divergentes peuvent cependant exister dans d autres espaces conomiques ou dans le cadre d applications militaires Il faut donc veiller ce que les mots d alerte d crits ici ne soient utilis s qu en relation avec la documentation produit correspondante et seulement avec le produit correspondant L utilisation des mots d alerte en relation avec des pro
160. de sus embalajes originales hasta el momento en que vayan a utilizarse Las celdas o bater as no deben someterse a impactos mec nicos fuertes indebidos En caso de falta de estanqueidad de una celda el l quido vertido no debe entrar en contacto con la piel ni los ojos Si se produce contacto lavar con agua abundante la zona afectada y avisar a un m dico En caso de cambio o recarga inadecuados las celdas o bater as que contienen electrolitos alcalinos p ej las celdas de litio pueden explotar Para garantizar la seguridad del producto las celdas o bater as solo deben ser sustituidas por el tipo Rohde amp Schwarz correspondiente ver lista de recambios Las bater as y celdas deben reciclarse y no deben tirarse a la basura dom stica Las bater as o acumuladores que contienen plomo mercurio o cadmio deben tratarse como residuos especiales Respete en esta relaci n las normas nacionales de eliminaci n y reciclaje Transporte 1 El producto puede tener un peso elevado Por eso es necesario desplazarlo o transportarlo con precauci n y si es necesario usando un sistema de elevaci n adecuado p ej una carretilla elevadora a fin de evitar lesiones en la espalda u otros da os personales 1171 0000 42 08 Page 13 Instrucciones de seguridad elementales Las asas instaladas en los productos sirven solamente de ayuda para el transporte del producto por personas Por eso no est permitido utilizar las asas para la suje
161. detail is entered into the error queue 6 User Request This bit is set when the instrument is switched over to manual control f Power On supply voltage on This bit is set on switching on the instrument 14 1 5 5 Questionable Status Register STATus QUEStionable This register contains information on questionable instrument states Such states may occur when the instrument is not operated in compliance with its specifications To read the register use the query commands STAT QUEST COND or STAT QUEST EVEN Remote Control Basics Table 14 4 Meaning of the bits used in the questionable status register BitNo Meaning 0 15 not used 14 1 5 6 Operation Status Register STATus OPERation This condition part contains information on the actions currently being performed by the instrument while the event part contains information on the actions performed by the instrument since the last readout of the register To read the register use the query commands STAT OPER COND or STAT OPER EVEN Table 14 5 Meaning of the bits used in the operation status register Bit No Meaning 0 Calibrating The bit is set during the calibration phase 1 2 not used 3 Sweeping This bit is set during a sweep in automatic or single mode 4 15 not used 14 1 5 7 Application of the Status Reporting System The purpose of the status reporting system is to monitor the status o
162. disabled 3 Select SGMA GUI gt Instrument Name gt Level gt RF Level and adjust the level of the output signal 4 Forthe corresponding instrument set SGMA GUI gt RF gt On or press the RFON key on the front panel of the instrument to enable the output of the generated sig nal atthe RF connector The RF ON key is green The fed signal is amplified with the selected value and output at the RF connector of the instrument 9 4 How to Configure the Reference Oscillator Source To use the internal reference frequency source 1 To enable the instrument to use its internal reference frequency source perform one of the following a Select SGMA GUI main panel gt Ext Ref Off b Select SGMA GUI gt Instrument Name gt Reference Oscillator gt Source gt Int 2 Inthe Reference Oscillator dialog set the REF LO Out gt REF The Output Frequency can be configured to either 10 MHz or 1 GHz The instrument uses the internal reference signal The REF EXT LED at the front panel of the instrument is off To output the reference frequency internal or external at the REF LO OUT connector of the instrument select Reference Oscillator gt REF LO Output gt REF To use an external reference frequency source To improve measurement accuracy it is advisable to provide an external reference fre quency to all of the instruments in the test setup or to distribute the internal reference signal of the signal ge
163. dress i il rd 27 VXI protocol 6 190 LAN connection a 100 Reset address mode A 103 LED ERROR WARNING seiis taie neu mann 27 REFIEXT 27 Level RF output Level limit Level offset cesse aan Level range BRE OULD Utes o torte tts era ent Licence for software option BI de LO Connector oii e eria anni 29 Coupling SOURCE noct lec riada 115 LO coupling jS 116 Load instrument settings 156 175 Eoaded modules aci een 96 Eocal oscillator cional 67 Coupling source zd 19 SOURCE 68 Lost LAN connection to an instrument ooonoccnnnnccinnnccccns 103 M Maintenance INRE O MH R 101 Operation sense ren as 100 Malfunctions reacting 25251 MAX 237 Message civic 52 Additional information 64 All messages eoi treten ten ener 64 jj rien 64 Deleting 64 Deleting all 64 Deleting brief 64 Displaying EE 64 Ee TEE 64 Message level 5 nre rr ete re rp 52 Messages el ul ET EE 231 fon E EE 231 Instrument responses 232 Interface ci teer n tuse erts 231 MIMO Ee ue 29 MIN een eis Biene 237 MMEMOMICS 32 59 2 area le 232 V ue TEE 234 Mode PULM TR Pulse modulation RF level
164. duits ou des documentations non correspondants peut conduire des erreurs d interpr tation et par cons quent des dommages corporels ou mat riels tats et positions de fonctionnement L appareil ne doit tre utilis que dans les tats et positions de fonctionnement indiqu s par le fabricant Tout obstacle la ventilation doit tre emp ch Le non respect des indications du fabricant peut provoquer des chocs lectriques des incendies et ou des blessures graves pouvant ventuellement entrainer la mort Pour tous les travaux les r gles locales et ou nationales de s curit et de pr vention des accidents doivent tre respect es 1 Sauf stipulations contraires les produits Rohde 8 Schwarz r pondent aux exigences ci apr s faire fonctionner le produit avec le fond du bo tier toujours en bas degr de protection IP 2X degr de pollution 2 cat gorie de surtension 2 utilisation uniquement l int rieur fonctionnement une altitude max de 2000 m au dessus du niveau de la mer transport une altitude max de 4500 m au dessus du niveau de la mer tol rance de 10 pour la tension nominale et de 5 96 pour la fr quence nominale 2 Ne jamais placer le produit sur des surfaces v hicules d p ts ou tables non appropri s pour raisons de stabilit ou de poids Suivre toujours strictement les indications d installation du fabricant pour le montage et la fixation du produit sur des objets ou des structures par exe
165. e amplitudes by a factor leaving the Q amplitudes unchanged A Q gain has the opposite effect Different and Q gain factors result in an UO imbal ance which is usually due to different gains of the amplifiers in the and Q channels of the UO modulator The effect of a positive and negative gain imbalance is shown below Q Q Fig 7 4 Negative gain imbalance left and positive right gain imbalance in the I Q constellation dia gram land Q Offset An offset adds a constant value to all amplitudes leaving the Q amplitudes unchanged A Q offset has the opposite effect A combination of and Q values results in an UO offset which is usually due to carrier feedthrough in the UO modulator Possi ble reasons are interfering signals at the RF carrier frequency e g an unsuppressed RF carrier subchannel The effect of a positive and Q offset in the 1 Q constellation diagram is shown below IO Modulation and Signal Impairment Q Q Fig 7 5 I offset left and Q offset right in the 1 Q constellation diagram 7 8 1 3 Quadrature Offset Changes the phase angle between the and Q vectors from the ideal 90 degrees while the amplitudes are maintained A positive quadrature offset results in a phase angle greater than 90 degrees The effect of a positive quadrature offset in the I Q con stellation diagram is shown below Q Fig 7 6 Positive quadrature offset in the I Q constellation diagram IO Modulation and Signal Impai
166. e ales de seguridad se utilizan en los productos para advertir sobre riesgos y peligros Conexi n a tierra El aparato est protegido en su totalidad por un aislamiento doble reforzado Conexi n a masa Distintivo de la UE para bater as y acumuladores S mbolo Significado S mbolo Significado Aviso punto de peligro general O Tensi n de alimentaci n de PUESTA EN MARCHA PARADA Observar la documentaci n del producto Atenci n en el manejo de dispositivos de peso D Indicaci n de estado de espera standby elevado Peligro de choque el ctrico en Corriente continua DC d Advertencia superficie caliente IQ Corriente alterna AC Q Conexi n a conductor de protecci n AS Corriente continua Corriente alterna DC AC M s informaci n en la secci n Eliminaci n protecci n del medio ambiente punto 1 1171 0000 42 08 Page 8 Instrucciones de seguridad elementales Simbolo Significado Simbolo Significado Aviso Cuidado en el manejo de dispositivos Distintivo de la UE para la eliminaci n por sensibles a la electrost tica ESD separado de dispositivos el amp ctricos y electr nicos Mas informacion en la secci n Eliminaci n protecci n del medio ambiente punto 2 Advertencia rayo l ser Mas informaci n en la secci n Funcionamiento punto 7 Palabras de senal y su significado En la documentaci n del producto se utilizan la
167. e IP address or the host name of the instrument and the number of the port configured for remote control All instruments use port number 5025 for this purpose The port is configured for communication on a command to command basis and for remote control from a program running on a connected PC USB Interface For remote control via USB connection the PC and the instrument must be connected via the USB interface A USB connection requires the VISA library to be installed VISA detects and configures the R amp S instrument automatically when the USB connection is established You do not have to install a separate driver USB Resource String The syntax ofthe used USB resource string is USB lt vendor ID gt lt product ID gt lt serial number gt INSTR where e USB denotes the used interface e lt vendor ID gt is the manufacturer ID for Rohde amp Schwarz Remote Control Interfaces and Protocols e lt product ID is the product identification of the R amp S instrument e lt serial number is the individual serial number on the rear of the instrument e INSTR indicates the instrument resource class optional You can retreive the USB resource string from the SGMA GUI gt Instrument Name gt Setup gt Remote dialog Example USB 0x0AAD 0x0088 100021 INSTR OxOAAD is the vendor ID for Rohde amp Schwarz 0x0088 is the product ID for the R amp S SGS 100021 is the serial number of the particular instrument 10 1 4 PCI
168. e Permanent messages Permanent messages are displayed if an error occurs that impairs further program operation The error signaled by a permanent message must be eliminated before correct software operation can be ensured The message is displayed until the error is eliminated It covers the status display in the info line After error elimination the message automatically disappears and is also recorded in the history 6 3 Main Panel The main panel of the R amp S SGMA GUI provides quick access to the main settings of the configured instruments The display shows one row per instrument and comprises the instrument name and state the used frequency and power level the states of the RF output and modulator and the used reference source Click on one of the buttons with an instrument name on it to access the menu tree with further settings for the corresponding instrument For a detailed description of the pro vided settings refer to chapter 7 Signal Generator Settings on page 65 SGMA GUI c zs File Setup Help SG HMC Info T on SGS 100004 Freq 10 000 000 000 000 0 40 SGU 100014 e SGT 1 000 000 000 000 GHz Mod pep 20 00 dam Level 20 00 a8m Si Extension to SGS 100004 GHz y peP 30 00 dBm Level 30 00 dBm Ret ARB None os e Ka SSC gt User 1 Trigger User 2 Marker 2 Main Panel Instrument
169. e Remote Channel settings Setup gt Remote Channel dialog e Eco Mode state Setup gt Eco Mode dialog To maintain security password settings and all settings protected by these passwords like disabled USB and LAN connections are not changed Not affected by the Factory Preset are also user data lists or instrument settings files created for example by means of the File Save As function Remote command SYSTem FPReset on page 159 8 11 8 12 Eco Mode Eco Mode This energy saving mode is available only for instruments equipped with optionR amp S SGS B112 B112V gt To access this dialog select SGMA GUI gt Instrument Name gt Setup gt Eco Mode With enabled Eco Mode 1 the doubler stage in a 12 75 GHz instrument is perma nently switched off to reduce power consumption and the maximum frequency is limited to 6 GHZ An enabled Eco Mode is indicated by a green coloring of the frequency range in the R amp S SGMA GUI 05 SGS 100004 Risk of invalid adjustment after changing the Eco Mode The switching off and on of the doubler stage changes the thermal conditions in the instrument In order to achieve correct adjustment of the instrument make sure that the instrument is warm before performing adjustments The warm up time is 30 minutes Performing adjustment in Eco Mode The instruments performs the internal adjustment within the currently active frequency range i e up to 6 GHz for enab
170. e c ble ou par des chocs lectriques L utilisation des produits est uniquement autoris e sur des r seaux d alimentation de type TN TT prot g s par des fusibles d une intensit max de 16 A pour toute intensit sup rieure consulter le groupe Rohde amp Schwarz Ne pas brancher le connecteur dans des prises d alimentation sales ou poussi reuses Enfoncer fermement le connecteur jusqu au bout de la prise Le non respect de cette mesure peut provoquer des tincelles incendies et ou blessures Ne pas surcharger les prises les c bles prolongateurs ou les multiprises cela pouvant provoquer des incendies ou chocs lectriques En cas de mesures sur les circuits lectriques d une tension efficace 30 V prendre les pr cautions n cessaires pour viter tout risque par exemple quipement de mesure appropri fusibles limitation de courant coupe circuit isolation etc En cas d interconnexion avec des quipements informatiques comme par exemple un PC ou un ordinateur industriel veiller ce que ces derniers soient conformes aux normes IEC 60950 1 EN 60950 1 ou IEC 61010 1 EN 61010 1 en vigueur Sauf autorisation expresse il est interdit de retirer le couvercle ou toute autre pi ce du boitier lorsque le produit est en cours de service Les c bles et composants lectriques seraient ainsi accessibles ce qui peut entrainer des blessures des incendies ou des d g ts sur le produit 1171 0000 43 08 Page
171. e failure The R amp S SGS is equipped with a single lane PCle interface that supports hot plugging Do not connect an external PC to the PCle connector of the instrument during opera tion if this external PC does not support hot plugging Permitted PCle cables PCle extension cables must fulfill the following requirements e single lane connectors e max cable length of 5 m For example OSS PCle CBL x1 cable from One Stop Systems or 74576 000x cable from Molex Connecting an external PC that does not support hot plugging 1 Switch off the external PC and the instrument See also chapter 2 1 5 Switching the Instrument On and Off on page 17 2 Connect the instrument and the controller with the suitable cable 3 Switch on the instrument 4 Wait until the instrument has completed the booting the POWER LED on the instrument s front panel is constantly on 5 Switch on the external PC 10 3 4 Enabling Fast Settings gt To enable the special PCI express feature fast settings enable the function rssgs UseFastSettings ViSession instrumentHandle ViBoolean fastEnabled ViBoolean asynchronousEnabled included in the instru ment driver Settings for some parameters like level and frequency will accelerate To disable the fast settings call the function rssgs_UseFastSettings with argu ment fastEnabled false Advanced Remote Control Using Fast Socket 10 4 Advanced Remote Control Using Fast Socket
172. e following conventions used in the remote command descriptions e Command usage If not specified otherwise commands can be used both for setting and for querying parameters If acommand can be used for setting or querying only or if it initiates an event the usage is stated explicitely e Parameter usage If not specified otherwise a parameter can be used to set a value and it is the result of a query Parameters required only for setting are indicated as Setting parameters Parameters required only to refine a query are indicated as Query parameters Parameters that are only returned as the result of a query are indicated as Return values e Conformity Commands that are taken from the SCPI standard are indicated as SCPI con firmed All commands used by the R amp S SGS follow the SCPI syntax rules e Asynchronous commands A command which does not automatically finish executing before the next com mand starts executing overlapping command is indicated as an Asynchronous command e Reset values RST Default parameter values that are used directly after resetting the instrument RST command are indicated as RST values if available e Default unit This is the unit used for numeric values if no other unit is provided with the parame ter e Manual operation If the result of a remote command can also be achieved in manual operation a link to the description is inserted 11 1 Programming Examples This chapter provides simpl
173. e instrument CkCkCckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckck ck ck ck KK KKK UNL 72349234 Advanced Task for Optimizing Performance In the following example we assume that a remote PC is connected to the instrument the remote PC and the instrument are switched on and a connection between them is established ck ck ck ck ck ck EEE 0k 0k 0k 0k 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 ck 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 ck ck 2 ck ck ck ck ck 2 ck 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2022 Reset instrument first 4 CkCkCckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck kk RST CLS SYSTem PRESet RESTart SYSTem FPReset ck ck ck ck ck 0k 0k 0k 0k 0k 0k 0k 0k 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 ck ck ck ck ck ck 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 EX EX Lock the instrument to the controller KEKE KKK KKK KK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK LOCK 72349234 Lock instrument to avoid interference by other controllers Use an arbitrary number Response 1 Request granted i e the instrument is locked Abort program if request is refused ES CKCkCckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckck ck ck ck ck AAA Query and adjust the reference oscillator
174. e is called fast settings mode The specially for this purposes provided instrument s driver is mandatory for the instrument control by means of fast settings This instrument driver contains special functions for fast setup e Using the PCle interface is mandatory see also chapter 10 3 1 Setting Up a Remote Control Connection via PCle on page 134 D To use the advantage of the fast settings the following prerequisites must be fulfilled e The fast settings must be enabled by means of the function rssgs useFastSettings see also chapter 10 3 4 Enabling Fast Settings on page 138 The instrument driver will automatically use the fast settings method whenever possi ble currently only for the parameters frequency level RF state modulator state and will send SCPI messages in all other cases Remote control programs written for PCle will without modifications also run if one of the other control channels LAN or USB is used 10 3 1 Setting Up a Remote Control Connection via PCle To set up a remote control connection vie PCle perform the following steps 1 Configure the controller see 10 3 2 2 Connect the controller and the instrument see 10 3 3 User Manual 1173 9105 02 10 134 10 3 2 Advanced Remote Control Using PCle 3 Enable fast settings see 10 3 4 Configuring the Controller This section focuses on the steps necessary to configure a controller with Linux or Windows operating system 10
175. e nennen nennt 202 ESOURSEI ROSCA SOURCE direct E ener el 202 SOURce ROSCillator IN Ternal ADJust VALue conocio nnn 202 SOURce ROSCillator INTernal ADJust STATE 203 FSOURcelROSCIllator EXTernalSBANdWIAEh u a 203 SOURce ROSCillator EXTernal FREQuency lt ExtFreq gt Selects the frequency of the external reference Parameters lt ExtFreq gt 10MHZ 100MHZ 1000MHZ Example See chapter 11 1 4 Advanced Task for Optimizing Perform ance on page 149 Manual operation See Ext Ref Input Frequency on page 70 SOURce ROSCillator OUTPut FREQuency lt OutputFreq gt Selects the output for the reference oscillator signal Parameters lt OutputFreq gt 10MHZ 100MHZ 1000MHZ Example See chapter 11 1 4 Advanced Task for Optimizing Perform ance on page 149 Manual operation See Output Frequency on page 70 SOURce ROSCillator SOURce lt Source gt Select the reference oscillator signal source Parameters lt Source gt INTernal EXTernal Example See chapter 11 1 2 Generating an UO Modulated Signal on page 146 Manual operation See REF Ref Oscillator Source on page 57 SOURce ROSCillator INTernal ADJust VALue Value Allows an application to shift the reference oscillator frequency by a small amount Parameters lt Value gt integer Range O to 1023 65635 RST 32767 11 20 STATus Subsystem Example See chapter 11 1 4 Advanced Task fo
176. e phase of a signal from a second signal generator Remote command SOURce PHASe on page 191 Reset Delta Phase Display Resets delta phase value The set phase is adopted as the new current phase i e the delta phase value is reset to 0 Remote command SOURce PHASe REFerence on page 191 Local Oscillator LO Coupling 7 3 Local Oscillator LO Coupling The LO Coupling function allows you to distribute the local oscillator signal in a way that multiple R amp S SGSs or other R amp S Signal Generators can be driven by the same LO signal This is mandatory for phase coherent application e g the generation of beamformed signals and for phase coherent demodulation The LO Coupling function is available only for instruments equipped with the option O R amp S SGS K90 Phase Coherence This option enables phase coherent RF outputs of two or more RF signals The local oscillator signal is provided at the REF LO OUT con nector An external signal can be input at the REF LO IN connector Refer to figure 5 8 for visualization of the signal flow See also e chapter 9 5 How to Configure the Local Oscillator LO Coupling Source on page 115 e chapter 9 6 How to Define the Signal at the REF LO OUT Connector on page 116 e chapter 9 7 How to Connect and Configure Instruments for Optimum Phase Coherence on page 116 7 3 1 Phase Coherence Phase coherence of RF signals designates a defined constant delta phase between t
177. e programming examples for the R amp S SGS The purpose of the examples is to present all command s for a given task In real applications one would rather reduce the examples to an appropriate subset of commands Programming Examples The programming examples have been tested with a software tool which provides an environment for the development and execution of remote tests To keep the examples as simple as possible only the clean SCPI syntax elements are reported Non exe cutable command lines e g comments start with two characters At the beginning of most remote control program an instrument p reset is recommen ded to setthe R amp S SGS to a defined state The commands RST and SYSTem PRESet are equivalent for this purpose CLS also resets the status registers and clears the output buffer It is also recommended that you lock the instrument for remote control from the selected controller prior to further configuration Use the LOCK command for this pur pose We assume that the R amp S SGS is fully equipped with all available options 11 1 1 Performing General Task for Instrument Setup In the following example we assume that a remote PC is connected to the instrument the remote PC and the instrument are switched on and a connection between them is established EEE EEE ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 ck 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 XX Reset instr
178. e second pulse Manual operation See Double Pulse Width on page 78 SOURce lt hw gt PULM MODE lt Mode gt Sets the mode of the pulse generator Parameters lt Mode gt SINGle DOUBle SINGle Enables single pulse generation DOUBle Enables double pulse generation The two pulses are generated in one pulse period RST SINGle SOURce PULM Subsystem Example PULM MODE DOUB enables double pulse generation Manual operation See Pulse Mode on page 77 SOURce lt hw gt PULM PERiod lt Period gt Sets the period of the generated pulse The period determines the repetition frequency of the internal signal Parameters lt Period gt float Range 100 ns to 100s Increment 10ns RST 10 ns Example PULM PER 220 us the pulse period is 220 us Manual operation See Pulse Period on page 78 SOURce lt hw gt PULM POLarity lt Polarity gt Sets the polarity of the pulse modulator signal This command is effective only for an external modulation signal Parameters lt Polarity gt NORMal INVerted NORMal The RF signal is suppressed during the pulse pause INVerted The RF signal is suppressed during the pulse RST NORMal Example PULM SOUR EXT selects the external modulation source Example PULM POL INV selects inverted polarity Manual operation See Polarity on page 77 SOURce lt hw gt PULM SOURce lt Source gt Selects the source
179. ebenfalls unbedingt zu beachten In den vorliegenden Sicherheitshinweisen sind s mtliche von der Rohde amp Schwarz Firmengruppe vertriebenen Waren unter dem Begriff Produkt zusammengefasst hierzu z hlen u a Ger te Anlagen sowie s mtliches Zubeh r 1171 0000 41 08 Seite 1 Grundlegende Sicherheitshinweise Symbole und Sicherheitskennzeichnungen Symbol Bedeutung Symbol Bedeutung Achtung allgemeine Gefahrenstelle Produktdokumentation beachten EIN AUS Versorgung Vorsicht beim Umgang mit Ger ten mit hohem Gewicht Stand by Anzeige Gefahr vor elektrischem Schlag Gleichstrom DC Warnung vor hei er Oberfl che Wechselstrom AC Schutzleiteranschluss Gleichstrom Wechselstrom DC AC Erdungsanschluss Ger t entspricht den Sicherheits anforderungen an die Schutzklasse II Ger t durchgehend durch doppelte verst rkte Isolierung gesch tzt Masseanschluss des Gestells oder Geh uses EU Kennzeichnung f r Batterien und Akkumulatoren Das Ger t enth lt eine Batterie bzw einen Akkumulator Diese d rfen nicht ber unsortierten Siedlungsabfall entsorgt werden sondern sollten getrennt gesammelt werden Weitere Informationen siehe Seite 7 Achtung beim Umgang mit elektrostatisch gef hrdeten Bauelementen EU Kennzeichnung f r die getrennte Sammlung von Elektro und Elektronikger ten Elektroaltger te d rfen nicht ber unsortierten
180. eckdosen mit Schutzkontakt und angeschlossenem Schutzleiter zul ssig Jegliche absichtliche Unterbrechung des Schutzleiters sowohl in der Zuleitung als auch am Produkt selbst ist unzul ssig Es kann dazu f hren dass von dem Produkt die Gefahr eines elektrischen Schlags ausgeht Bei Verwendung von Verl ngerungsleitungen oder Steckdosenleisten ist sicher zustellen dass diese regelm ig auf ihren sicherheitstechnischen Zustand berpr ft werden Sofern das Produkt nicht mit einem Netzschalter zur Netztrennung ausger stet ist beziehungsweise der vorhandene Netzschalter zu Netztrennung nicht geeignet ist so ist der Stecker des Anschlusskabels als Trennvorrichtung anzusehen Die Trennvorrichtung muss jederzeit leicht erreichbar und gut zug nglich sein Ist z B der Netzstecker die Trennvorrichtung darf die L nge des Anschlusskabels 3 m nicht berschreiten Funktionsschalter oder elektronische Schalter sind zur Netztrennung nicht geeignet Werden Produkte ohne Netzschalter in Gestelle oder Anlagen integriert so ist die Trennvorrichtung auf Anlagenebene zu verlagern Benutzen Sie das Produkt niemals wenn das Netzkabel besch digt ist berpr fen Sie regelm ig den einwandfreien Zustand der Netzkabel Stellen Sie durch geeignete Schutzma nahmen und Verlegearten sicher dass das Netzkabel nicht besch digt werden kann und niemand z B durch Stolperfallen oder elektrischen Schlag zu Schaden kommen kann Der Betrieb ist nur an TN TT Ve
181. ecting cable must not exceed 3 m Functional or electronic switches are not suitable for providing disconnection from the AC supply network If products without power switches are integrated into racks or systems the disconnecting device must be provided at the system level 5 Never use the product if the power cable is damaged Check the power cables on a regular basis to ensure that they are in proper operating condition By taking appropriate safety measures and carefully laying the power cable ensure that the cable cannot be damaged and that no one can be hurt by for example tripping over the cable or suffering an electric shock 1171 0000 42 08 Page 3 Basic Safety Instructions The product may be operated only from TN TT supply networks fuse protected with max 16 A higher fuse only after consulting with the Rohde amp Schwarz group of companies Do not insert the plug into sockets that are dusty or dirty Insert the plug firmly and all the way into the socket provided for this purpose Otherwise sparks that result in fire and or injuries may occur Do not overload any sockets extension cords or connector strips doing so can cause fire or electric shocks For measurements in circuits with voltages Vims gt 30 V suitable measures e g appropriate measuring equipment fuse protection current limiting electrical separation insulation should be taken to avoid any hazards Ensure that the connections with information tec
182. ection to the instrument before it can send commands to and receive device responses from the instrument Instrument Address In order to operate the instrument via remote control it must be addressed using the defined interface address See chapter 10 1 2 LAN Interface on page 127 chapter 10 1 3 USB Interface on page 130 or chapter 10 1 4 PCI Express Interface on page 131 for details The VISA resource strings are indicated in the SGMA GUI main panel gt Instrument name gt Setup gt Remote Channels dialog How to Find the VISA Resource String To find the VISA resource strings of your instrument gt Select SGMA GUI main panel gt Instrument name gt Setup gt Remote Channels The Remote Channel Settings dialog shows all specified resource strings of the supported remote control interfaces R amp S SGS100A Network and Remote Control Operation 10 2 2 Example Remote Control over LAN using Socket Communication This section provides an example on how to establish a remote control connection over telnet protocol and a simple sockets based program example that can be further devel oped see also chapter 14 2 Telnet program examples on page 252 Basic knowledge of programming and operation of the controller are assumed A description of the interface commands can be obtained from the relevant manuals Refer to the Getting Started manual for an example on how to set up remote control connection o
183. ed de alimentaci n o bater a Realice la limpieza de los aparatos con un pafio suave que no se deshilache No utilice bajo ning n concepto productos de limpieza qu micos como alcohol acetona o diluyentes para lacas nitrocelul sicas 1171 0000 42 08 Page 11 Instrucciones de seguridad elementales Funcionamiento 1 El uso del producto requiere instrucciones especiales y una alta concentraci n durante el manejo Debe asegurarse que las personas que manejen el producto est n a la altura de los requerimientos necesarios en cuanto a aptitudes fisicas psiquicas y emocionales ya que de otra manera no se pueden excluir lesiones o da os de objetos El empresario u operador es responsable de seleccionar el personal usuario apto para el manejo del producto Antes de desplazar o transportar el producto lea y tenga en cuenta el capitulo Transporte Como con todo producto de fabricaci n industrial no puede quedar excluida en general la posibilidad de que se produzcan alergias provocadas por algunos materiales empleados los llamados alergenos p ej el niquel Si durante el manejo de productos Rohde amp Schwarz se producen reacciones al rgicas como p ej irritaciones cut neas estornudos continuos enrojecimiento de la conjuntiva o dificultades respiratorias debe avisarse inmediatamente a un m dico para investigar las causas y evitar cualquier molestia o da o a la salud Antes de la manipulaci n mec nica y o t rmica
184. ed information on concepts and definitions of SCPI 10 1 1 Remote Control Programs and Libraries The figure 10 1 provides a schematic illustration of the remote control capabilities of the instrument Protocol Proprietary VXI 11 HiSLIP USBTMC Library paie Soker VISA controller controller Instrument Driver Application Program Fig 10 1 Remote control interfaces protocols and libraries The following examples give an overview of the dependencies between the available libraries the possible interfaces and protocols and whether an instrument driver is pro vided The involved parts are highlighted e Remote control program using VISA Remote Control Interfaces and Protocols Protocol m VXI 11 HiSLIP USBTMC Library VISA Application Program Fig 10 2 Remote control program using VISA Protocol Remote Control Program Socket viOpen TCPIP rssgs100a100010 5025 SOCKET viPrintf SOUR FREQ 2GHz n VXI 11 viOpen TCPIP rssgs100a100010 inst0 INSTR viPrintf SOUR FREQ 2GHz n HiSLIP viOpen TCPIP rssgs100a100010 hislipO INSTR viPrintf SOUR FREQ 2GHz n USBTMC viOpen USB 0x0aad 0x0088 1000010 INSTR viPrintf SOUR FREQ 2GHz n e Remote control program using instrument driver VISA available Protocol Proprietary Fe VXI 11 HiSLIP USBTMC Library pae VISA controller Instrument Driver
185. ee instruments with the same dimensions width and length If you need to stack more than three instruments install them in a rack e The overall load imposed on the lowest instrument must not exceed 500 N e All instruments should have the same dimensions width and length If you need to stack smaller instruments on the top the overall load imposed on the lowest instrument must not exceed 250 N e Ifthe instruments have foldable feet fold them in completely Correct Too many instruments Different dimensions Feet folded out Rackmounting The R amp S SGS can be installed in a rack using a rack adapter kit Order No see data sheet The installation instructions are part of the adapter kit Risk of instrument damage in a rack An insufficient airflow can cause the instrument to overheat which may disturb the operation and even cause damage Make sure that all fan openings are unobstructed that the airflow perforations are unimpeded and that the minimum distance from the wall is 10 cm 2 1 5 Switching the Instrument On and Off The R amp S SGS is automatically adapted to the AC voltage supplied There is no need to set the voltage manually or change fuses The AC SUPPLY AND POWER SWITCH is at the rear of the unit R amp S9SGS100A Preparing for Use To connect the AC supply gt Connect the R amp S SGS to the AC power source using the AC power cable deliv ered with the instrument Note The instrument is in compli
186. ent identification string 14 1 3 2 Syntax for Device Specific Commands instrument CD Not all commands used in the following examples are necessarily implemented in the For demonstration purposes only assume the existence of the following commands for this section e DISPlay WINDow lt 1 4 gt MAXimize Boolean e FORMat READings DATA lt type gt lt length gt e HCOPy DEVice COLor lt Boolean gt e HCOPy DEVice CMAP COLor RGB lt red gt lt green gt lt blue gt e HCOPy IMMediate e HCOPy ITEM ALL e HCOPy ITEM LABel lt string gt e HCOPy PAGE DIMensions QUADrant lt N gt e HCOPy PAGE ORIentation LANDscape PORTrait e HCOPy PAGE SCALe lt numeric value gt e MMEMory COPY file source gt lt file destination e SENSE BANDwidth BWIDth RESolution numeric value e SENSe FREQuency STOP numeric value e GJ ENSe LIST FREQuency numeric value gt lt numeric value gt Long and short form The mnemonics feature a long form and a short form The short form is marked by upper case letters the long form corresponds to the complete word Either the short form or the long form can be entered other abbreviations are not permitted Remote Control Basics Example HCOPy DEVice COLor ON is equivalent to HCOP DEV COL ON Case insensitivity Upper case and lower case notation only serves to distinguish the two forms
187. ent settings recente ceca 173 Crest factor ues Current frequency EE 92 D Bi eee 237 Default directory eU joe Default instrument settings Default values REMOTE 2 Delete instrument settings Delta ph se ss Delta temperature ao n rer senteurs Bee Dr Device specific commands DHCP EE Directory MASS MEMO e nanen o ANAE 172 Displaying ll E E 64 Blees TE 239 Double pulse delay Eco mode ACHVAUNG RE Electrostatic discharge ae EMISUPpressiON a rice teo RG dere actes ENABIO eer ee Enable registers Sue 156 Error Keynes eek 27 Error message Query interr pted en anne Resource locked S Error Messages sisi Adjustment data invalid 183 Adjustment data missing 182 ted Adjustment failed 180 sss Cannot access hardware 200 sss Cannot access the EEPROM 202 A Cannot open file 460 sess Cannot read file 462 EEN e Cannot write file 461 Driver initialization failed 204 Driver invalid EEPROM data 203 File cannot find directory 468 File contains invalid data 465 I Filename missing 463 sss Hardware revision out of date 201 229 Invalid filename extension 464 229 No
188. er SRE The STatus Byte STB is already defined in IEEE 488 2 It provides a rough over view of the instrument status by collecting the pieces of information of the lower regis ters A special feature is that bit 6 acts as the sum bit of the remaining bits of the status byte The STB is read using the command STB or a serial poll The STatus Byte STB is linked to the Service Request Enable SRE register Each bit ofthe STB is assigned a bit in the SRE Bit 6 ofthe SRE is ignored If a bit is set in the SRE and the associated bit in the STB changes from 0 to 1 a service request SRQ is generated The SRE can be set using the command SRE and read using the command SRE Table 14 2 Meaning of the bits used in the status byte BitNo Meaning 0 1 Not used 2 Error Queue not empty The bit is set when an entry is made in the error queue If this bit is enabled by the SRE each entry ofthe error queue generates a service request Thus an error can be recognized and specified in greater detail by polling the error queue The poll provides an informative error mes sage This procedure is to be recommended since it considerably reduces the problems involved with remote control 3 QUEStionable status register summary bit The bit is set if an EVENT bit is set in the QUEStionable status register and the associated ENABle bit is set to 1 A set bit indicates a questionable instrument status which can be speci
189. er Used heap memory lt HeapAvailableKb gt integer Available heap memory Usage Query only MMEMory LOAD STATe lt SavRclStateNumb gt file name Loads the specified file stored under the specified name in an internal memory After the file has been loaded the instrument setting must be activated using an RCL command Setting parameters lt SavRclStateNumb gt Determines to the specific lt number gt to be used with the RCL command e g RCL 4 lt file_name gt String parameter to specify the file name with extension savrcltxt Example See Storing and Loading Current Settings on page 170 Usage Setting only MMEMory Subsystem MMEMory MDIRectory lt Directory gt Creates a new subdirectory for mass memory storage in the specified directory If no directory is specified a subdirectory is created in the default directory This command can also be used to create a directory tree Setting parameters lt Directory gt string String parameter to specify the new directory Example See Working with Files and Directories on page 170 Usage Event MMEMory MOVE lt SourceFile gt lt DestinationFile gt Moves an existing file to a new location or if no path is specified renames an existing file Setting parameters lt SourceFile gt string String parameter to specify the name of the file to be moved lt DestinationFile gt string String parameters to specify the name of the new
190. er Weise zu f hren Der Hersteller bernimmt keine Verantwortung f r Unf lle oder Kollisionen Verwenden Sie das Produkt niemals in einem sich bewegenden Fahrzeug sofern dies den Fahrzeugf hrer ablenken k nnte Sichern Sie das Produkt im Fahrzeug ausreichend ab um im Falle eines Unfalls Verletzungen oder Sch den anderer Art zu verhindern Entsorgung 1 Batterien bzw Akkumulatoren die nicht mit dem Hausm ll entsorgt werden d rfen darf nach Ende der Lebensdauer nur ber eine geeignete Sammelstelle oder eine Rohde amp Schwarz Kundendienststelle entsorgt werden Am Ende der Lebensdauer des Produktes darf dieses Produkt nicht ber den normalen Hausm ll entsorgt werden sondern muss getrennt gesammelt werden Rohde amp Schwarz GmbH amp Co KG ein Entsorgungskonzept entwickelt und bernimmt die Pflichten der R cknahme und Entsorgung f r Hersteller innerhalb der EU in vollem Umfang Wenden Sie sich bitte an Ihre Rohde amp Schwarz Kundendienststelle um das Produkt umweltgerecht zu entsorgen 1171 0000 41 08 Seite 7 Grundlegende Sicherheitshinweise 3 Werden Produkte oder ihre Bestandteile ber den bestimmungsgem en Betrieb hinaus mechanisch und oder thermisch bearbeitet k nnen ggf gef hrliche Stoffe schwermetallhaltiger Staub wie z B Blei Beryllium Nickel freigesetzt werden Die Zerlegung des Produkts darf daher nur von speziell geschultem Fachpersonal erfolgen Unsachgem es Zerlegen kann Gesundheitss
191. er the key code delivered with the new option The new option is now enabled and ready for operation 9 14 How to Manually Set a PCle Direct Connection between an R amp S SGS and an R amp S SGU To build a direct PCle connection between an R amp S SGU and an R amp S SGS which has a Controller gt Revision lt 5 first you have to manually set the correct PCle interface mode If your R amp S SGS has a Controller gt Revision 5 or higher this settings are done automatically You can check the Controller gt Revision of your instrument in the SGMA GUI gt Instrument Name gt Hardware Config dialog To manually set a PCle direct connection between an R amp S SGS and an R amp S SGU 1 Connect the R amp S SGS and the R amp S SGU directly using a PCle cable Refer to chapter 10 3 3 Connecting the Controller and the Instrument on page 137 for cable requirements and setup information Switch on the R amp S SGS and the R amp S SGU Select SGMA GUI main panel gt Instrument Name gt Setup gt Maintainance Select Operation gt PCle Interface Mode Select PCle Interface Mode gt Root Complex o m B o N Restart your instrument for the changes to take place The PCle connection between the R amp S SGS and the R amp S SGU is establihed and the instruments can be used Remote Control Interfaces and Protocols 10 Network and Remote Control Operation As an alternative to operating the R amp S SGS interactively via
192. er thermischen Bearbeitung oder Zerlegung des Produkts beachten Sie unbedingt Abschnitt Entsorgung Punkt 1 1171 0000 41 08 Seite 5 Grundlegende Sicherheitshinweise Bei bestimmten Produkten z B HF Funkanlagen k nnen funktionsbedingt erh hte elektromag netische Strahlungen auftreten Unter Ber cksichtigung der erh hten Schutzw rdigkeit des unge borenen Lebens m ssen Schwangere durch geeignete Ma nahmen gesch tzt werden Auch Tr ger von Herzschrittmachern k nnen durch elektromagnetische Strahlungen gef hrdet sein Der Arbeitgeber Betreiber ist verpflichtet Arbeitsst tten bei denen ein besonderes Risiko einer Strahlen exposition besteht zu beurteilen und zu kennzeichnen und m gliche Gefahren abzuwenden Im Falle eines Brandes entweichen ggf giftige Stoffe Gase Fl ssigkeiten etc aus dem Produkt die Gesundheitssch den verursachen k nnen Daher sind im Brandfall geeignete Ma nahmen wie z B Atemschutzmasken und Schutzkleidung zu verwenden Falls ein Laser Produkt in ein R amp S Produkt integriert ist z B CD DVD Laufwerk d rfen keine anderen Einstellungen oder Funktionen verwendet werden als in der Produktdokumentation beschrie ben um Personensch den zu vermeiden z B durch Laserstrahl EMV Klassen nach EN 55011 CISPR 11 sinngem EN 55022 CISPR 22 EN 55032 CISPR 32 Ger t der Klasse A Ein Ger t das sich f r den Gebrauch in allen anderen Bereichen au er dem Wohnbereich und solchen Be
193. er to specify the directory If the directory is omit ted the command queries the content of the current directory queried with MMEMory CDIRectory command Return values lt Catalog gt lt file_entry gt Names of the subdirectories separated by colons The first two strings are related to the parent directory Example See Working with Files and Directories on page 170 Usage Query only MMEMory DCATalog LENGth lt Path gt Returns the number of subdirectories in the current or specified directory Query parameters lt Path gt String parameter to specify the directory If the directory is omit ted the command queries the contents of the current directory to be queried with MMEMory CDIRectory command Return values lt DirectoryCount gt integer Number of parent and subdirectories Example See Working with Files and Directories on page 170 Usage Query only MMEMory Subsystem MMEMory DELete lt Filename gt u Removes a file from the specified directory Setting parameters lt Filename gt string String parameter to specify the name and directory of the file to be removed Example See Working with Files and Directories on page 170 Usage Event SCPI confirmed MEMory HFRee Returns the used and available memory in Kb Return values lt TotalPhysMemKb gt integer Total physical memory lt ApplicMemKb gt integer Application memory lt HeapUsedKb gt integ
194. erheitshinweise Lesen und beachten Sie unbedingt die nachfolgenden Anweisungen und Sicherheitshinweise Alle Werke und Standorte der Rohde amp Schwarz Firmengruppe sind st ndig bem ht den Sicherheitsstandard unserer Produkte auf dem aktuellsten Stand zu halten und unseren Kunden ein h chstm gliches Ma an Sicherheit zu bieten Unsere Produkte und die daf r erforderlichen Zusatzger te werden entsprechend der jeweils g ltigen Sicherheitsvorschriften gebaut und gepr ft Die Einhaltung dieser Bestimmungen wird durch unser Qualit tssicherungssystem laufend berwacht Das vorliegende Produkt ist gem beiliegender EU Konformit tsbescheinigung gebaut und gepr ft und hat das Werk in sicherheitstechnisch einwandfreiem Zustand verlassen Um diesen Zustand zu erhalten und einen gefahrlosen Betrieb sicherzustellen muss der Benutzer alle Hinweise Warnhinweise und Warnvermerke beachten Bei allen Fragen bez glich vorliegender Sicherheitshinweise steht Ihnen die Rohde amp Schwarz Firmengruppe jederzeit gerne zur Verf gung Dar ber hinaus liegt es in der Verantwortung des Benutzers das Produkt in geeigneter Weise zu verwenden Das Produkt ist ausschlie lich f r den Betrieb in Industrie und Labor bzw wenn ausdr cklich zugelassen auch f r den Feldeinsatz bestimmt und darf in keiner Weise so verwendet werden dass einer Person Sache Schaden zugef gt werden kann Die Benutzung des Produkts au erhalb des bestimmungsgem en Gebrauchs oder
195. es Les cellules ou batteries ne doivent pas tre gard es dans une bo te ou un tiroir o elles peuvent se court circuiter mutuellement ou tre court circuit es par d autres mat riaux conducteurs Une cellule ou batterie ne doit tre retir e de son emballage d origine que lorsqu on l utilise Les cellules ou batteries ne doivent pas tre expos es des chocs m caniques de force non admissible En cas de manque d tanch it d une cellule le liquide ne doit pas entrer en contact avec la peau ou les yeux S il y a contact rincer abondamment l eau l endroit concern et consulter un m decin Il y a danger d explosion en cas de remplacement ou chargement incorrect des cellules ou batteries qui contiennent des lectrolytes alcalins par exemple cellules de lithium Remplacer les cellules ou batteries uniquement par le type Rohde amp Schwarz correspondant voir la liste des pi ces de rechange pour maintenir la s curit du produit I faut recycler les cellules ou batteries et il est interdit de les liminer comme d chets normaux Les accumulateurs ou batteries qui contiennent du plomb du mercure ou du cadmium sont des d chets sp ciaux Observer les r gles nationales d limination et de recyclage Transport 1 Le produit peut avoir un poids lev Il faut donc le d placer ou le transporter avec pr caution et en utilisant le cas ch ant un moyen de levage appropri par exemple chariot l vateur pour v
196. es in the table ucor1 SOURce lt hw gt CORRection CSET DATA POWer POINts Queries the number of level values in the selected table The numerical suffix at SOURce must not be used for this command Return values lt Points gt integer Range 0 to 10000 RST 0 Example CORR CSET var sgs ucorl selects the table ucor1 CORR CSET DATA POW POIN queries the number of level values in the table ucor1 Response 440 the table ucor1 contains 440 level values Usage Query only SOURce CORRection CSET DELete Filename Deletes the specified table The lists are stored with the fixed file extensions uco in a directory of the user s choice The directory applicable to the commands is defined with the command MMEMory CDIR A path can also be specified in command SOUR CORR CSET CAT in which case the file in the specified directory is deleted Setting parameters Filename table name Example MMEM CDIR var sgs ucor selects the directory for the user correction files CORR CSET DEL UCORI deletes the table ucor1 Usage Setting only SOURce CORRection Subsystem SOURce lt hw gt CORRection DEXChange AFlLe CATalog Requests a list of available ASCII files for export import of user correction data The individual files are separated by commas The ASCII files are stored with the fixed file extensions txt or csv in a directory of the user s choice The director
197. es must not be exposed to any mechanical shocks that are stronger than permitted If a cell develops a leak the fluid must not be allowed to come into contact with the skin or eyes If contact occurs wash the affected area with plenty of water and seek medical aid Improperly replacing or charging cells or batteries that contain alkaline electrolytes e g lithium cells can cause explosions Replace cells or batteries only with the matching Rohde amp Schwarz type see parts list in order to ensure the safety of the product Cells and batteries must be recycled and kept separate from residual waste Rechargeable batteries and normal batteries that contain lead mercury or cadmium are hazardous waste Observe the national regulations regarding waste disposal and recycling Transport 1 The product may be very heavy Therefore the product must be handled with care In some cases the user may require a suitable means of lifting or moving the product e g with a lift truck to avoid back or other physical injuries Handles on the products are designed exclusively to enable personnel to transport the product It is therefore not permissible to use handles to fasten the product to or on transport equipment such as cranes fork lifts wagons etc The user is responsible for securely fastening the products to or on the means of transport or lifting Observe the safety regulations of the manufacturer of the means of transport or lifting Noncom
198. estados operativos y posiciones de funcionamiento sin que se obstruya la ventilaci n Si no se siguen las indicaciones del fabricante pueden producirse choques el ctricos incendios y o lesiones graves con posible consecuencia de muerte En todos los trabajos deber n ser tenidas en cuenta las normas nacionales y locales de seguridad del trabajo y de prevenci n de accidentes 1171 0000 42 08 Page 9 Instrucciones de seguridad elementales Si no se convino de otra manera es para los productos Rohde amp Schwarz v lido lo que sigue como posici n de funcionamiento se define por principio la posici n con el suelo de la caja para abajo modo de protecci n IP 2X uso solamente en estancias interiores utilizaci n hasta 2000 m sobre el nivel del mar transporte hasta 4500 m sobre el nivel del mar Se aplicara una tolerancia de 10 sobre el voltaje nominal y de 5 sobre la frecuencia nominal Categoria de sobrecarga el ctrica 2 indice de suciedad 2 No sit e el producto encima de superficies veh culos estantes o mesas que por sus caracter sticas de peso o de estabilidad no sean aptos para l Siga siempre las instrucciones de instalaci n del fabricante cuando instale y asegure el producto en objetos o estructuras p ej paredes y estantes Si se realiza la instalaci n de modo distinto al indicado en la documentaci n del producto se pueden causar lesiones o en determinadas circunstancias incluso la muerte No ponga el produc
199. eststececsseceeeessvsnsencesseaaetecacsnatees inn R aridis 226 Error Messages and Troubleshooting 227 Status Information ee eklig 227 Error Messages enn da 227 VolatilemeSsageS wicca ra esse 227 Permanent messages at eet n Ha et o b Meca et siens 228 SCPI Error Messages te tic 228 Device Specific Error Messages 228 ERO E 231 14 1 14 1 1 14 1 2 14 1 3 14 1 3 1 14 1 3 2 14 1 3 3 14 1 3 4 14 1 3 5 14 1 3 6 14 1 4 14 1 4 1 14 1 5 14 1 5 1 14 1 5 2 14 1 5 3 14 1 5 4 14 1 5 5 14 1 5 6 14 1 5 7 14 1 5 8 14 1 6 14 2 Remote Control Basics niece neam innt n nna scena vB Eu uS aao so Duae vaiinu raain 231 MESS m H A 231 LAN Interface Messages idunt itr e ee P ei dd edd 232 SCPI Comimand Structure i erroe een 232 Syntax for Common Comtrnarnds iieri eerte etae ttd seta eda Ct eed e 233 Syntax for Device Specific Commande 233 SCPI Paramete Sanii aiia tota da e E ee nen 236 Overview of Syntax Elements 239 Structure of a command line 239 Responses 10 Queres viciado en ann 240 Command Sequence and Synchronization nn 241 Preventing Overlapping Execution 241 Status Reporting System una ae 243 Hierarchy of the Status Registers issu 243 Structure of a SCPI Status Register 245 Status Byte STB and Service Request Enable Register SRE
200. etwork adapter on which you want to install the driver and click on it The Local Area Connection Status dialog opens Click Properties to open the Local Area Connection Properties dialog Click Install to open the Select Network Feature Type dialog Select Protocol and click Add o a o In the Select Network Protocol dialog click Have Disk navigate to the directory where the driver is saved and click OK to install the driver Enabling Fast Settings gt To enable the fast settings for the Fast Socket call function rssgs UseFastSettings ViSession instrumentHandle ViBoolean fastEnabled ViBoolean asynchronousEnabled included in the instru ment driver Settings for some parameters like level and frequency will accelerate To disable the fast settings call the function rssgs UseFastSettings with argu ment fastEnabled false R amp S PSGS100A Network and Remote Control Operation 10 5 Using the R amp S SGMA GUI to Monitor the Remote Control Operation The R amp S SGMA GUI can be used to monitor the behavior of one or more instruments while they are remote controlled A typical configuration consists of one monitor controller s and instrument s where the monitor is the remote PC on which the R amp S SGMA GUI is installed and the control ler is the remote PC on which the application program runs Simultaneous control of an instrument from a controller and a monitor may lead to colli
201. eut galement mettre les personnes en danger Ne pas utiliser le produit dans des conditions pouvant occasionner ou ayant d j occasionn le cas ch ant des condensations dans ou sur le produit par exemple lorsque celui ci est d plac d un environnement froid dans un environnement chaud L infiltration d eau augmente le risque de choc lectrique Avant le nettoyage d brancher le produit de l alimentation par exemple r seau lectrique ou batterie Pour le nettoyage des appareils utiliser un chiffon doux non pelucheux N utiliser en aucun cas de produit de nettoyage chimique tel que de l alcool de l ac tone ou un diluant nitrocellulosique Fonctionnement 1 L utilisation du produit exige une formation sp cifique ainsi qu une grande concentration Il est imp ratif que les personnes qui utilisent le produit pr sent les aptitudes physiques mentales et psychiques requises vu qu autrement des dommages corporels ou mat riels ne peuvent pas tre exclus Le choix du personnel qualifi pour l utilisation du produit est sous la responsabilit de l employeur l exploitant Avant de d placer ou de transporter le produit lire et respecter la section Transport Comme pour tous les biens produits de fagon industrielle l utilisation de mat riaux pouvant causer des allergies allerg nes comme par exemple le nickel ne peut tre totalement exclue Si lors de l utilisation de produits Rohde amp Schwarz des r
202. evision gt string Example See chapter 11 1 1 Performing General Task for Instrument Setup on page 144 Usage Query only Manual operation See Assembly on page 94 c SYSTem HARDware ASSembly lt dir gt SNUMber Queries the list of hardware module serial numbers Suffix lt dir gt 1 2 Defines the section 1 common assembly 2 RF assembly Return values lt SNumber gt string Example See chapter 11 1 1 Performing General Task for Instrument Setup on page 144 Usage Query only Manual operation See Assembly on page 94 SYSTem SOFTware OPTion lt dir gt DESignation Queries the list of option descriptions Suffix lt dir gt 1 2 Defines the section 1 hardware 2 software Return values lt Designation gt string Example See chapter 11 1 1 Performing General Task for Instrument Setup on page 144 Usage Query only Manual operation See Hardware Software WinlQSIM on page 96 SYSTem SOFTware OPTion lt dir gt EXPiration Queries the list of option expiration informations SYSTem Subsystem Suffix lt dir gt 1 2 Defines the section 1 hardware 2 software Return values lt Expiration gt string Example See chapter 11 1 1 Performing General Task for Instrument Setup on page 144 Usage Query only Manual operation See Hardware Software WinlQSIM on page 96
203. ey on the front panel of the instru ment c Send the SCPI command RESTart The instrument loads the last setup with all instrument settings switches to ready state and is ready for normal operation In the R amp S SGMA GUI the ready state is indicated by the green state symbol in front of the corresponding instrument s name on the front panel by the green POWER ON STAND BY button To switch all connected instruments to standby state and close the R amp S SGMA GUI Inthe R amp S SGMA GUI main panel select File gt Shut down instruments and exit The R amp S SGMA GUI quits and switches the connected instruments to standby state How to Use Computer Names For description on how to terminate work and shut down the instrument regularly refer to chapter 2 1 5 Switching the Instrument On and Off on page 17 9 10 How to Use Computer Names Provided that there is a name server in the network alternatively to the IP address each PC or instrument connected in a LAN can be accessed via an unambiguous com puter name Each instrument is delivered with an assigned computer name but this name can be changed For instruction on how to find out the default computer name refer to chapter 6 4 3 Finding Out the Default Hostname of the Instrument on page 61 To query and change a computer name To avoid violations and to make use of the easy identification provided by the computer name it is recommended to keep
204. f one or several devices in a measuring system To do this and react appropriately the controller must receive and evaluate the information of all devices The following standard methods are used Service request SRQ initiated by the instrument Serial poll of all devices in the bus system initiated by the controller in order to find out who sent a SRQ and why e Query of a specific instrument status by means of commands Query of the error queue Service Request Under certain circumstances the instrument can send a service request SRQ to the controller Usually this service request initiates an interrupt at the controller to which the control program can react appropriately An SRQ is always initiated if one or sev eral of bits 2 4 or 5 of the status byte are set and enabled in the SRE Each of these bits combines the information of the error queue or the output buffer In order to use the possibilities of the service request effectively all bits should be set to 1 in the enable registers SRE and ESE Remote Control Basics Example Use command OPC to generate an SRQ ESE 1 set bit 0 of ESE Operation Complete SRE 32 set bit 5 of SRE ESB After its settings have been completed the instrument generates an SRQ The SRQ is the only possibility for the instrument to become active on its own Each controller program should set the instrument such that a service request is initiated in the case of ma
205. for pulse modulation SOURce PULM Subsystem Parameters lt Source gt INTernal EXTernal INTernal The internal pulse generator is used for the pulse modulation EXTernal The signal applied externally via the trigger connector is used for the pulse modulation RST INTernal Manual operation See Source on page 77 SOURce lt hw gt PULM STATe lt State gt Activates the pulse modulation Parameters lt State gt 0 1 OFF ON RST 0 Example PULM STAT ON activates pulse modulation Manual operation See State on page 76 SOURce lt hw gt PULM TRIGger EXTernal GATE POLarity lt Polarity gt Selects the polarity of the Gate signal Parameters lt Polarity gt NORMal INVerted RST NORMal Example PULM TRIG EXT GATE POL NORM The pulse signal is generated while the gate signal is high Manual operation See Gate Input Polarity on page 80 SOURce lt hw gt PULM TRIGger EXTernal IMPedance Impedance Selects the impedance for external pulse trigger Parameters lt Impedance gt G50 G10K RST G50 Example SOUR PULM TRIG EXT IMP G50 selects 50 Ohm as the trigger impedance for the external pulse trigger Manual operation See External Impedance on page 77 SOURce PULM Subsystem SOURce lt hw gt PULM TRIGger EXTernal SLOPe lt Slope gt Sets the polarity of the active slope of an externally applied trigger signal Parameters lt Slope gt Example
206. for the oldest item and removes it from the queue The response consists of an error number and a short description of the error Positive error numbers are instrument dependent Negative error numbers are reserved by the SCPI standard Return values Next string Error event_number Error event_description gt Device depend ent info Ifthe queue is empty the response is 0 No error Example SYST ERR queries the oldest entry in the error queue Response 0 no error No errors have occurred since the error queue was last read out Usage Query only SYSTem SERRor Returns a list of all errors existing at the time when the query is started This list corre sponds to the display on the info page under manual control Return values lt Serror gt string Example SYST SERR queries all errors existing in the error queue SYSTem Subsystem Example Response 221 Settings conflict 153 Input voltage out of range The two returned errors have occurred since the error queue was last queried Usage Query only SYSTem VERSion Queries the SCPI version the instrument s command set complies with Return values lt Version gt string Example SYST VERS queries the SCPI version Response 1996 The instrument complies with the SCPI version from 1996 Usage Query only SYSTem COMMunicate NETWork IPADdress lt IpAddress gt Sets the IP address Parameters lt IpAddress gt string Range
207. g dialog O For a direct PCle connection an automatic identification of the R amp S SGU as an exten O If instrument is not automatically added as an extension If the R amp S SGU is not automatically added as an extension you can do that manually in the SGMA GUI gt R amp S SGS Name gt Extension dialog Ifthe R amp S SGU is not listed in the list of Available Instruments you can press Scan gt Start to find the instrument 5 2 2 Connection in a Company Network Connection of an R amp S SGS and an R amp S SGU in a Company Network As a prerequisite for this example the R amp S SGMA GUI software has to be installed on a remote PC Setups for Connecting an R amp S SGS and an R amp S SGU Company Network LAN j R amp S SGMA GUI Fig 5 5 Connection of an R amp S SGS and an R amp S SGU in a company network 1 Connect the test equipment as shown in figure 5 5 a Connect the R amp S SGS the R amp S SGU and the controller to the company net work b Connect the RF OUT of the R amp S SGS to the LO IN of the R amp S SGU 2 Switch on the R amp S SGS and the R amp S SGU The POWER ON STANDBY keys have to be green and not blinking 3 Press the ID keys on the front panels of the R amp S SGS and the R amp S SGU 4 Onthe connected remote PC start the R amp S SGMA GUI software application The main panel of the application and the configure instruments dialog open Both instruments are added automatically t
208. g bewegt wurde Das Eindringen von Wasser erh ht das Risiko eines elektrischen Schlages Trennen Sie das Produkt vor der Reinigung komplett von der Energieversorgung z B speisendes Netz oder Batterie Nehmen Sie bei Ger ten die Reinigung mit einem weichen nicht fasernden Staublappen vor Verwenden Sie keinesfalls chemische Reinigungsmittel wie z B Alkohol Aceton Nitroverd nnung Betrieb 1 Die Benutzung des Produkts erfordert spezielle Einweisung und hohe Konzentration w hrend der Benutzung Es muss sichergestellt sein dass Personen die das Produkt bedienen bez glich ihrer k rperlichen geistigen und seelischen Verfassung den Anforderungen gewachsen sind da andernfalls Verletzungen oder Sachsch den nicht auszuschlie en sind Es liegt in der Verantwortung des Arbeitsgebers Betreibers geeignetes Personal f r die Benutzung des Produkts auszuw hlen Bevor Sie das Produkt bewegen oder transportieren lesen und beachten Sie den Abschnitt Transport Wie bei allen industriell gefertigten G tern kann die Verwendung von Stoffen die Allergien hervorrufen so genannte Allergene z B Nickel nicht generell ausgeschlossen werden Sollten beim Umgang mit R amp S Produkten allergische Reaktionen z B Hautausschlag h ufiges Niesen Bindehautr tung oder Atembeschwerden auftreten ist umgehend ein Arzt aufzusuchen um die Ursachen zu kl ren und Gesundheitssch den bzw belastungen zu vermeiden Vor der mechanischen und od
209. g the lock out SYSTem PROTect1 STATe OFF 123456 deactivates protection level 1 Internal adjustments are enabled again SYSTem Subsystem SYSTem STARtup COMPlete Queries if the startup of the instrument is completed Return values lt Complete gt 0 1 OFF ON RST 0 Example SYST STAR COMP Response 1 The startup of the instrument is completed Usage Query only SYSTem HARDware ASSembly lt dir gt NAME The query returns a list of hardware assembly names Suffix lt dir gt 1 2 Defines the section 1 common assembly 2 RF assembly Return values lt Name gt string Example See chapter 11 1 1 Performing General Task for Instrument Setup on page 144 Usage Query only Manual operation See Assembly on page 94 SYSTem HARDware ASSembly lt dir gt PNUMber The query returns the list of hardware module part numbers Suffix lt dir gt 1 2 Defines the section 1 common assembly 2 RF assembly Return values lt PNumber gt string Example See chapter 11 1 1 Performing General Task for Instrument Setup on page 144 Usage Query only Manual operation See Assembly on page 94 SYSTem HARDware ASSembly lt dir gt REVision Queries the list of hardware module revisions SYSTem Subsystem Suffix lt dir gt 1 2 Defines the section 1 common assembly 2 RF assembly Return values lt R
210. gt h_addrtype serverAddress sin port htons currentPort memcpy char amp serverAddress sin addr s addr currentHostInfo h addr list 0 currentHostInfo gt h_length if connect currentSocketDescr struct sockaddr amp serverAddress sizeof serverAddress 0 throw string can t connect server n clientIsConnected true void TcpClient disconnect if clientIsConnected close currentSocketDescr currentSocketDescr 0 currentHostName M currentPort 0 currentHostInfo NULL clientIsConnected false void TcpClient transmit string amp txString if clientIsConnected throw string connection must be established before any data can be sent n char transmitBuffer new char txString length 1 Telnet program examples memcpy transmitBuffer txString c_str txString length transmitBuffer txString length n newline is needed if send currentSocketDescr transmitBuffer txString length 1 0 0 throw string can t transmit data n delete transmitBuffer void TcpClient receive string amp rxString if clientIsConnected throw string connection must be established before any data can be received n char receiveBuffer new char receiveBufferSize memset receiveBuffer 0 receiveBufferSize bool receiving true while receiving int receivedByte
211. he default security password before con necting the instrument to the network The security password is for exampe required when changing the status of the USB and LAN interface Old Password Change Security Password Enter the currently used security password The default password is 123456 New Password Change Security Password Enter the new security password The security password may contain decimal charac ters only Confirm Password Change Security Password Enter the new password for conformation The new password is only valid after the Change Password button is pressed Change Password Change Security Password Changes the password accordingly Security Settings Comprises the settings for enabling and disabling the USB and LAN interfaces The setting requires the entry ofthe security password and is only accepted after the Accept button is pressed Maintenance USB Device Security Settings Enable disable the USB interface Note The instrument does not recognize any device connected to the USB interface when the interface is disabled LAN Connection Security Settings Enable disable the LAN interface Note It is not possible to access the instrument via LAN while the LAN connection is disabled An enabled LAN Connection is a prerequisite for the remote control of the instrument via VNC FTP or SAMBA Security Password Security Settings Enters the password that is required to ena
212. he instrument on c Press the ID key on the front panel of the instrument 2 Start the SGMA GUI on a computer connected to the same network All instruments will be added automatically to the main panel of the SGMA GUI 6 4 2 2 How to Manually Add New Instruments to the SGMA GUI 1 In the R amp S SGMA GUI main panel select Setup gt Instruments The Configure Instruments dialog opens 2 Select the New button The Add Instrument dialog opens to register a new instrument 3 Inthe Symbolic Name field enter an alias name of your choice e g SGS 100021 4 Inthe Instrument Type field select the device family to connect to 5 Select Remote Control gt Hardware Channel and select the hardware interface 6 For LAN or Socket interfaces select Remote Control gt Instrument Name IP Address and enter the IP Address or the hostname of the connected instrument e g rssgs100a100021 6 4 2 3 6 4 2 4 6 4 2 5 Working with R amp S SGMA GUI Tip See also chapter 6 4 3 Finding Out the Default Hostname of the Instrument on page 61 For USB or PCle interfaces select Remote Control gt Serial Number and enter the serial number of the connected instrument e g 100021 Set Active gt On to activate the instrument Only active instruments are displayed inthe R amp S SGMA GUI main panel Click OK to confirm the settings and to close the dialog or press the Apply but ton to confirm the settings
213. hnology equipment e g PCs or other industrial computers comply with the IEC 60950 1 EN 60950 1 or IEC 61010 1 EN 61010 1 standards that apply in each case Unless expressly permitted never remove the cover or any part of the housing while the product is in operation Doing so will expose circuits and components and can lead to injuries fire or damage to the product If a product is to be permanently installed the connection between the protective conductor terminal on site and the product s protective conductor must be made first before any other connection is made The product may be installed and connected only by a licensed electrician For permanently installed equipment without built in fuses circuit breakers or similar protective devices the supply circuit must be fuse protected in such a way that anyone who has access to the product as well as the product itself is adequately protected from injury or damage Use suitable overvoltage protection to ensure that no overvoltage such as that caused by a bolt of lightning can reach the product Otherwise the person operating the product will be exposed to the danger of an electric shock Any object that is not designed to be placed in the openings of the housing must not be used for this purpose Doing so can cause short circuits inside the product and or electric shocks fire or injuries Unless specified otherwise products are not liquid proof see also
214. ilable instruments connection settings can be edited instruments can be removed from the list or they can be deactivated but kept in the list for further use Refer to chapter 6 4 2 Handling Instruments in the R amp S SGMA GUI on page 58 for information on how to configure and manage instruments in R amp S SGMA GUI Operating Menu and Toolbar Available Instruments This section comprises a list of configured instruments Each instrument is represented by a Symbolic Name which is also displayed in the main panel and an Instrument Type It is also displayed whether the instrument is activated in the R amp S SGMA GUI and hence displayed in the main panel or not Remote command INSTruments COUNt on page 221 INSTruments NAME on page 222 INSTruments TYPE on page 224 INSTruments ACTive STATe on page 221 Scan Triggers a scan function and searches for instruments connected to the remote com puter via all of the available interfaces During the scan process a progress bar is dis played Tip The first initialization of a newly connected instrument in a network and the instru ment s request to the DHCP server for an IP address may take some time During this time the instrument does not respond to the query sent by the scan function If the instrument does not appear in the list of Available Instruments trigger the scan func tion again after some minutes Remote command INSTruments SCAN
215. iled 229 241 No current list 229 242 Unknown list type specified 229 460 Cannot open file 461 Cannot write file 462 Cannot read file 463 Filename missing 464 Invalid filename extension 465 File contains invalid data 468 Cannot find directory s 469 No files found 230 A ee EE 17 30 Accept Security settings Active adjustment data Adjust all ET Adjust IQ modulator se nee aan Adjust level i rnt iia Adjust synthesis Adjustm nt active iii e mn trs Adjustment frequency enne das Apply network settings AttFixed B Baseband bypass mode esse 113 Boolean parameters rere 238 C Case sensitivity E 234 Change password Cleaning ns Em 225 Clear status Command sequence recommendation cooooococccccinononocccnncconanononononcconanno nono 251 Remote Double d gget 5 nme 239 Instrument c ntr l zu nennen 231 Overla ping means 241 Questionimark arena een era 239 QUOTATION MAPK usa tn 239 SGPIicorfitmed 2 2 iaa antennes 231 Sequential ron n eren ennt es 241 Syntax elements ira 239 White SPACE u rrr rna eet en 239 Common commands Eh Computer EE EN Le Uu BEE CONDition Confirm password Connector Connector mode 4 n e 28 Copy instrum
216. in anderen Wirtschaftsr umen oder bei milit rischen Anwendungen abweichende Definitionen existieren Es ist daher darauf zu achten dass die hier beschriebenen Signalworte stets nur in Verbindung mit der zugeh rigen Produktdokumentation und nur in Verbindung mit dem zugeh rigen Produkt verwendet werden Die Verwendung von Signalworten in Zusammenhang mit nicht zugeh rigen Produkten oder nicht zugeh rigen Dokumentationen kann zu Fehlinterpretationen f hren und damit zu Personen oder Sachsch den f hren Betriebszust nde und Betriebslagen Das Produkt darf nur in den vom Hersteller angegebenen Betriebszust nden und Betriebslagen ohne Behinderung der Bel ftung betrieben werden Werden die Herstellerangaben nicht eingehalten kann dies elektrischen Schlag Brand und oder schwere Verletzungen von Personen unter Umst nden mit Todesfolge verursachen Bei allen Arbeiten sind die rtlichen bzw landesspezifischen Sicherheits und Unfallverh tungsvorschriften zu beachten 1 Sofern nicht anders vereinbart gilt f r R amp S Produkte folgendes als vorgeschriebene Betriebslage grunds tzlich Geh useboden unten IP Schutzart 2X Verschmutzungsgrad 2 berspannungskategorie 2 nur in Innenr umen verwenden Betrieb bis 2000 m NN Transport bis 4500 m NN f r die Nennspannung gilt eine Toleranz von 10 f r die Nennfrequenz eine Toleranz von 5 D Stellen Sie das Produkt nicht auf Oberfl chen Fahrzeuge Ablagen oder Tische die au
217. indicates the status of the external reference Green indicates that the instrument can synchronize to the external clock Red indicates that the instrument cannot synchronize to the external clock e No light indicates that the internal reference is used ERROR WARNING ERROR WARNING The ERROR WARNING LED indicates the status of the R amp S SGS e Red indicates that an error has occurred e g temperature exceeded or power fail ure e Blinking orange indicates a running process e g calibration self test e Nolight indicates that no errors or warnings have occurred For details on errors or warnings refer to the graphical user interface on a remote PC SGMA GUI gt Info For more information refer to the Error Messages section in the User Manual LAN LAN Pressing the key for more than 3 s resets the LAN interface settings i e the IP Adress Mode is reset to DHCP ID Pressing the ID key while the instrument is active opens the SGMA GUI gt Setup gt Instruments gt Configure Instruments gt Edit Instrument dialog of the corresponding instrument on the remote controller Pressing the ID key of an inactive instrument and starting SGMA GUI gt Setup gt Instruments gt Scan leads to an automatic activation of the instrument in the SGMA GUI R amp S SGS100A Instrument Tour 3 2 Rear Panel Tour This section provides an overview of the connectors on the rear panel of the instru
218. ine they are separated by a vertical stroke Only one of these mnemonics needs to be included in the header of the command The effect of the command is independent of which of the mnemonics is used Example DefinitionSENSE BANDwidth BWIDth RESolution numeric value The two following commands with identical meaning can be created SENS BAND RES 1 SENS BWID RES 1 Mnemonics in square brackets are optional and may be inserted into the header or omitted Example HCOPy IMMediate HCOP IMM is equivalent to HCOP Parameters in curly brackets are optional and can be inserted once or several times or omitted Example SENSe LIST FREQuency numeric value gt lt numeric value The following are valid commands SENS LIST FREQ 10 SENS LIST FREQ 10 20 SENS LIST FREQ 10 20 30 40 14 1 3 3 SCPI Parameters Many commands are supplemented by a parameter or a list of parameters The parameters must be separated from the header by a white space ASCII code 0 to 9 11 to 32 decimal e g blank Allowed parameters are e Numeric values e Special numeric values e Boolean parameters e Text e Character strings e Block data The parameters required for each command and the allowed range of values are specified in the command description Remote Control Basics Numeric values Numeric values can be entered in any form i e with sign decimal point and exponent Values exceeding the resolution of the i
219. ined table values being added to the output level for the respective RF fre quency In the R amp S SGS this subsystem is used to select transfer and activate user correction tables Each list is stored as a file The name of the user correction file can be freely selected The file extension uco is assigned automatically and cannot be changed The files can be stored in a freely selectable directory and opened from there The default directory is set using command MMEMory CDIRectory on page 172 In the case of files which are stored in the default directory only the file name has to be specified in commands Otherwise the complete absolute path has to be specified with every command The extension can be omitted in any case E In the following command examples the files are stored in the default directory SOURce CORRection CSET CATalog iiiocioiaiia iia 181 SOURce lt hw gt CORRection CSET DATA FREQUENCy ss 182 SOURce hw CORRection CSET DATA FREQuency POINts eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenee 182 SOURce lt hw gt CORRection CSET DATA POWer ieeeeeee es nri sani inni nh 183 SOURce hw CORRection CSET DATA POWer POINtS sese 183 SOURCE CObb echonCGtET DELG sisi 183 SOURce lt hw gt CORRection DEXChange AFILe CATalog 184 SOURce lt hw gt CORRection DEXChange AFILe EXTension
220. is integrated into a Rohde amp Schwarz product absolutely no other settings or functions may be used as described in the product documentation The objective is to prevent personal injury e g due to laser beams 8 EMC classes in line with EN 55011 CISPR 11 and analogously with EN 55022 CISPR 22 EN 55032 CISPR 32 Class A equipment Equipment suitable for use in all environments except residential environments and environments that are directly connected to a low voltage supply network that supplies residential buildings Note Class A equipment is intended for use in an industrial environment This equipment may cause radio disturbances in residential environments due to possible conducted as well as radiated disturbances In this case the operator may be required to take appropriate measures to eliminate these disturbances Class B equipment Equipment suitable for use in residential environments and environments that are directly connected to a low voltage supply network that supplies residential buildings Repair and service 1 The product may be opened only by authorized specially trained personnel Before any work is performed on the product or before the product is opened it must be disconnected from the AC supply network Otherwise personnel will be exposed to the risk of an electric shock 1171 0000 42 08 Page 5 Basic Safety Instructions Adjustments replacement of parts maintenance and repair may be performed on
221. is used for any purpose other than its designated purpose or in disregard of the manufacturer s instructions The manufacturer shall assume no responsibility for such use of the product The product is used for its designated purpose if it is used in accordance with its product documentation and within its performance limits see data sheet documentation the following safety instructions Using the product requires technical skills and in some cases a basic knowledge of English It is therefore essential that only skilled and specialized staff or thoroughly trained personnel with the required skills be allowed to use the product If personal safety gear is required for using Rohde amp Schwarz products this will be indicated at the appropriate place in the product documentation Keep the basic safety instructions and the product documentation in a safe place and pass them on to the subsequent users Observing the safety instructions will help prevent personal injury or damage of any kind caused by dangerous situations Therefore carefully read through and adhere to the following safety instructions before and when using the product It is also absolutely essential to observe the additional safety instructions on personal safety for example that appear in relevant parts of the product documentation In these safety instructions the word product refers to all merchandise sold and distributed by the Rohde amp Schwarz group of companies including
222. isplays the alias name of the instrument as selected by the parameter SGMA GUI gt Setup gt Instruments gt Add Edit Instruments gt Symbolic Name A click on this button provides access to a menu tree for configuring the available instrument s settings e g Level settings Main Panel 1 000 000 000 000 cs 1 000 000 000 000 cs FRE Mod 1 000 000 000 000 cs Frequency Sets the RF frequency at the RF output connector of the selected instrument Remote command SOURce FREQuency CW FIXed on page 180 RF ON OFF Activates and deactivates the RF output signal The current state of the RF output activated and deactivated is indicated in the main panel by means of the different block color blue or grey and the status On Off Remote command OUTPut STATe on page 179 Mod State Switches the I Q modulation on and off Remote command SOURce IQ STATe on page 189 PEP Displays the Peak Envelope Power PEP of the RF signal of the selected instrument The value is calculated as follows PEP Level Crest Factor Remote command SOURce POWer PEP on page 195 Level Sets the RF level at the RF output connector of the selected instrument If you set a level offset it will be indicated in the R amp S SGMA GUI main panel by a change in the name of this parameter from Level to Level Offset 6 4 6 4 1 Working with R amp S SGMA GUI Level 30 00 lam gt a
223. ister STATus QUEStionable ENABle lt Enable gt Sets the bits ofthe ENABle part ofthe STATus QUEStionable register This setting determines which events of the Status Event part are enabled for the sum bit in the status byte These events can be used for a service request Parameters lt Enable gt string Example STAT OPER ENAB 1 problems when performing an adjustment cause an entry to be made in the sum bit STATus QUEStionable EVENt lt Event gt Queries the content of the EVENT part of the STATus QUEStionable register This part contains information on the actions performed in the instrument since the last readout The content of the EVENT part is deleted after being read out Parameters lt Event gt string Example STAT QUES EVEN queries the Status Questionable Event register STATus QUEStionable NTRansition lt Ntransition gt Sets the bits of the NTRansition part of the STATus QUEStionable register If a bit is set a transition from 1 to 0 in the condition part causes an entry to be made in the EVENt part of the register Parameters lt Ntransition gt string SYSTem Subsystem Example STAT OPER NTR 0 a transition from 1 to 0 in the condition part of the Status Ques tionable register does not cause an entry to be made in the EVEN part STATus QUEStionable PTRansition lt PTransition gt Sets the bits of the NTRansition part of the STATus QUEStionable register
224. iter des dommages au dos ou des blessures Les poign es des produits sont une aide de manipulation exclusivement r serv e au transport du produit par des personnes Il est donc proscrit d utiliser ces poign es pour attacher le produit ou sur des moyens de transport tels que grues chariots et chariots l vateurs etc Vous tes responsable de la fixation s re des produits ou sur des moyens de transport et de levage appropri s Observer les consignes de s curit du fabricant des moyens de transport ou de levage utilis s pour viter des dommages corporels et des d g ts sur le produit L utilisation du produit dans un v hicule se fait sous l unique responsabilit du conducteur qui doit piloter le v hicule de mani re s re et appropri e Le fabricant d cline toute responsabilit en cas d accidents ou de collisions Ne jamais utiliser le produit dans un v hicule en mouvement si cela pouvait d tourner l attention du conducteur S curiser suffisamment le produit dans le v hicule pour emp cher des blessures ou dommages de tout type en cas d accident limination des d chets 1 Au terme de leur dur e de vie les batteries ou accumulateurs qui ne peuvent pas tre limin s avec les d chets m nagers peuvent uniquement tre limin s par des points de collecte appropri s ou par un centre de service apr s vente Rohde amp Schwarz 1171 0000 43 08 Page 7 Consignes de securite fondamentales 2 Au terme de
225. ix rssg scan returns only instruments with hostname beginning with rssg INSTruments SCAN 1 OPC ck ck ck ck EEE EEE 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 ck ck ck ck ck ck 2 2 2 ck 2 2 2 2 2 ko Query the number of available instruments and the settings of each configured instrument instrument type symbolic name remote channel used serial number hostname IP address Adjust settings if required KKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK INSTruments COUNt Response 3 INSTruments TYPE Response SGU SGS SGT INSTruments NAME Response SGU 100002 SGS 100006 SGT 100008 Common Commands INSTruments SERial Response 100002 100006 100008 INSTruments REMote CHANnel Response LAN USB PCIe INSTruments REMote NAME Response rssgu100a100002 rssgs100a100006 rssgt100a100008 KKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK Check the instrument state and activate instruments if required ck ck ck ck ck ck EEE EEE 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 XX INSTruments ACTive STATe Response 0 1 1 INSTruments ACTive STATe ON OFF OFF Activates the first instruments in the list i e the instruments with symbolic names SGS 100006 EEE 0k Ck 0k 0k 0k 0k 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
226. k and if necessary clean the fans regularly to ensure they operate properly at all times If the instrument is run with obstructed fans for a longer period it may become overheated which may cause damage 12 2 Storing and Packing The storage temperature range of the instrument is given in the data sheet Ifthe instrument is to be stored for a longer period of time it must be protected against dust Repack the instrument as it was originally packed when transporting or shipping The two protective foam plastic parts prevent the control elements and connectors from being damaged The antistatic packing foil avoids any undesired electrostatic charging to occur If you do not use the original packaging use a sturdy cardboard box of suitable size and provide for sufficient padding to prevent the instrument from slipping inside the package Wrap antistatic packing foil around the instrument to protect it from electro static charging 12 13 1 13 2 13 2 1 Status Information Error Messages and Troubleshooting This chapter describes the error messages of the R amp S SGS The error messages are output in the Info line on the screen and entered in the error event queue of the sta tus reporting system A great variety of different messages such as status messages error messages warn ings or information are displayed in the header field of the screen Some error mes sages require that the error must be eliminated before correct
227. k dia gram shows the main blocks of the instrument together with the corresponding GUI parameters R amp S SGS Operation Mode Gi RF On Off Level JLO IN JLO y A Ext Ref Source Ext analog signal Fig 5 8 Simplified Block Diagram TCXO Built in reference oscillator OCXO Oven controlled oscillator requires hardware option R amp S SGS B1 Synth Synthesizer 1 Q Mod 1 Q Modulator REF LO IN REF LO OUT Q RF OUT Connector at the rear panel Ref Osc Source REF LO Out LO Coupling R amp S SGMA GUI equivalent parameter Source Mod On Off RF On Off Operation Mode The instrument can generate an CW or an UO modulated signal Mod On Off The frequency and level settings are adjustable Level RF on Off Frequency The instrument can use its internal reference frequency or a fed in external one REF LO IN Ref Osc Source The reference frequency can also be output for synchronisa tion purposes REF LO OUT REF LO Out The local oscillator LO signal can be distributed in such a way that two or more instruments are connected to generate phase coherent signals LO Coupling Source REF LO OUT REF LO Out Whereat both possibilities the input of the reference frequency and the input of a LO signal exclude each other because they use the same connectors The same applies for the output of the reference frequency and the LO signal The instrument can also be configu
228. l The User Manual is a supplement to the Getting Started manual The manual is availa ble in PDF format in printable form on the Documentation CD ROM delivered with the instrument In this manual all instrument functions are described in detail Further more it provides an introduction to remote control and a complete description of the remote control commands with programming examples Information on maintenance instrument interfaces and error messages is also given Service Manual The Service Manual is available in PDF format in printable form on the documenta tion CD ROM delivered with the instrument It informs on how to check compliance with rated specifications on instrument function repair troubleshooting and fault elimi nation It contains all information required for repairing the instrument by the replace ment of modules Web Help The content of the web helps correspond to the user manual for the latest product ver sion The web help is an additional file format that offers quick online access This format is not intended for download but rather for accessing the required information directly form the R amp S website Web helps are available on the R amp S website on the R amp S SGS product page at http www2 rohde schwarz com product SGS100A html gt Download gt Web Help Typographical Conventions The following text markers are used throughout this documentation Convention Description Gra
229. l Environmental protection item 2 Warning Laser radiation For additional information see section Operation item 7 Signal words and their meaning The following signal words are used in the product documentation in order to warn the reader about risks and dangers serious injury serious injury moderate injury Indicates a hazardous situation which if not avoided will result in death or Indicates a hazardous situation which if not avoided could result in death or Indicates a hazardous situation which if not avoided could result in minor or Indicates information considered important but not hazard related e g messages relating to property damage In the product documentation the word ATTENTION is used synonymously These signal words are in accordance with the standard definition for civil applications in the European Economic Area Definitions that deviate from the standard definition may also exist in other economic areas or military applications It is therefore essential to make sure that the signal words described here are always used only in connection with the related product documentation and the related product The use of signal words in connection with unrelated products or documentation can result in misinterpretation and in personal injury or material damage 1171 0000 42 08 Page 2 Basic Safety Instructions Operating states and operating positions The product m
230. l size the instrument is not equipped with a display and hence additional equipment is required to control the instrument This section provides an overview of the possible configuration setups for controlling the R amp S SGS 5 1 1 Manual Operation from the R amp S SGMA GUI The following example represents a basic configuration of the R amp S SGS operated manually by the configuration software R amp S SGMA GUI The configuration software is installed on a remote PC and controls several instruments The instruments are con nected to the remote PC over different remote control interfaces Any combination of the used interfaces is possible 4 R amp S y SGMA GUI USB PCle LAN e g VXI 11 Fig 5 1 Configuration example manual control from R amp S SGMA GUI e chapter 6 Understanding the R amp S SGMA GUI Software on page 44 e chapter 7 Signal Generator Settings on page 65 O For information about the manual control refer to e chapter 8 General Instrument Settings and Instrument Setup on page 91 Setups for Instrument Control 5 1 2 Remote Control from a Controller The remote control provides access to the instrument s settings from a remote com puter external controller by means of remote commands To automate often repeat ing settings and settings sequences these are grouped in the remote control pro grams i e application programs An instrument may be connected to the controller via any of the su
231. led mode Eco Mode 1 The correct alignment of the parameters outside of the current active frequency range is not guaranteed A subse quent re adjustment for the total frequency range of the instrument is recommended The state of this parameter is not affected by an instrument Preset This parameter is influenced only by the Factory Preset SCPI command SYSTem EMODe on page 208 Standby and Restart See chapter 9 9 How to Switch Between the Operating States on page 118 8 13 8 13 1 8 13 2 Diagnostic and Tests Diagnostic and Tests This section describes the settings provided for diagnostic and test purposes Self Test 1 To access this dialog select SGMA GUI gt Instrument Name gt Diagnostic Tests gt Self Test 2 To trigger a self test select Selftest Performs a self test on all installed hardware options The result of the self test succeeded or failed is displayed The list of the numeric results of the performed test cases is protected by protection level 2 SCPI command TEST ALL STARt on page 219 TEST ALL RESult on page 219 Keyboard Tests gt To access this dialog select SGMA GUI gt Instrument Name gt Diagnostic Tests gt Keyboard Test Use this function to check the proper operation of all front panel elements If Keyboard Test is enabled all front panel LEDs except the POWER ON are orange The exact test procedure is described in the Service Ma
232. lent to HCOP Remote Control Basics o Optional mnemonics with numeric suffixes Do not omit an optional mnemonic if it includes a numeric suffix that is relevant for the effect of the command Example Definition DISPlay WINDow lt 1 4 gt MAXimize Boolean Command DISP MAX ON refers to window 1 In order to refer to a window other than 1 you must include the optional WINDow parameter with the suffix for the required window DISP WIND2 MAX ON refers to window 2 Parameters Parameters must be separated from the header by a white space If several parame ters are specified in a command they are separated by a comma For a description of the parameter types refer to chapter 14 1 3 3 SCPI Parameters on page 236 Example Definition HCOPy DEVice CMAP COLor RGB lt red gt lt green gt lt blue gt Command HCOP DEV CMAP COL RGB 3 32 44 Remote Control Basics Special characters Parameters A vertical stroke in parameter definitions indicates alternative possibilities in the sense of or The effect of the command differs depending on which parameter is used Example Definition HCOPy PAGE ORIentation LANDscape PORTrait Command HCOP PAGE ORI LAND specifies landscape orientation Command HCOP PAGE ORI PORT specifies portrait orientation Mnemonics A selection of mnemonics with an identical effect exists for several commands These mnemonics are indicated in the same l
233. les correspondantes dans la documentation produit doivent galement tre respect es le cas ch ant L limination non conforme des substances dangereuses ou combustibles peut provoquer des atteintes la sant et des dommages cologiques Pour plus d informations concernant la protection de l environnement voir la page d accueil de Rohde amp Schwarz 1171 0000 43 08 Page 8 Customer Support Technical support where and when you need it For quick expert help with any Rohde amp Schwarz equipment contact one of our Customer Support Centers A team of highly qualified engineers provides telephone support and will work with you to find a solution to your query on any aspect of the operation programming or applications of Rohde amp Schwarz equipment Up to date information and upgrades To keep your instrument up to date and to be informed about new application notes related to your instrument please send an e mail to the Customer Support Center stating your instrument and your wish We will take care that you will get the right information Europe Africa Middle East Phone 49 89 4129 12345 customersupport rohde schwarz com North America Phone 1 888 TEST RSA 1 888 837 8772 customer support rsa rohde schwarz com Latin America Phone 1 410 910 7988 customersupport la rohde schwarz com Asia Pacific Phone 65 65 13 04 88 customersupport asia rohde schwarz com China Phone 86 800 810 8228 86 400 650 5896
234. lesiones p ej debidas a irradiaci n l ser Clases de compatibilidad electromagn tica conforme a EN 55011 CISPR 11 y en analog a con EN 55022 CISPR 22 EN 55032 CISPR 32 Aparato de clase A Aparato adecuado para su uso en todos los entornos excepto en los residenciales y en aquellos conectados directamente a una red de distribuci n de baja tensi n que suministra corriente a edificios residenciales Nota Los aparatos de clase A est n destinados al uso en entornos industriales Estos aparatos pueden causar perturbaciones radioel ctricas en entornos residenciales debido a posibles perturbaciones guiadas o radiadas En este caso se le podr solicitar al operador que tome las medidas adecuadas para eliminar estas perturbaciones Aparato de clase B Aparato adecuado para su uso en entornos residenciales as como en aquellos conectados directamente a una red de distribuci n de baja tensi n que suministra corriente a edificios residenciales 1171 0000 42 08 Page 12 Instrucciones de seguridad elementales Reparaci n y mantenimiento 1 El producto solamente debe ser abierto por personal especializado con autorizaci n para ello Antes de manipular el producto o abrirlo es obligatorio desconectarlo de la tensi n de alimentaci n para evitar toda posibilidad de choque el ctrico El ajuste el cambio de partes el mantenimiento y la reparaci n deber n ser efectuadas solamente por electricistas autorizados p
235. lfunction The program should react appropriately to the service request Serial Poll In a serial poll just as with command STB the status byte of an instrument is queried However the query is realized via interface messages and is thus clearly faster The serial poll method is defined in IEEE 488 1 and used to be the only standard pos sibility for different instruments to poll the status byte The method also works for instruments which do not adhere to SCPI or IEEE 488 2 The serial poll is mainly used to obtain a fast overview of the state of several instru ments connected to the controller Query of an instrument status Each part of any status register can be read using queries There are two types of commands e The common commands ESR IDN IST STB query the higher level registers e The commands of the STATus system query the SCPI registers STATUS QUEStionable The returned value is always a decimal number that represents the bit pattern of the queried register This number is evaluated by the controller program Queries are usually used after an SRQ in order to obtain more detailed information on the cause of the SRQ Error Queue Each error state in the instrument leads to an entry in the error queue The entries of the error queue are detailed plain text error messages that can be looked up in the Error Log or queried via remote control using SYSTem ERRor NEXT or SYSTem ERRor ALL Ea
236. ling and Configuring an Extension Mode on page 150 11 9 FORMat Subsystem The FORMat subsystem contains the commands which determine the format of the data that the R amp S SGS returns to the controller This affects all query commands which return a list of numerical data or block data Reference is made to this in the descriptions of the commands FORMa ele 167 FORT nie nee 167 FORMAUSREGISIBEG EE 168 FORMat BORDer lt Border gt Determines the sequence of bytes within a binary block This only affects blocks which use the IEEE754 format internally Parameters lt Border gt NORMal SWAPped NORMal The instrument expects with setting commands and sends with queries the least significant byte of each IEEE754 floating point number first and the most significant byte last SWAPped The instrument expects with setting commands and sends with queries the most significant byte of each IEEE754 floating point number first and the least significant byte last RST NORMal Example FORM BORD SWAP the data is transferred with the most significant bit first FORMat DATA lt Data gt Determines the data format which the R amp S SGS uses to return data When data is transferred from the control computer to the instrument the instrument detects the data format automatically In this case the value set here is irrelevant MMEMory Subsystem Parameters lt Data gt ASCii PACKed ASCii Numerical data is transfer
237. log Impairment Settings gt To access the settings of the UO modulator select SGMA GUI gt Instrument Name gt Q Settings gt Analog Impairments Comprises the settings like 1 Q offset and quadrature offset State Activates deactivates 1 Q impairments If activated the settings for offset gain imbalance and quadrature offset become effec tive Whether or not UO impairment is activated is indicated in the function block Remote command SOURce IQ IMPairment STATe on page 190 Offset Sets the carrier offset in percent of the amplitudes scaled to the peak envelope power PEP for the I and or Q signal component An ideal UO modulator suppresses the carrier offset completely offset 0 percent For more information see chapter 7 8 1 2 and Q Offset on page 82 Remote command SOURce IQ IMPairment SOURce IQ IMPairment E EAKage I on page 189 EAKage 0 on page 189 Ct Ct e Gain Imbalance Sets the imbalance of the and Q vector see chapter 7 8 1 1 Gain and Gain Imbal ance on page 81 The entry is made in dB default or where 1 dB offset is roughly 12 according to the following Imbalance dB 20log GainQ Gain Preset Positive values mean that the Q vector is amplified more than the vector by the corre sponding percentage Negative values have the opposite effect Remote command SOURce IQ IMPairment IQRatio MAGNitude on p
238. ly by electrical experts authorized by Rohde amp Schwarz Only original parts may be used for replacing parts relevant to safety e g power switches power transformers fuses A safety test must always be performed after parts relevant to safety have been replaced visual inspection protective conductor test insulation resistance measurement leakage current measurement functional test This helps ensure the continued safety of the product Batteries and rechargeable batteries cells If the information regarding batteries and rechargeable batteries cells is not observed either at all or to the extent necessary product users may be exposed to the risk of explosions fire and or serious personal injury and in some cases death Batteries and rechargeable batteries with alkaline electrolytes e g lithium cells must be handled in accordance with the EN 62133 standard 1 2 Cells must not be taken apart or crushed Cells or batteries must not be exposed to heat or fire Storage in direct sunlight must be avoided Keep cells and batteries clean and dry Clean soiled connectors using a dry clean cloth Cells or batteries must not be short circuited Cells or batteries must not be stored in a box or ina drawer where they can short circuit each other or where they can be short circuited by other conductive materials Cells and batteries must not be removed from their original packaging until they are ready to be used Cells and batteri
239. m tico ni otros mecanismos de seguridad similares el circuito de alimentaci n debe estar protegido de modo que todas las personas que puedan acceder al producto as como el producto mismo est n a salvo de posibles da os Todo producto debe estar protegido contra sobretensi n debida p ej a una ca da del rayo mediante los correspondientes sistemas de protecci n Si no el personal que lo utilice quedar expuesto al peligro de choque el ctrico No debe introducirse en los orificios de la caja del aparato ning n objeto que no est destinado a ello Esto puede producir cortocircuitos en el producto y o puede causar choques el ctricos fuego o lesiones Salvo indicaci n contraria los productos no est n impermeabilizados ver tambi n el cap tulo Estados operativos y posiciones de funcionamiento punto 1 Por eso es necesario tomar las medidas necesarias para evitar la entrada de l quidos En caso contrario existe peligro de choque el ctrico para el usuario o de dafios en el producto que tambi n pueden redundar en peligro para las personas No utilice el producto en condiciones en las que pueda producirse o ya se hayan producido condensaciones sobre el producto o en el interior de ste como p ej al desplazarlo de un lugar fr o a otro caliente La entrada de agua aumenta el riesgo de choque el ctrico Antes de la limpieza desconecte por completo el producto de la alimentaci n de tensi n p ej r
240. minated before other commands are executed Command synchronization using WAI or OPC appended to an overlapped com mand is a good choice if the overlapped command takes only little time to process The two synchronization techniques simply block overlapped execution of the command For time consuming overlapped commands it is usually desirable to allow the controller or the instrument to do other useful work while waiting for command execution Use one of the following methods OPC with a service request 1 Set the OPC mask bit bit no 0 in the ESE ESE 1 2 Set bit no 5 in the SRE SRE 32 to enable ESB service request 3 Send the overlapped command with OPC 4 Wait for a service request The service request indicates that the overlapped command has finished OPC with a service request 1 Set bit no 4 in the SRE SRE 16 to enable MAV service request 2 Send the overlapped command with OPC 3 Wait for a service request The service request indicates that the overlapped command has finished Event Status Register ESE 1 Set the OPC mask bit bit no 0 in the ESE ESE 1 2 Send the overlapped command without OPC OPC or WAI 3 Poll the operation complete state periodically by means of a timer using the sequence OPC ESR A return value LSB of 1 indicates that the overlapped command has finished Remote Control Basics OPC with short timeout 1 Send the overlapped command without OPC OPC
241. mple parois et tag res En cas d installation non conforme la documentation produit il y a risque de blessures voire de mort 3 Ne jamais placer le produit sur des dispositifs g n rant de la chaleur par exemple radiateurs et appareils de chauffage soufflants La temp rature ambiante ne doit pas d passer la temp rature maximale sp cifi e dans la documentation produit ou dans la fiche technique Une surchauffe du produit peut provoquer des chocs lectriques des incendies et ou des blessures graves pouvant ventuellement entrainer la mort 1171 0000 43 08 Page 3 Consignes de securite fondamentales S curit lectrique Si les consignes relatives la s curit lectrique ne sont pas ou sont insuffisamment respect es il peut s ensuivre des chocs lectriques des incendies et ou des blessures graves pouvant ventuellement entra ner la mort 1 Avant chaque mise sous tension du produit il faut s assurer que la tension nominale r gl e sur le produit correspond la tension nominale du r seau lectrique S il est n cessaire de modifier le r glage de la tension il faut remplacer le fusible du produit le cas ch ant L utilisation des produits du degr de protection pourvus d un c ble d alimentation mobile et d un connecteur n est autoris e qu avec des prises munies d un contact de protection et d un conducteur de protection raccord Toute d connexion intentionnelle du conducteur de protecti
242. mputer can be direct or via a network For details see chapter 2 3 2 Connecting a Remote PC via LAN on page 22 RF OUT RF 50 Do Provides an RF 50 Ohm signal output NOTICE Maximum Input Levels Do not overload the RF output The maximum per missible back feed is specified in the data sheet 1 Q Inputs of the UO modulator provided for feeding of external signal NOTICE Maximum Input Levels Do not overload the and Q inputs The maximum permissible voltage is 1V For details refer to the data sheet Note The UO modulator requires one of the hardware options R amp S SGS B106V B112V REF LO IN REF LO OUT OUT IN Connectors for reference or local oscillator signals and alternatively also in MIMO set ups Reference input and output e REF IN Input for external reference signal e REF OUT Output of internal reference signal Local oscillator input and output e LOIN Input for external LO signals User Manual 1173 9105 02 10 29 Rear Panel Tour e LO OUT Output of internal LO signals Note The Local Oscillator input output requires the additional software option R amp S SGS K90 TRIG KO Multi purpose connector The TRIG connector is used mainly as an input connector for an external pulse modulator source AC SUPPLY AND POWER SWITCH 0 240 Y The AC supply and power switch allow you to connect the R amp S SGS to the power sup ply and switch on the instrument
243. n Risk of network failure Before connecting the instrument to the network or configuring the network consult your network administrator Errors may affect the entire network gt Connect the instrument to the network or to a single PC If the instrument is connected to the LAN the operating system automatically detects the network connection and activates the required drivers By default the instrument is configured to use dynamic TCP IP configuration and obtain all address information automatically 2 3 2 2 Assigning the IP Address Depending on the network capacities the TCP IP address information for the instru ment can be obtained in different ways e If the network supports dynamic TCP IP configuration using the Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol DHCP all address information can be assigned automati cally e Ifthe network does not support DHCP the instrument tries to obtain the IP address via Zeroconf APIPA protocol If this attempt does not succeed or if the instrument is set to use alternate TCP IP configuration the addresses must be set manually values between 1 254 and yyy the values in the value range 1 255 the subnet mask is always 255 255 0 0 The IP address of the host must be within the same address area for Zeroconf CH The R amp S SGS uses the Zeroconf IP addresses 169 254 xxx yyy where xxx may take By default the instrument is configured to use dynamic TCP IP configuration and obtain all add
244. n deletes them Only the error numbers are returned and not the entire error text Return values lt All gt string 0 No error i e the error queue is empty positive value Positive error numbers denote device specific errors negative value Negative error numbers denote error messages defined by SCPI Example SYST ERR CODE ALL queries all entries in the error queue Response 0 no errors have occurred since the error queue was last read out Usage Query only SYSTem ERRor CODE NEXT Queries the oldest entry in the error queue and then deletes it Only the error number is returned and not the entire error text Return values lt Next gt string 0 No error i e the error queue is empty positive value Positive error numbers denote device specific errors negative value Negative error numbers denote error messages defined by SCPI SYSTem Subsystem Example SYST ERR CODE queries the oldest entry in the error queue Response 0 No errors have occurred since the error queue was last read out Usage Query only SYSTem ERRor COUNt Queries the number of entries in the error queue If the error queue is empty 0 is returned Return values Count string Example SYST ERR COUN queries the number of entries in the error queue Response 1 One error has occurred since the error queue was last read out Usage Query only SYSTem ERRor NEXT Queries the error event queue
245. n neben 217 SYSTem SOFTware OPTiori dir LICetnses rait th ener hd rr eR PR FUR SER Ra ERR tente tse 218 SYSTem SOFTware OPTion dir NAME m Y STEMSTARUUP COMPlEtE iii a 216 eh HEET 211 MESTALERESU Se era 219 PUES TAAL STAR aussehen te ea 219 LEST KEYBOArd STATE naeh Re nena 220 UNE ANGL a a aa de a 220 UNE POWER 220 TT 158 SOURCeCORRe cIION CSET CATO une ernennen nee 181 SOURce CORRection CSET DELet rrt trn e a de 183 SOURce FREQuency CWIFIXed EU le ee EE SOURce EIO IMPairment IQRatio MAGNItude 2t es ea 189 Eeler ug e Hl Ti nie LEAKa gE ME 189 SOURCE le IMPaIMentLEAKAMS Gl sro rrr eter EAA aia 189 SOURce EIQ IMPairment QU ADrature ANGLe ote t tnn nen tenen 189 SOURce IQ IMPairment STATE i thon e ert etn p enr ru mare 190 SOURce IQ STATe ESOUREEFIO WBST te ur ee an ad 190 ESOURCE LOSEillator SOURCES ee ee Br 180 Este Ule OPMOdS EL a a ass a de S 180 SOURCE PATH COUNT nan nee ea 180 SOURGE PHASE nan een un de ni rene Ness ele Ee SOURce POWer ALC DSENsitivity ESOURce POWer ALC SONCE E leede SOURce POWer ATTen ation RF OFf MODE errata tn rhe nenn SOURce POWer ATTenuation SOVer OFFSet SOURce POWer LIMit AMPLitude sise SOURce POWer MOD eege een ee gm ai Ree e EE 195 ESOURGEEPOWEr EE 193 SOURce POWer R
246. n or in the data sheet Product overheating can cause electric shock fire and or serious personal injury or even death Electrical safety If the information on electrical safety is not observed either at all or to the extent necessary electric shock fire and or serious personal injury or death may occur 1 Prior to switching on the product always ensure that the nominal voltage setting on the product matches the nominal voltage of the mains supply network If a different voltage is to be set the power fuse of the product may have to be changed accordingly 2 Inthe case of products of safety class with movable power cord and connector operation is permitted only on sockets with a protective conductor contact and protective conductor 3 Intentionally breaking the protective conductor either in the feed line or in the product itself is not permitted Doing so can result in the danger of an electric shock from the product If extension cords or connector strips are implemented they must be checked on a regular basis to ensure that they are safe to use 4 If there is no power switch for disconnecting the product from the mains or if the power switch is not suitable for this purpose use the plug of the connecting cable to disconnect the product from the mains In such cases always ensure that the power plug is easily reachable and accessible at all times For example if the power plug is the disconnecting device the length of the conn
247. n the R amp S SGMA GUI on page 152 Manual operation See Export on page 47 INSTruments NAME lt Name gt Selects the alias name of the instruments e sets the Symbolic Name Parameters lt Name gt lt SymbolicNamelnstr 1 gt lt SymbolicNamelnstr 2 gt Example See chapter 11 1 6 Configuring Instruments in the R amp S SGMA GUI on page 152 Manual operation See Available Instruments on page 47 INSTruments REMote CHANnel lt Channel gt Sets the hardware interface used by the remote channel Parameters lt Channel gt List of CHAR Data lt Channellnstr 1 gt lt Channellnstr 2 gt The available interfaces are LAN USB SOCKET PCIe Example See chapter 11 1 6 Configuring Instruments in the R amp S SGMA GUI on page 152 Manual operation See Hardware Channel on page 50 R amp S SGMA GUI Settings INSTruments REMote NAME lt Name gt Enters the IP Address or the host name of the connected instrument Parameters lt Name gt lt Hostname IP AddressInsr 1 gt lt Hostname IP Addres sInsr 2 gt Example See chapter 11 1 6 Configuring Instruments in the R amp S SGMA GUI on page 152 Manual operation See Instrument Name IP Address on page 50 INSTruments SCAN lt State gt Triggers a scan function and searches for instruments connected to the remote com puter via all of the available interfaces Parameters lt State gt number 1 trigge
248. n the same way for all interfaces if not indica ted otherwise in the description Structure and syntax of the instrument messages are described in chapter 14 1 3 SCPI Command Structure on page 232 A detailed description of all messages available for the instrument is provided in the chapter Remote Control Commands There are different types of instrument messages depending on the direction they are sent Commands Instrument responses Commands Commands program messages are messages the controller sends to the instrument They operate the instrument functions and request information The commands are subdivided according to two criteria e According to the effect they have on the instrument Setting commands cause instrument settings such as a reset of the instru ment or setting the frequency Queries cause data to be provided for remote control e g for identification of the instrument or polling a parameter value Queries are formed by directly appending a question mark to the command header e According to their definition in standards Common commands their function and syntax are precisely defined in stand ard IEEE 488 2 They are employed identically on all instruments if implemen ted They refer to functions such as management of the standardized status registers reset and self test Instrument control commands refer to functions depending on the features of the instrument such as frequency
249. name exten sion The file extension is not valid for the required operation Check the file extension For instance the file extension for the mapping files is map It is not possible to enter another file extension when storing a list Device Specific Error Messages Error Error Description Remedy Code 465 File contains invalid The selected file contains data that is Check the file extension data not valid for the file type The file extension determines the data that is valid for this file type If the file extension is changed the lists are no longer recognized and the data are therefore inva lid 468 Cannot find directory Required folder cannot be found Check drive and path 469 No files found Folder is empty Remote Control Basics 14 Annex 14 1 14 1 1 Remote Control Basics This chapter provides basic information on operating an instrument via remote control Messages The messages transferred on the data lines are divided into the following categories e Interface messages Interface messages are transmitted to the instrument on the data lines with the attention line being active LOW They are used to communicate between the con troller and the instrument Interface messages can only be sent by instruments that have GPIB bus functionality For details see the sections for the required interface e Instrument messages Instrument messages are employed i
250. nd level value pairs are imported and transferred into user correction lists CORR DEXC AFIL SEL var sgs import ucor csv selects that ASCII file ucor csv is imported CORR DEXC SEL var sgs import ucor imp selects that the ASCII file ucor csv is imported into user cor rection list ucor imp SOURce lt hw gt CORRection CSET SELect Filename Selects or creates a file for the user correction data If the file does not exist the instrument automatically creates a new file with the name you assigned Note the predefined file extensions under chapter 11 10 2 Extensions for User Files on page 170 To determine the file location directory path you can either enter it with the command directly or use the command MMEMory CDIR To activate level correction use the command SOURce lt hw gt CORRection STATe Parameters Filename table name 11 15 SOURce IQ Subsystem Example CORR CSET var sgs ucorl selects the table ucor1 CORR ON activates level correction Correction is performed using the table ucor1 SOURce lt hw gt CORRection STATe lt State gt Activates deactivates level correction Level correction is performed using the table which has been selected with the command SOURce lt hw gt CORRection CSET SELect Parameters lt State gt 0 1 OFF ON RST 0 Example SOUR CORR CSET var sgs ucorl selects the table ucor1
251. nd soft ware requirements have to be met Table 2 1 Hardware and Software Requirements Requirement Remark One of the following operating sys R amp S SGMA GUI has to be installed on one of the supported operat tems ing systems e Windows XP SP2 Note e Windows Vista e Windows 7 Any other Windows version or other operating systems are not sup e Windows 8 8 1 ported e Linux Windows Installer Version 4 5 or higher is needed for the installation of the software on a Windows XP computer During installation the operation system is checked The installation will be terminated if this requirement is not fulfilled National Instruments NI VISA VISA drivers can be obtained from R amp S or NI directly version 3 4 1 or higher optional or Agilent VISA version 14 or higher optional CPU At least Pentium or compatible as from 1 GHz recommended VGA color display resolution At least 800 600 pixels 2 3 2 2 3 2 1 Connecting an External PC and Devices Installing a new software version Administrator rights are necessary for installation and starting gt In Windows Explorer double click SGMA GUI_V VV VVV VVV exe and follow the instructions Uninstalling an old software version An uninstallation of a previous version of the SW can be performed prior to the installa tion of the new one but is not mandatory gt To uninstall this version go to Start gt Settings gt
252. nerator to the remaining instruments 1 Provide the signal of an external reference frequency source to the REF LO IN connector of the instrument 2 To enable the instrument to use the external reference frequency source perform one of the following a Select SGMA GUI main panel gt REF gt Ext Ref On b Select SGMA GUI gt Instrument Name gt Reference Oscillator gt Source gt Ext 9 5 How to Configure the Local Oscillator LO Coupling Source 3 In the Reference Oscillator dialog set the parameter Ext Ref Input Frequency to the value of the fed external reference frequency Now the instrument uses an external reference signal The green REF EXT LED at the front panel of the instrument indicates that the instrument is synchronized to the external reference signal If the instrument is configured to use an external reference signal but no signal is fed in at the REF LO IN connector the REF EXT LED on the front panel of the instrument is red and an error message is displayed in the Info line How to Configure the Local Oscillator LO Coupling Source The R amp S SGS can use two frequency sources for the carrier frequency LO Signal of the UO modulator an internal and an external one The first possibility is to use the out put signal of the internal synthesizer If an external LO signal is provided at the REF LO IN connector this signal can alternatively be directly routed to the LO input of the UO modul
253. ng of Protected Service Functions 1 Select SGMA GUI main panel gt Instrument Name gt Setup gt Protection The Protection dialog provides access to the unlocking of protected service func tions authorized personnel of R amp S Service Departments only 2 To deactivate the protection the correct password has to be entered After the instrument has been switched on the protection levels 1 to 4 are automatically activated Enter Protection Level 1 gt Password gt 123456 Protection Level 1 is activated Protection Level 1 A On Password Protection Level 2 kl On Password Protection Level 3 A On Password Protection Level 4 A On Password Protection Level Password Protection Level 1 can be activated to expand the functionality of the internal adjust ment The password is 123456 The other protection levels 2 to 4 provide access to protected service functions Only the authorized personnel of R amp S Service Departments can access these functions 8 6 Security Setting The R amp S SGS employs a security concept based on user and security password The security password is required for changing several critical settings like performing firm Security Setting ware updates An access to the passwords and mass storage security settings is provi ded in the Security dialog gt To access the Security dialog select SGMA GUI gt Instrument Name gt Setup gt Security
254. ngs KEKE KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KK KKK TH A A A A A A A AH AH A A KKK KKK Select the internal modulation generator SOURce PULM SOURce INT Set trigger mode SOURce PULM TRIGger MODE AUTO Select pulse mode SOURce PULM MODE DOUB Ff LEE EEE 0k 0k 00k 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 ck ck 2 ck ck ck 2 2 2 2 2 ko ko kckockck Alternatively configure the pulse modulation settings for external modulation source KREKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck A A A A A ko A AR Select the external modulation source SOURce PULM SOURce EXT Set the polarity of the externally applied modulation signal SOURce PULM POLarity NORMal Select the impedance for the external pulse modulation trigger input SOURce PULM TRIGger EXTernal IMPedance G10K EEE EEE EEE ck ck ck ck ck ck ck 2 2 2 2 2 ck 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 ck ck 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 XX Configure the pulse generator settings ck ck ck ck KK KKK KKK KKK KK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KK KK KK KK KKK KK ko TA ck A TH ko sk ko AH ko A KH ko ko ko ko Set pulse period SOURce Set SOURce Set SOURce Set SOURce ULM PERiod 10 us ulse width ULM WIDth 8 us ouble pulse width ULM DOUBle WIDTh 0 0000012 ouble pulse delay ULM DOUBle DELay 0 0000045 nm Om GO mm mg ck
255. ngs are indicated in the description of commands The command is equivalent to SYSTem PRESet Usage Setting only SAV lt Number gt Save Stores the current instrument settings under the specified number in an intermediate memory The settings can be recalled using the command RCL with the associated number To transfer the stored instrument settings in a file use the command MMEMory STORE STATS SRE lt Contents gt Service request enable Common Commands Sets the service request enable register to the indicated value This command deter mines under which conditions a service request is triggered Parameters lt Contents gt Contents of the service request enable register in decimal form Bit 6 MSS mask bit is always 0 Range 0 to 255 STB Status byte query Reads the contents of the status byte in decimal form Usage Query only TRG Trigger Triggers all actions waiting for a trigger event In particular TRG generates a manual trigger signal This common command complements the commands of the TRIGger subsystem Usage Event TST Self test query Initiates self tests of the instrument and returns an error code in decimal form see Ser vice Manual supplied with the instrument 0 indicates no errors occured Usage Query only WAI Wait to continue Prevents servicing of the subsequent commands until all preceding commands have been executed and all signals have settled
256. nication is port 5025 See also chapter 10 1 2 4 Socket Communication on page 130 Example e Instrument has the IP address 10 113 11 91 the valid resource string using VXI 11 protocol is TCPIP 10 113 11 912 2INSTR e The DNS host name name is rssgs100a100021 the valid resource string is TCPIP rssgs100a100021 hislipO0 HiSLIP TCPIP rssgs100a100021 inst0 VXI 11 e Araw socket connection can be established using TCBPIP 10 113 11 91 25025 50CKET 10 1 2 2 HiSLIP Protocol The HiSLIP High Speed LAN Instrument Protocol is the successor protocol for VXI 11 for TCP based instruments specified by the IVI foundation The protocol uses two TCP sockets for a single connection one for fast data transfer the other for non sequential control commands e g Device Clear or SRO HiSLIP has the following characteristics e High performance as with raw socket network connections e Compatible IEEE 488 2 support for Message Exchange Protocol Device Clear Serial Poll Remote Local Trigger and Service Request e Uses a single IANA registered port 4880 which simplifies the configuration of fire walls e Supports simultaneous access of multiple users by providing versatile locking mechanisms e Usable for IPv6 or IPv4 networks Remote Control Interfaces and Protocols d Note that HiSLIP data is sent to the device using the fire and forget method with immediate return as opposed to VXI 11 where each ope
257. not support hot plugging Using the PCle interface for remote control of the instrument requires extended knowl edge Refer to chapter 10 3 Advanced Remote Control Using PCle on page 134 for detailed information 2 3 4 Connecting a Controller or an USB Device via USB The USB interface on the rear panel of the R amp S SGS allows you to connect either an USB device or use the R amp S SGS as a device and connect it to a controller Connecting a controller host PC or compatible signal generator If you connect a controller host PC or compatible signal generator to the R amp S SGS the R amp S SGS acts as an USB device To connect the controller to the USB interface of the R amp S SGS always connect the USB Type Micro B connector to the R amp S SGS Refer to the documentation of the con troller to find out which USB connector type you can connect to the controller The figure 2 1 illustrates schematically the required connector type to emphasize on the different connector shape Fig 2 1 USB Type Micro B connectors Connecting an External PC and Devices An external PC with installed R amp S SGMA GUI is required for manual operation of the R amp S SGS On the remote PC perform the steps as described in chapter 2 3 2 3 Automatically adding instruments to the SGMA GUI on page 23 Connecting an USB device If you connect an USB device Memory stick CD ROM an instrument to the R amp S SGS the R amp S SGS acts as a host
258. ns below the menu selection line The dialogs are built using elements e g selection lists check boxes and entry fields A blue frame indicates that the selected item is active In a highlighted element entries can be made Table 6 1 Content of the operating menu File Setup Help 8 New Instruments About Open Software Contents Save Reset SGMA GUI Index 6 1 1 Operating Menu and Toolbar File Setup Help El Save as Exit Shut down instruments and exit File Menu The R amp S SGMA GUI employs the standard Save Recall file management function and allows you to store and reload settings in to a file with a user defined name and loca tion see also chapter 6 4 1 Storing and Loading Settings on page 57 In the following the File menu of the R amp S SGMA GUI is described in detail It incor porates standard functions New Resets R amp S SGMA GUI and all connected instruments to their preset settings Open Opens the standard file open browser for loading a saved R amp S SGMA GUI file savrcl The file contains the user specific settings of a session such as instru ments configured in the software etc The complete settings of a session can be saved and loaded Only files of this type are selectable Note Instrument specific settings e g frequency and level settings are stored locally on the particular instrument itself These instruments settings are save
259. nsition lt Ptransition gt Sets the bits of the PTRansition part of the STATus OPERation register If a bit is set a transition from 0 to 1 in the condition part causes an entry to be made in the EVENt part of the register A new event in the hardware is thus registered for example the start of an adjustment Parameters lt Ptransition gt string Example STAT OPER PTR 32767 all transitions from 0 to 1 in the condition part of the Status Oper ation register cause an entry to be made in the EVENt part STATus PRESet lt Preset gt Resets the status registers All PTRansition parts are set to FFFFh 32767 i e all transitions from 0 to 1 are detected All NTRansition parts are set to 0 i e a transition from 1 to 0 in a CONDition bit is not detected The ENABle parts of STATus OPERa tion and STATus QUEStionable are set to O i e all events in these registers are not passed on Parameters lt Preset gt string STATus Subsystem Example STAT PRES resets the status registers STATus QUEStionable CONDition lt Condition gt Queries the content of the CONDition part ofthe STATus QUEStionable register This part contains information on the action currently being performed in the instrument The content is not deleted after being read out since it indicates the current hardware status Parameters lt Condition gt string Example STATus QUEStionable CONDition queries the Status Questionable Condition reg
260. nstructions also contain information on operating condi tions that will prevent damage to the instrument The instrument s data sheet may con tain additional operating conditions Risk of electrostatic discharge ESD Electrostatic discharge ESD can cause damage to the electronic components of the instrument and the device under test DUT ESD is most likely to occur when you con nect or disconnect a DUT or test fixture to the instrument s test ports To prevent ESD use a wrist strap and cord and connect yourself to the ground or use a conductive floor mat and heel strap combination For details refer to the safety instructions delivered in electronic format on the docu mentation CD ROM Putting into Operation 2 1 1 2 1 2 Risk of instrument damage during operation An unsuitable operating site or test setup can cause damage to the instrument and to connected devices Ensure the following operating conditions before you switch on the instrument e All fan openings are unobstructed and the airflow perforations are unimpeded The minimum distance from the wall is 10 cm e The instrument is dry and shows no sign of condensation e The instrument is positioned as described in the following sections e The ambient temperature does not exceed the range specified in the data sheet e Signal levels at the input connectors are all within the specified ranges e Signal outputs are correctly connected and are not overloaded
261. nstrument gt Setup gt Internal Adjustments dia log to access the dialog for performing and configuring the adjustments settings A maximum level accuracy can be obtained for instance e Selftest A selftest is provided for service purposes SGMA GUI gt Instrument gt Diagnostic Test gt Self Test Default Settings When the instrument is switched on it is not the preset state that is active but rather the instrument state that was set before the instrument was switched off It is recom mended that you use the SGMA GUI gt Instrument gt Preset function to return the instrument to its defined preset state every time a new configuration is required or the current setup is no longer relevant Linux Operating System The R amp S SGS offers a two stage preset concept e Preset the instrument to a predefined state The SGMA GUI gt Instrument Name gt Preset function calls up a defined instru ment setup All parameters and switching states are preset also those of inactive operating modes The default instrument settings provide a reproducible initial basis for all other settings However functions that concern the integration of the instrument into a measurement setup are not changed e Preset the instrument to its factory settings The instrument can also be forced to load its default factory settings To access the corresponding dialog box select the SGMA GUI gt Instrument Name gt Setup gt Factory Preset func
262. nstrument are rounded up or down The man tissa may comprise up to 255 characters the exponent must lie inside the value range 32000 to 32000 The exponent is introduced by an E or e Entry ofthe exponent alone is not allowed In the case of physical quantities the unit can be entered Allowed unit prefixes are G giga MA mega MOHM and MHZ are also allowed K kilo M milli U micro and N nano If the unit is missing the basic unit is used Example SENS FREQ STOP 1 5GHz SENS FREQ STOP 1 5E9 Units For physical quantities the unit can be entered Allowed unit prefixes are e G giga e MA mega MOHM MHZ e K kilo M milli e U micro N nano If the unit is missing the basic unit is used Example SENSe FREQ STOP 1 5GHz SENSe FREQ STOP 1 5E9 Some settings allow relative values to be stated in percent According to SCPI this unit is represented by the PCT string Example HCOP PAGE SCAL 90PCT Special numeric values The texts listed below are interpreted as special numeric values In the case of a query the numeric value is provided e MIN MAX MINimum and MAXimum denote the minimum and maximum value e DEF DEFault denotes a preset value which has been stored in the EPROM This value conforms to the default setting as it is called by the RST command e UP DOWN UP DOWN increases or reduces the numeric value by one step The step width
263. nt is indicated as locked The two functions Exclusive Access and monitoring are mutually exclusive The Exclusive Access must be disabled to remote control or monitor the instrument form another external PC see chapter 10 5 Using the R amp S SGMA GUI to Monitor the Remote Control Operation on page 141 Working with R amp S SGMA GUI 6 4 3 Finding Out the Default Hostname of the Instrument The default hostname of the instrument is a non case sensitive string built as follows hostname lt instrument name gt lt serial number gt where lt serial number gt is the individual serial number of the instrument lt instrument name gt is the complete name of the instrument written without spaces How to query the hostname of the instrument 1 Find the individual serial number on rear of the instrument e g 100021 2 Build the default hostname For the R amp S SGS with serial number 100021 the default hostname is rssgs100a100021 For instructions on how to change the default hostname refer to chapter 9 10 How to Use Computer Names on page 120 6 4 4 Bidirectional Instrument Identification In practice instruments are integrated into a large network or placed in racks together with several other instruments of the same kind It might be difficult then to find out which of the instruments configured in the R amp S SGMA GUI corresponds to which physical instrument or to localize all instruments operated by the current
264. nual on CD ROM supplied with the instrument SCPI command TEST KEYBoard STATe on page 220 External Adjustments 8 14 External Adjustments gt To access this dialog select SGMA GUI gt Instrument Name gt Service gt External Adjustments Depending on the installed options the R amp S SGS is equipped with a TCXO or OCXO reference oscillator The reference oscillator is factory calibrated to a specific calibra tion value The external adjustment dialog allows you to select a different custom cali bration value Active Adjustment Data Selects whether the factory provided or a custom defined calibration value is used to adjust the reference oscillator Remote command CALibration lt hw gt ROSCillator DATA MODE on page 162 Calibration Value Sets a user definable calibration value The permanent storage of this value in the instrument s memory is a password protec ted function The exact test procedure is described in the Service Manual on CD ROM supplied with the instrument This parameter is restored to its permanently stored value by Preset and instrument restart Remote command CALibration lt hw gt ROSCillator DATA on page 162 How to Generate an IO Modulated Signal 9 Performing Configuration Tasks This section provides a general explanation on how to operate the instrument manually via the R amp S SGMA GUI software We assume that the R amp S SGS is connected to a remo
265. o el desmontaje del producto debe tenerse en cuenta imprescindiblemente el cap tulo Eliminaci n protecci n del medio ambiente punto 1 Ciertos productos como p ej las instalaciones de radiocomunicaci n RF pueden a causa de su funci n natural emitir una radiaci n electromagn tica aumentada Deben tomarse todas las medidas necesarias para la protecci n de las mujeres embarazadas Tambi n las personas con marcapasos pueden correr peligro a causa de la radiaci n electromagn tica El empresario operador tiene la obligaci n de evaluar y se alizar las reas de trabajo en las que exista un riesgo elevado de exposici n a radiaciones Tenga en cuenta que en caso de incendio pueden desprenderse del producto sustancias t xicas gases l quidos etc que pueden generar da os a la salud Por eso en caso de incendio deben usarse medidas adecuadas como p ej m scaras antig s e indumentaria de protecci n Los productos con l ser est n provistos de indicaciones de advertencia normalizadas en funci n de la clase de l ser del que se trate Los rayos l ser pueden provocar da os de tipo biol gico a causa de las propiedades de su radiaci n y debido a su concentraci n extrema de potencia electromagn tica En caso de que un producto Rohde amp Schwarz contenga un producto l ser p ej un lector de CD DVD no debe usarse ninguna otra configuraci n o funci n aparte de las descritas en la documentaci n del producto a fin de evitar
266. o the instruments list and to the main panel of the R amp S SGMA GUI software File Setup Help a s ua SGs 100004 Freg 1 000 000 000 000 SGU 100014 Freq 1 000 000 000 000 GHz RE Mad veo 10 20 om Lava 10 010 Bi on BE Mod TER om Loe 100920 E SGS 100004 SGS I SGU 100014 SGU PES em 0 Note If you connect the instruments to the company network for the first time this process may take several minutes Setups for Connecting an R amp S SGS and an R amp S SGU 5 Inthe R amp S SGMA GUI main panel the green indicator in front of the instrument s name confirms that there is a connection between the instrument and the remote PC and that the instrument is recognized by the software 6 Select SGMA GUI main panel gt R amp S SGS gt Extension The Extension dialog opens Tip Instrument doesn t appear in the extension dialog Ifthe R amp S SGU is not auto matically shown in this dialog press Scan gt Start to find the instrument 7 Select the R amp S SGU from the list and set Available Instruments gt Select gt On to enable it as an extension A green status indicator Connected indicates the successfully established remote connection between the R amp S SGS ant the R amp S SGU The R amp S SGMA GUI indicates the extended frequency range of the R amp S SGS and the activated extension mode File Setup Help a s u
267. odulation Signal Waveforms on page 75 Remote command SOURce lt hw gt PULM PERiod on page 199 Pulse Width Sets the pulse duration of the generated pulse signal see Pulse Modulation Signal Waveforms on page 75 Remote command SOURce lt hw gt PULM WIDTh on page 201 Double Pulse Width Sets the width of the second pulse see figure 7 2 Remote command SOURce lt hw gt PULM DOUBle WIDTh on page 198 Pulse Delay Sets the pulse delay The pulse delay determines the time that elapses after a trigger event before pulse modulation starts see figure 7 1 The pulse delay is not effective for double pulse generation Remote command SOURce lt hw gt PULM DELay on page 198 Double Pulse Delay Sets the delay between the start of the first pulse and the start of the second pulse see figure 7 2 Remote command SOURce lt hw gt PULM DOUBl1e DELay on page 198 Pulse Modulation 7 6 3 Pulse Connector Trigger Settings gt To access the pulse connector trigger settings select SGMA GUI gt Instrument Name gt Pulse Modulation gt Connector Trigger j Comprises the settings necessary to configure the signal at the multi purpose TRIG connector in the external trigger mode Trigger Connector Mode Determines the signal at the input output of the multi purpose TRIG connector Signal Valid Output of high signal to mark valid frequency and level settings Not Signal Valid
268. odulator at Current Frequency Starts the adjustment for the UO modulator for the currently set frequency The l Q modulator is adjusted with respect to carrier leakage UO imbalance and quadrature The adjustment is only possible when RF gt ON and I Q Mod gt State gt ON Adjustment for only the set frequency is considerably faster than adjustment across the entire frequency range An adjustment of the entire range is possible with the UO Mod ulator button of this dialog Remote command CALibration IQModulator LOCal on page 161 Synthesis Performs all adjustments which affect the frequency Remote command CALibration FREQuency MEASure on page 160 Level Performs all adjustments which affect the level The acquired correction values improve the settling time and the signal quality Remote command CALibration LEVel MEASure on page 161 Hardware Configuration UO Modulator Starts the adjustment for the UO modulator for the entire frequency range The UO modulator is adjusted with respect to carrier leakage UO imbalance and quadrature Remote command CALibration IQModulator FULL on page 160 Delta Temperature Displays the difference between the current temperature and the temperature by the last performed adjustment Note Adjustment is recommended if the temperature range in which the instrument is operated changes prior to all applications which require maximum level and frequency accuracy or af
269. of a SCPI register If a bit is set in the ESE and the associated bit in the ESR changes from 0 to 1 the ESB bit in the STB is set The ESE register can be set using the command ESE and read using the command ESE Table 14 3 Meaning of the bits used in the event status register Bit No Meaning 0 Operation Complete This bit is set on receipt of the command OPC exactly when all previous commands have been executed 1 Not used 2 Query Error This bit is set if either the controller wants to read data from the instrument without having sent a query or if it does not fetch requested data and sends new instructions to the instrument instead The cause is often a query which is faulty and hence cannot be executed 3 Device dependent Error This bit is set if a device dependent error occurs An error message with a number between 300 and 399 or a positive error number which denotes the error in greater detail is entered into the error queue 4 Execution Error This bit is set if a received command is syntactically correct but cannot be performed for other reasons An error message with a number between 200 and 300 which denotes the error in greater detail is entered into the error queue 5 Command Error This bit is set if a command is received which is undefined or syntactically incorrect An error message with a number between 100 and 200 which denotes the error in greater
270. of the direc tory for user defined data The opt directory is a protected and therefore a not accessible system directory The files on this directory contain data that must not be changed Therefore this directory should not be accessed since reconstruction of the system partition will lead to data loss File Naming Conventions To enable files in different file systems to be used the following file naming conven tions should be observed The file name can be of any length and is case sensitive meaning it is distinguished between uppercase and lowercase letters The file and the optional file extension are separated by a dot All letters and numbers are permitted numbers are however not permitted at the beginning of the file name If possible special characters should not be used The use of the slashes and should be avoided since they are used in file paths A number of names are reserved for the operating system e g CLOCK CON AUX COM1 COMA LPT1 LPT3 NUL and PRN In the R amp S SGS all files in which lists and settings are stored are given a characteristic extension The extension is separated from the actual file name by a dot see chap ter 11 10 2 Extensions for User Files on page 170 for an overview of the file types mn The two characters and function as wildcards meaning they are used for selecting several files The character represents exactly one character while the character
271. of the suppor ted web browsers has to be available 1 Check the front panel of the R amp S SGS The POWER ON STAND BY and the LAN key have to be green 2 Open a supported webbrowser 3 Enter the instrument name or the IP address of the R amp S SGS you want to connect to Tip The default hostname of the instrument is a non case sensitive string built as follows hostname rssgs100a lt serial number where lt serial number gt is the individual serial number of the instrument R amp S SGS100A First steps with the Instrument The serial number can be found ar the rear side of the instrument It is the third part ofthe device ID printed on the bar code sticker see figure 4 2 RN WEE MERITI Serial Number Fig 4 2 Serial number of the R amp S SGS100A The main panel of the R amp S SGS100A Web GUI opens System Status OK Device rssgs100a100001 Update ON O Frequency 1 000000000000 der RF OFF E REF 0 Internal External Level 10 00 dBm e Modulation OFF PEP 10 00 dBm Frequency Phase Reference Oscillator Frequency 1 000000000000 GHz Level VQ Settings Local Oscillator LO Coupling Connector Source lint y Preset REF LO Output OFF Y In the R amp S SGS100A Web GUI main panel the green indicator System Status gt OK confirms that there is a connection between the instrument and the remote PC and that
272. oller It is important to ensure that the intermediate memory on the controller is large enough to take the file The setting for the GPIB bus terminator is irrelevant Tip Use this command to read transfer stored instrument settings or waveforms directly from to the instrument Parameters lt BinaryBlock gt lt number gt lt length_entry gt lt data gt Hash sign always comes first in the binary block lt number gt the first digit indicates how many digits the subse quent length entry has lt length_entry gt indicates the number of subsequent bytes lt data gt binary block data for the specified length For files with a size with more than 9 digits Gigabytes the instrument allows the syntax lt Length gt where Length is the file size in decimal format MMEMory Subsystem Parameters for setting and query lt Filename gt string String parameter to specify the name of the file Example MMEMory DATA var sgs test txt 15hallo Writes the block data to the file test txt The digit 1 indicates a length entry of 1 digit the digit 5 indicate a length of the binary data hallo in bytes MMEMory DATA var sgs test txt sends the data of the file test txt from the instrument to the controller in the form of a binary block Response 15hallo Usage SCPI confirmed MMEMory DCATalog lt path gt Returns the subdirectories of a particular directory Query parameters lt path gt String paramet
273. ollow the instructions in the service manual and the safety instructions when exchanging modules or ordering spare parts The order number for spare parts is inclu ded in the service manual The service manual includes further information particularly on troubleshooting repair exchange of modules including battery exchange adjust ment of the OCXO oscillator and alignment The address of our support center and a list of all Rohde amp Schwarz service centers can be found at the beginning of this manual Cleaning The outside of the instrument can be cleaned sufficiently using a soft lint free dust cloth Make sure that the fan openings are not obstructed Shock hazard Before cleaning the instrument make sure that the instrument is switched off and dis connected from all power supplies Instrument damage caused by cleaning agents Cleaning agents contain substances that may damage the instrument For example cleaning agents that contain a solvent may damage the front panel labeling plastic parts or the display Never use cleaning agents such as solvents thinners acetone etc acids bases or other substances The outside of the instrument can be cleaned sufficiently using a soft lint free dust cloth Storing and Packing Risk of instrument damage due to obstructed fans If the instrument is operated in dusty areas the fans may become obstructed by dust or other particles in the process of time Make sure to chec
274. ommon the command line can be abbreviated To this end the second command after the semicolon starts with the level that lies below the common levels The colon following the semicolon must be omitted in this case Example HCOP ITEM ALL HCOP IMM This command line contains two commands Both commands are part of the HCOP command system i e they have one level in common When abbreviating the command line the second command begins with the level below HCOP The colon after the semicolon is omitted The abbreviated form of the command line reads as follows HCOP ITEM ALL IMM A new command line always begins with the complete path Example HCOP ITEM ALL HCOP IMM Responses to Queries A query is defined for each setting command unless explicitly specified otherwise It is formed by adding a question mark to the associated setting command According to SCPI the responses to queries are partly subject to stricter rules than in standard IEEE 488 2 e The requested parameter is transmitted without a header Example HCOP PAGE ORI Response LAND e Maximum values minimum values and all other quantities that are requested via a special text parameter are returned as numeric values Example SENSe FREQuency STOP MAX Response 3 559 Remote Control Basics Numeric values are output without a unit Physical quantities are referred to the basic units or to the units set using the Unit command The re
275. on dans le c ble ou dans le produit lui m me est interdite Elle entraine un risque de choc lectrique au niveau du produit En cas d utilisation de c bles prolongateurs ou de multiprises ceux ci doivent tre examin s r guli rement quant leur tat de s curit technique Si le produit n est pas dot d un interrupteur d alimentation pour le couper du r seau lectrique ou si l interrupteur d alimentation disponible n est pas appropri pour couper le produit du r seau lectrique le connecteur m le du c ble de raccordement est consid rer comme dispositif de s paration Le dispositif de s paration doit tre tout moment facilement accessible Si par exemple le connecteur d alimentation sert de dispositif de s paration la longueur du c ble de raccordement ne doit pas d passer 3 m Les commutateurs fonctionnels ou lectroniques ne sont pas appropri s pour couper l appareil du r seau lectrique Si des produits sans interrupteur d alimentation sont int gr s dans des b tis ou syst mes le dispositif de s paration doit tre report au niveau du syst me Ne jamais utiliser le produit si le c ble d alimentation est endommag V rifier r guli rement le parfait tat du c ble d alimentation Prendre les mesures pr ventives appropri es et opter pour des types de pose tels que le c ble d alimentation ne puisse pas tre endommag et que personne ne puisse subir de pr judice par exemple en tr buchant sur l
276. on separates the mnemonics of a command In a command line the separating semico lon marks the uppermost command level The semicolon separates two commands of a command line It does not alter the path 5 The comma separates several parameters of a command The question mark forms a query The asterisk marks a common command Quotation marks introduce a string and terminate it both single and double quotation marks are possible The hash symbol introduces binary octal hexadecimal and block data e Binary B10110 e Octal 07612 e Hexa HF3A7 e Block 21312 A white space ASCIl Code 0 to 9 11 to 32 decimal e g blank separates the header from the parameters 14 1 3 5 Structure of a command line A command line may consist of one or several commands It is terminated by one of the following 14 1 3 6 Remote Control Basics e a lt New Line e a lt New Line gt with EOI e an EOI together with the last data byte Several commands in a command line must be separated by a semicolon If the next command belongs to a different command system the semicolon is followed by a colon Example MMEM COPY Testi MeasurementXY HCOP ITEM ALL This command line contains two commands The first command belongs to the MMEM system the second command belongs to the HCOP system If the successive commands belong to the same system having one or several levels in c
277. onnectors and transferred to the I Q modulator Before the signal is fed into the I Q modulator the signal can be impaired Impairment at this point along the signal flow is provided for error correction of the supplied signal or for enabling dedicated impairments Impairments caused by the UO modulator are automatically corrected by the Internal Adjustments function ments The correction routine should be called in the case of temperature fluctuations of several degrees To call the routine select SGMA GUI gt Instrument Name gt Setup gt Internal Adjustment and execute the desired adjustment procedure E System error correction of the UO modulator permits precise and repeatable measure 7 8 1 1 Q Impairments Signal impairments are well defined arithmetic modifications of the data Every data sample is modified in the same way The purpose of adding impairments to the data stream is to simulate frequent sources of distortions in a real signal processing chain in order to generate a test signal with dirty transmitter conditions 7 8 1 1 Gain and Gain Imbalance An UO gain is a multiplication of all UO amplitudes by a common factor The effect is equivalent to two identical and Q gain factors The effect of an increased gain factor in the UO constellation diagram is shown below 7 8 1 2 IO Modulation and Signal Impairment Fig 7 3 Effect of an increased amplitude in the UO constellation diagram An I gain multiplies th
278. or Rohde amp Schwarz Si se reponen partes con importancia para los aspectos de seguridad p ej el enchufe los transformadores o los fusibles solamente podr n ser sustituidos por partes originales Despu s de cada cambio de partes relevantes para la seguridad deber realizarse un control de seguridad control a primera vista control del conductor de protecci n medici n de resistencia de aislamiento medici n de la corriente de fuga control de funcionamiento Con esto queda garantizada la seguridad del producto Baterias y acumuladores o celdas Si no se siguen o se siguen de modo insuficiente las indicaciones en cuanto a las baterias y acumuladores o celdas pueden producirse explosiones incendios y o lesiones graves con posible consecuencia de muerte El manejo de baterias y acumuladores con electrolitos alcalinos p ej celdas de litio debe seguir el estandar EN 62133 1 2 No deben desmontarse abrirse ni triturarse las celdas Las celdas o baterias no deben someterse a calor ni fuego Debe evitarse el almacenamiento a la luz directa del sol Las celdas y baterias deben mantenerse limpias y secas Limpiar las conexiones sucias con un pano seco y limpio Las celdas o baterias no deben cortocircuitarse Es peligroso almacenar las celdas o baterias en estuches o cajones en cuyo interior puedan cortocircuitarse por contacto rec proco o por contacto con otros materiales conductores No deben extraerse las celdas o bater as
279. oss dant les comp tences requises Si pour l utilisation des produits Rohde amp Schwarz l emploi d un quipement personnel de protection s av re n cessaire il en est fait mention dans la documentation produit l emplacement correspondant Conservez les consignes de s curit fondamentales et la documentation produit dans un lieu s r et transmettez ces documents aux autres utilisateurs du produit La stricte observation des consignes de s curit a pour but d exclure des blessures ou dommages caus s par des dangers de toutes sortes A cet effet il est n cessaire de lire avec soin et de bien comprendre les consignes de s curit ci dessous avant l utilisation du produit et de les respecter lors de l utilisation du produit Toutes les autres consignes de s curit pr sent es l emplacement correspondant de la documentation produit par exemple celles concernant la protection des personnes doivent galement tre imp rativement respect es Dans les pr sentes consignes de s curit toutes les marchandises commercialis es par le groupe Rohde amp Schwarz notamment les appareils les syst mes ainsi que les accessoires sont d nomm s produit 1171 0000 43 08 Page 1 Consignes de s curit fondamentales Symboles et marquages de s curit Signification Symbole Signification Avis source g n rale de danger Se r f rer la documentation produit MARCHE ARRET tension d alimenta
280. ou develop an allergic reaction such as a skin rash frequent sneezing red eyes or respiratory difficulties when using a Rohde amp Schwarz product consult a physician immediately to determine the cause and to prevent health problems or stress 4 Before you start processing the product mechanically and or thermally or before you take it apart be sure to read and pay special attention to the section titled Waste disposal Environmental protection item 1 5 Depending on the function certain products such as RF radio equipment can produce an elevated level of electromagnetic radiation Considering that unborn babies require increased protection pregnant women must be protected by appropriate measures Persons with pacemakers may also be exposed to risks from electromagnetic radiation The employer operator must evaluate workplaces where there is a special risk of exposure to radiation and if necessary take measures to avert the potential danger 6 Should a fire occur the product may release hazardous substances gases fluids etc that can cause health problems Therefore suitable measures must be taken e g protective masks and protective clothing must be worn 7 Laser products are given warning labels that are standardized according to their laser class Lasers can cause biological harm due to the properties of their radiation and due to their extremely concentrated electromagnetic power If a laser product e g a CD DVD drive
281. ould be queried regularly since faulty commands from the controller to the instrument are recorded there as well Telnet program examples The following program example shows a simple TcpClient class that is intended to explain on how to get started with programming of sockets The example sets up a socket communication to R amp S SGS and opens a simple user interface very similar to the telnet which allows input of commands To enable real automation further development of the program is required TcpClient h include lt string gt defines structs for socket handling include lt netinet in h gt using namespace std typedef struct sockaddr in SockAddrStruct typedef struct hostent HostInfoStruct class TcpClient public TcpClient TcpClient void connectToServer string amp hostname int port void disconnect void transmit string amp txString void receive string amp rxString string getCurrentHostName const int getCurrentPort const private string currentHostName int currentPort int currentSocketDescr SockAddrStruct serverAddress HostInfoStruct currentHostInfo bool clientIsConnected int receiveBufferSize Telnet program examples TcpClient cpp finclude lt string gt defines structs for socket handling include lt netinet in h gt using namespace std typedef struct sockaddr_in SockAddrStruct typedef struct hostent HostInfoStruct class TcpClient public
282. ource Strings rene errare ra e koe te dca ENEA ENANA AEAEE aaa 128 ISLIP Protocol e ne AA 129 VAI 11 PROLOCOM E 130 User Manual 1173 9105 02 10 6 10 1 2 4 10 1 3 10 1 4 10 2 10 2 1 10 2 2 10 3 10 3 1 10 3 2 10 3 2 1 10 3 2 2 10 3 2 3 10 3 3 10 3 4 10 4 10 4 1 10 4 2 10 4 3 10 5 11 11 1 11 1 1 11 1 2 11 1 3 11 1 4 11 1 5 11 1 6 11 2 11 3 11 4 11 5 11 6 11 7 Socket COMMUNICATION coincida ld datan 130 USB Mincir aa 130 PCI Express Interface recette ai aa 131 Starting a Remote Control Session eese 132 How to Find the VISA Resource String 132 Example Remote Control over LAN using Socket Communication 133 Advanced Remote Control Using PCle sens 134 Setting Up a Remote Control Connection via PCIe 134 Configuring he Heute EE 135 Building and Installing the Hardware Driver nennen nn 135 Making Shared Libraries Accessible 136 Building A Program id EE eiU A ENSEN 136 Connecting the Controller and the Instrument een 137 Enabling East Settings Ieri eir ea 138 Advanced Remote Control Using Fast Socket 139 Setting Up a Remote Control Connection via Fast Gocket rennene 139 Installing the Protocol Driver 140 Enabling Fast Settings ea 140 Using the R amp S SGMA GUI to Monitor the Remote Control Operation 141 Remote Control Commands
283. pas utiliser de r glages ou fonctions autres que ceux d crits dans la documentation produit pour viter tout dommage corporel par exemple caus par rayon laser Classes CEM selon EN 55011 CISPR 11 selon EN 55022 CISPR 22 EN 55032 CISPR 32 par analogie A Appareil de la classe A Appareil appropri un usage dans tous les environnements autres que l environnement r sidentiel et les environnements raccord s directement un r seau d alimentation basse tension qui alimente des b timents r sidentiels Remarque ces appareils peuvent provoquer des perturbations radio lectriques dans l environnement r sidentiel en raison de perturbations conduites ou rayonn es Dans ce cas on peut exiger que l exploitant mette en oeuvre de mesures appropri es pour liminer ces perturbations A Appareil de la classe B Appareil appropri un usage dans l environnement r sidentiel ainsi que dans les environnements raccord s directement un r seau d alimentation basse tension qui alimente des b timents r sidentiels R paration et service apr s vente 1 Le produit ne doit tre ouvert que par un personnel qualifi et autoris Avant de travailler sur le produit ou de l ouvrir il faut le couper de la tension d alimentation sinon il y a risque de choc lectrique Les travaux d ajustement le remplacement des pi ces la maintenance et la r paration ne doivent tre effectu s que par des lectroniciens qualifi
284. phical user interface ele All names of graphical user interface elements on the screen such as ments dialog boxes menus options buttons and softkeys are enclosed by quotation marks KEYS Key names are written in capital letters File names commands File names commands coding samples and screen output are distin program code guished by their font Input Input to be entered by the user is displayed in italics Typographical Conventions Convention Description Links Links that you can click are displayed in blue font References References to other parts of the documentation are enclosed by quota tion marks Putting into Operation 2 Preparing for Use Gedeelt ee TEE 14 e Linux Operating Systemische 20 e Connecting an External PC and Devices 20 2 1 Putting into Operation This section describes the basic steps to be taken when setting up the R amp S SGS for the first time Risk of injury and instrument damage The instrument must be used in an appropriate manner to prevent electric shock fire personal injury or damage e Do not open the instrument casing e Read and observe the Basic Safety Instructions at the beginning of this manual or on the documentation CD ROM in addition to the safety instructions in the follow ing sections Notice that the data sheet may specify additional operating condi tions Risk of instrument damage Note that the general safety i
285. pliance can result in personal injury or material damage If you use the product in a vehicle it is the sole responsibility of the driver to drive the vehicle safely and properly The manufacturer assumes no responsibility for accidents or collisions Never use the product in a moving vehicle if doing so could distract the driver of the vehicle Adequately secure the product in the vehicle to prevent injuries or other damage in the event of an accident 1171 0000 42 08 Page 6 Instrucciones de seguridad elementales Waste disposal Environmental protection 1 Specially marked equipment has a battery or accumulator that must not be disposed of with unsorted municipal waste but must be collected separately It may only be disposed of at a suitable collection point or via a Rohde amp Schwarz customer service center 2 Waste electrical and electronic equipment must not be disposed of with unsorted municipal waste but must be collected separately Rohde amp Schwarz GmbH amp Co KG has developed a disposal concept and takes full responsibility for take back obligations and disposal obligations for manufacturers within the EU Contact your Rohde amp Schwarz customer service center for environmentally responsible disposal of the product 3 If products or their components are mechanically and or thermally processed in a manner that goes beyond their intended use hazardous substances heavy metal dust such as lead beryllium nickel may be
286. pported interfaces LAN USB or PCle USB PCle LAN e g VXI 11 Controller Fig 5 2 Configuration example remote control from a controller For information about remote control refer to e chapter 10 Network and Remote Control Operation on page 124 e chapter 14 1 Remote Control Basics on page 231 5 1 3 Control of an R amp S SGS from an R amp S Signal Generator The R amp S SGS can be used as an additional signal source to increase the number of available RF outputs of a R amp S Signal Generator In this setup a controller does not need to access the R amp S SGS directly Instead the signal generator acts as a controller to the R amp S SGS and depending on the required output signal parameters performs all required settings automatically The figure 5 3 shows a configuration example of the R amp S SGS directly controlled by a R amp S SMW Fig 5 3 Configuration example Control from a R amp S SMW Setups for Connecting an R amp S SGS and an R amp S SGU 5 2 Setups for Connecting an R amp S SGS and an R amp S SGU If an R amp S SGU is connected to an R amp S SGS the R amp S SGU acts as an extension to the R amp S SGS extending its frequency range In this setup a controller does not need to access the R amp S SGU directly Instead the R amp S SGS acts as a controller to the R amp S SGU The generator performs all required settings automatically depending on the required output signal parameters This chap
287. predefined state For information on how to adjust the quality characteristics of the RF output signal i e to optimize the quality characteristics of RF output signal like improving the harmonic distortion or improving the wideband noise refer to chapter 7 5 Level and Power On Settings on page 71 For information on how to adjust the reference oscillator e g to allow the frequency of the internal reference oscillator to be impaired for example to simulate a frequency error or to adjust the bandwidth of an external reference oscillator refer to chapter 7 4 Reference Oscillator on page 69 How to Install anew Firmware Version on the Instru ment You can update the firmware of the R amp S SGS Firmware Installation through the R amp S SGMA GUI If an update to a new firmware version is required for both the R amp S SGMA GUI and the instrument it is mandatory that the new instrument s firmware is installed prior to the update of the R amp S SGMA GUI to the new version 1 Select SGMA GUI main panel gt Instrument Name gt Setup gt Maintenance gt Oper ation gt Install firmware package 2 Press Select Package and navigate to the directory the new firmware is stored in 3 If several instruments have to be updated to new firmware version enable the fea ture Update All to accelerate the update process All instruments that are in active state and are connected to this controller are updated simultaneously 4
288. pted Level setting Suppresses level blanking at frequency and level changes This mode reduces the dynamic range of the instrument The step attenuator is fixed Strictly Monotone Provides level setting without discontinuities All electronic switches in the RF path are clamped The operation mode is useful for applica tions using level searching algorithms This mode further reduces the dynamic range of the instrument The step attenuator is also fixed Constant VSWR Suppresses output impedance variations at the RF OUT connector due to changed level setting This mode reduces the dynamic range of the instrument The step attenuator is fixed Remote command SOURce POWer SCHaracteristic on page 193 Level Sets the RF level atthe RF output connector of the selected instrument If you set a level offset it will be indicated in the R amp S SGMA GUI main panel by a change in the name of this parameter from Level to Level Offset Level EH gt I 30 10 dBm Note The SCPI command SOURce POWer LEVel 1MMediate AMPLitude sets the level of the Level display that means the level containing off set while SOURce POWer POWer sets the level at the RF output connector Remote command SOURce POWer LEVel IMMediate AMPLitude on page 194 SOURce POWer POWer on page 193 Level and Power On Settings Level Range Displays the level range within which the level setting
289. pter 11 1 6 Configuring Instruments in the R amp S SGMA GUI on page 152 Manual operation See Available Instruments on page 47 INSTruments COUNt Queries the number of the currently available instruments Return values lt Count gt float Range 0 to 12 Example See chapter 11 1 6 Configuring Instruments in the R amp S SGMA GUI on page 152 Usage Query only Manual operation See Available Instruments on page 47 INSTruments EACCess STATe lt State gt Locks the instruments meaning the instrument is reserved and can be operated exclusively from the remote PC that sent this SCPI command R amp S SGMA GUI Settings Tip It is recommended to lock the instrument prior to further configuration Parameters lt State gt List of BOOL values lt LocklInstr 1 gt lt LocklInstr 2 gt 0 1 OFF ON Example See chapter 11 1 6 Configuring Instruments in the R amp S SGMA GUI on page 152 Manual operation See Exclusive Access on page 50 INSTruments MAPPing FILE File Saves the list of the available instruments in a mapping file Mapping files are stored with the predefined file extension map the file extension may be omitted The file is saved in the default directory Use the command MMEM CDIRectory to change the default directory or specify the complete path Parameters lt File gt string Example See chapter 11 1 6 Configuring Instruments i
290. quest is refused ck ck ck ck EEE EEE 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 ck 2 ck 2 ck 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 XX Confirm that there is no extension currently enabled for the instrument Scan the network for available extension instruments and query information on the available instruments hostname IP adress serial number used remote channel select and enable an extension ck ck ck ck ck ck 0k 0k 00k 0k 0k 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 ck ck ck ck ck ck 2 ck 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 XX EX EXTension SELect 0 no extension is currently enabled EXTension INSTruments SCAN STATe 1 EXTension INSTruments SCAN STATe 1 scan process is running EXTension INSTruments SCAN STATe 0 scan finished EXTension INSTruments REMote LAN NAME rssgul00al00002 rssgul00al01010 EXTension INSTruments REMote CHANnel LAN LAN EXTension INSTruments REMote SERial 100002 101010 there are two available extensions select and enalbe the first extension rssgu100a100002 EXTension SELect 1 determines the extension all further remote control commands are related to this extension EXTension REMote STATe 1 EXTension BUSY STATe 0 extension is connected and ready for operation KEK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KE Programming Examples Send remote command
291. r on page 140 3 On the controller start the driver by using one of the following a Start the Windows console user interface as an administrator and execute the net start SGMANDISPROT command b Use a program for opening the driver An example file is provided on the Documentation CD SgsDriverDemo c 4 Start the application with administrator rights 5 Enable fast settings see chapter 10 4 3 Enabling Fast Settings on page 140 10 4 2 10 4 3 Advanced Remote Control Using Fast Socket Linux Operating Systems To set up a remote control connection vie Fast Socket for Linux operating systems perform the following steps 1 Connect the controller and the instrument see chapter 2 3 2 Connecting a Remote PC via LAN on page 22 2 Start the application as root 3 Enable fast settings see chapter 10 4 3 Enabling Fast Settings on page 140 Installing the Protocol Driver The protocol driver defines the way to communicate with the instrument via the LAN Fast Socket interface For Linux operating system no special driver is needed For Windows operating systems the SGMANDISPROT driver is required The protocol driver is installed automatically together with the installation of the R amp S SGMA GUI software It is additionally provided on the CD included in the delivery To install the driver manually on a Windows operating system 1 Open Control Panel gt Network and Sharing Center 2 Select the n
292. r Optimizing Perform ance on page 149 Manual operation See DAC Value on page 71 SOURce ROSCillator INTernal ADJust STATe lt State gt Determines whether the calibrated OFF or a user defined ON adjustment value is used for fine adjustment of the frequency With STATe ON the instrument is no longer in the calibrated state However the calibration value is not changed and the instru ment resumes the calibrated state after switching the Adjustment State to Off Parameters lt State gt 0 1 OFF ON RST Example ROSC SOUR INT selects the internal source ROSC ADJ ON activates use of a user defined adjustment value ROSC ADJ VAL 1400 sets the adjustment value to 1400 Manual operation See Adjustment Active on page 71 SOURce ROSCillator EXTernal SBANdwidth lt SBandwidth gt Sets the synchronization bandwidth for an external reference signal Parameters lt SBandwidth gt WIDE NARRow NARRow The synchronization bandwidth is 40 Hz WIDE Synchronization bandwidth is 250 Hz Example ROSC SOUR EXT selects the external source ROSC EXT FREQ 10 MHz informs the instrument that the external reference has a fre quency of 10 MHz ROSC EXT SBAN WID selects wideband setting for synchronization bandwidth Manual operation See Synchronization Bandwidth on page 70 STATus Subsystem This system contains the commands for the status reporting system See also chap ter 14 1
293. r of subdirectories in the current or specified directory perform MMEM DCAT LENG usbuser Response 2 2 To query the number of files in the current or specified directory perform MMEM CAT LENG usbuser Response 3 3 Create a new subdirectory for mass memory storage in the specified directory MMEM MDIR usbnew 4 Copy the file state to a new file MMEM COPY var sgs state savrcltxt usbnew 5 Rename the file state MMEM MOVE state savrcltxt state new savrcltxt 6 Remove the test directory MMEM RDIR usbtest 11 10 4 Remote Control Commands iIMMEMory CATalod lge ENEE dee a A acid 171 IMIMEMOnGCAT AIG LENGUA ui na en deal 172 MMEMory CDIRectany u2 nassen aaa 172 SIME MGIC OP pese th needed 173 ROT Oe NAME sere ee enden abe 173 NMEMoy DCATalog vio dE EES atomes datent eg 174 MMEMorm DCA NEIE E KE 174 NMEMONDELSte oi ii aai 175 MEMOM HF RGB taceo erret tet dao xeu debe eed ew eiue an 175 MMEMONLOAD STATE m 175 MMEMON MID IRectory c crore onere ene nee and 176 SIME MOV MOVE nein ana ale 176 NMEMONMSES een 176 IMM MORERDIRSGIQN EE 176 MMEMONSTORESTATE ona ta ie di 177 MMEMory CATalog lt path gt Returns the content of a particular directory Query parameters lt path gt string String parameter to specify the directory If you leave out the path the command returns the contents of the directory
294. r to the data sheet Return values lt Options gt The query returns a list of options The options are returned at fixed positions in a comma separated string A zero is returned for options that are not installed Usage Query only PRE lt Value gt Parallel poll register enable Sets parallel poll enable register to the indicated value The query returns the contents of the parallel poll enable register in decimal form Parameters lt Value gt Range 0 to 255 Common Commands PSC lt Action gt Power on status clear Determines whether the contents of the ENAB1e registers are preserved or reset when the instrument is switched on Thus a service request can be triggered when the instru ment is switched on if the status registers ESE and SRE are suitably configured The query reads out the contents of the power on status clear flag Parameters lt Action gt 0 1 0 The contents of the status registers are preserved 1 Resets the status registers RCL lt Number gt Recall Loads the instrument settings from an intermediate memory identified by the specified number The instrument settings can be stored to this memory using the command SAV with the associated number It also activates the instrument settings which are stored in a file and loaded using the MMEMory LOAD lt number gt lt file name extension gt command RST Reset Sets the instrument to a defined default status The default setti
295. r two different hardware interfaces User Manual 1173 9105 02 10 141 Using the R amp S SGMA GUI to Monitor the Remote Control Operation Information Monitor e g PCle Remote Control Controller Fig 10 5 Example of setup for remote control monitoring Connecting and configuring the monitoring PCs In the Setup gt Security gt Security Settings dialog check the state ofthe LAN and USB interfaces and enable them if necessary 1 Connect the monitoring PC to the instrument Note Choose the hardware interface considering the limitations described in table 10 2 2 Configure the instrument in the R amp S SGMA GUI see chapter 6 4 2 Handling Instruments in the R amp S SGMA GUI on page 58 3 In the SGMA GUI gt Setup gt Instruments gt Edit Instruments dialog disable Exclusive Access Note The two functions Exclusive Access and monitoring are mutually exclusive 4 Send remote control commands from the controller to the instrument open the cor responding dialogs in the R amp S SGMA GUI and observe the status of the parame ters Programming Examples 11 Remote Control Commands In the following all remote control commands will be presented in detail with their parameters and the ranges of numerical values For an introduction to remote control and the status registers refer to chapter 14 1 Remote Control Basics on page 231 Conventions used in SCPI Command Descriptions Note th
296. r units and the display Parameters lt Angle gt DEGRee RADian RST RADian Example UNIT ANGL DEG sets DEG as a default unit for all commands which determine angle values UNIT POWer lt Power gt Defines the default unit for power parameters This setting affects the GUI as well as all remote control commands that determine power values Parameters lt Power gt V DBUV DBM RST DBM Example UNIT POW V sets V as a default unit for all commands which determine power values R amp S SGMA GUI Settings 11 24 R amp S SGMA GUI Settings This section comprises the SCPI commands provided to remote control the R amp S SGMA GUI JNSfrumentsACThvel STATel iii 221 al Lage Hie ale 221 INSTruments EACGess STATE 24a lan 221 INSTruments MAPP NO FIRE 00 kenne 222 INSTFUMENTSINAME c00cc se0eeccesedaceseceetenecenssenncouncecadectsasedsoedereesanerscasttaessceetaoes 222 INSTruments REMote CHANnel u erahnen 222 INSTruments REMote NAME isi ssnntisss isst ii sisse si sessi sani ias 223 HEN ein SCAN ME 223 JTNSTF ments SCANIHNEPRDBX une a anus 223 el Lage EE 223 INS Truments TYPE coco dada 224 INSTruments ACTive STATe lt State gt Enables disables the instrument for the R amp S SGMA GUI The main panel of this soft ware displays only activated instruments Parameters lt State gt List of BOOL values lt Statelnstr 1 gt lt Statelnstr 2 gt 0 1 ON OFF Example See cha
297. ration is blocked until a VXI 11 device handshake returns Thus a successful return of a VISA operation such as viWrite does not guarantee that the instrument has finished or started the requested command but is delivered to the TCP IP buffers 10 1 2 3 10 1 2 4 10 1 3 For more information see also the application note 1MA208 Fast Remote Instrument Control with HiSLIP VXI 11 Protocol The VXI 11 standard is based on the ONC RPC Open Network Computing Remote Procedure Call protocol which in turn relies on TCP IP as the network transport layer The TCP IP network protocol and the associated network services are preconfigured TCP IP ensures connection oriented communication where the order ofthe exchanged messages is adhered to and interrupted links are identified With this proto col messages cannot be lost Socket Communication An alternative way for remote control of the software is to establish a simple network communication using sockets The socket communication also referred to as Raw Ethernet communication does not necessary require a VISA installation on the remote controller side The simplest way to establish socket communication is to use the built in telnet pro gram The telnet program is part of every operating system and supports communica tion with the software on a command by command basis Socket connections are established on a specially defined port The socket address is a combination of th
298. red as plain text separated by com mas PACK ed Numerical data is transferred as binary block data The format within the binary data depends on the command The various binary data formats are explained in the description of the parameter types RST ASCii Example FORM ASC The data is transferred as ASCII data FORMat SREGister lt Format gt Determines the numerical format which is returned when the status registers are quer ied Parameters lt Format gt ASCii BlNary HEXadecimal OCTal ASCii The register content is returned as a decimal number BINary The register content is returned as a binary number B is placed in front of the number HEXadecimal The register content is returned as a hexadecimal number H is placed in front of the number OCTal The register content is returned as an octal number Q is placed in front of the number RST ASCii Example FORM SREG HEX The register content is returned as a hexadecimal number 11 10 MMEMory Subsystem The MMEMory subsystem Mass Memory contains the commands for managing files and directories as well as for loading and storing complete instrument settings in files The files are stored on the internal flash memory of the instrument or on external USB memory devices The default directory is determined using the command MMEMory CDIR O d 11 10 1 MMEMory Subsystem Use the command SYSTem MMEMory PATH USER to query the path
299. red to work in the special baseband bypass mode Operation Mode Refer to chapter 9 Performing Configuration Tasks on page 109 for an overview of the general operating tasks The chapter 9 1 How to Generate an l Q Modulated Sig nal on page 109 explains the basic operating concept by means of an example Operating Menu and Toolbar 6 Understanding the R amp S SGMA GUI Soft ware This section gives a detailed description of the R amp S SGMA GUI user interface and information on how to work with it The main panel with the overview of the configured instruments is the operating and control interface for the whole program From here all program functions are accessible This panel is displayed after the start of R amp S SGMA GUI The program always loads the previously used settings so you can continue your work in the next session me ima File Setup Help aaa GHz Ol sGs 100004 Freq 10 000 000 000 000 elt SGU 100014 SGT 1 000 000 000 000 if ver 20 00 som teva 20 0050 E Extension to SGS 100004 ELO el asi O E Sr Jon mi Qe Jess NE Jon Jon es User 1 Trigger User 2 Marker 2 GHz 6 1 Operating Menu and Toolbar On the top of the main panel there are the menu bar the tool bar and the info bar with the corresponding Info button Some of the functions are accessible via the toolbar with its ico
300. reichen eignet die direkt an ein Niederspannungs Versorgungsnetz angeschlossen sind das Wohngeb ude versorgt Hinweis Diese Einrichtung kann wegen m glicher auftretender leitungsgebundener als auch gestrahlten St rgr en im Wohnbereich Funkst rungen verursachen In diesem Fall kann vom Betreiber verlangt werden angemessene Ma nahmen durchzuf hren Ger t der Klasse B Ein Ger t das sich f r den Betrieb im Wohnbereich sowie in solchen Bereichen eignet die direkt an ein Niederspannungs Versorgungsnetz angeschlossen sind das Wohngeb ude versorgt Reparatur und Service 1 Das Produkt darf nur von daf r autorisiertem Fachpersonal ge ffnet werden Vor Arbeiten am Produkt oder ffnen des Produkts ist dieses von der Versorgungsspannung zu trennen sonst besteht das Risiko eines elektrischen Schlages Abgleich Auswechseln von Teilen Wartung und Reparatur darf nur von R amp S autorisierten Elektrofachkr ften ausgef hrt werden Werden sicherheitsrelevante Teile z B Netzschalter Netztrafos oder Sicherungen ausgewechselt so d rfen diese nur durch Originalteile ersetzt werden Nach jedem Austausch von sicherheitsrelevanten Teilen ist eine Sicherheitspr fung durchzuf hren Sichtpr fung Schutzleitertest Isolationswiderstand Ableitstrommessung Funktionstest Damit wird sichergestellt dass die Sicherheit des Produkts erhalten bleibt Batterien und Akkumulatoren Zellen Werden die Hinweise zu Batterien und Akkumulatoren
301. released For this reason the product may only be disassembled by specially trained personnel Improper disassembly may be hazardous to your health National waste disposal regulations must be observed 4 If handling the product releases hazardous substances or fuels that must be disposed of in a special way e g coolants or engine oils that must be replenished regularly the safety instructions of the manufacturer of the hazardous substances or fuels and the applicable regional waste disposal regulations must be observed Also observe the relevant safety instructions in the product documentation The improper disposal of hazardous substances or fuels can cause health problems and lead to environmental damage For additional information about environmental protection visit the Rohde amp Schwarz website Instrucciones de seguridad elementales iEs imprescindible leer y cumplir las siguientes instrucciones e informaciones de seguridad El principio del grupo de empresas Rohde amp Schwarz consiste en tener nuestros productos siempre al dia con los est ndares de seguridad y de ofrecer a nuestros clientes el maximo grado de seguridad Nuestros productos y todos los equipos adicionales son siempre fabricados y examinados segun las normas de seguridad vigentes Nuestro sistema de garantia de calidad controla constantemente que sean cumplidas estas normas El presente producto ha sido fabricado y examinado seg n el certificado de conformidad de la
302. rement 0 01 RST 0 Example see chapter 11 1 2 Generating an UO Modulated Signal on page 146 Manual operation See Crest Factor on page 84 SOURce IQ WBSTate State Selects optimized settings for wideband modulation signals Parameters lt State gt 0 1 OFF ON RST 0 Example See chapter 11 1 2 Generating an UO Modulated Signal on page 146 Manual operation See UO Wideband on page 84 SOURce PHASe Subsystem 11 16 SOURce PHASe Subsystem Be E EE 191 SOURce PHASe REFETeNce niinniin innia aiaiai atiina niire aaia aiaiai 191 SOURce PHASe lt Phase gt Specifies the phase variation relative to the current phase Parameters lt Phase gt float Range 360 to 360 Increment 0 1 RST 0 Default unit DEG Example See chapter 11 1 2 Generating an UO Modulated Signal on page 146 Manual operation See Delta Phase on page 66 SOURce PHASe REFerence Adopts the phase set with command SOURce PHASe as the current phase Example See chapter 11 1 2 Generating an UO Modulated Signal on page 146 Usage Event Manual operation See Reset Delta Phase Display on page 66 11 17 SOURce POWer Subsystem SOURCE POWerALCDSENSIHIV EY nee aaa 192 SOURce POWer ALC STATe nn caca tttnentntnntnetnteett tt tete ns 192 ESCURCA POWETALO SON CO edid a ern 192 TSOUbRcel POWer ATTenuatton REOFTMODE issues 192 SOURce POWer ATTenuation SOVer OFF Set 19
303. res de recogida y eliminaci n para los fabricantes dentro de la UE Para desechar el producto de manera respetuosa con el medio ambiente dirijase a su servicio de atenci n al cliente de Rohde amp Schwarz Si se trabaja de manera mec nica y o t rmica cualquier producto o componente mas alla del funcionamiento previsto pueden liberarse sustancias peligrosas polvos con contenido de metales pesados como p ej plomo berilio o niquel Por eso el producto solo debe ser desmontado por personal especializado con formaci n adecuada Un desmontaje inadecuado puede ocasionar da os para la salud Se deben tener en cuenta las directivas nacionales referentes a la eliminaci n de residuos En caso de que durante el trato del producto se formen sustancias peligrosas o combustibles que deban tratarse como residuos especiales p ej refrigerantes o aceites de motor con intervalos de cambio definidos deben tenerse en cuenta las indicaciones de seguridad del fabricante de dichas sustancias y las normas regionales de eliminaci n de residuos Tenga en cuenta tambi n en caso necesario las indicaciones de seguridad especiales contenidas en la documentaci n del producto La eliminaci n incorrecta de sustancias peligrosas o combustibles puede causar da os a la salud o da os al medio ambiente Se puede encontrar mas informaci n sobre la protecci n del medio ambiente en la pagina web de Rohde amp Schwarz 1171 0000 42 08 Page 14 Grundlegende Sich
304. ress information automatically This means that it is safe to establish a physical connection to the LAN without any previous instrument configuration 2 3 2 3 Automatically adding instruments to the SGMA GUI For information on how to install the R amp S SGMA GUI software refer to chapter 2 3 1 Installing the R amp S SGMA GUI Software on an External PC on page 21 1 For each new instrument perform the following steps a Connect the instrument to the network b Press the POWER ON STAND BY key to switch on the instrument c Wait until the POWER ON STAND BY LED is green and not blinking Connecting an External PC and Devices d Press the ID key on the front panel of the instrument 2 Startthe SGMA GUI on a computer connected to the same network 3 Open the Instruments dialog and click Scan Note This step is performed automatically on the first start and can also be omit ted for instruments with a direct LAN connection to the computer All instruments will be added automatically to the main panel of the SIGMA GUI 2 3 3 Connecting a Controller via PCI Express A PCI Express connector is provided on the rear panel of the instrument see chap ter 3 2 Rear Panel Tour on page 28 NOTICE Risk of device failure The R amp S SGS is equipped with a single lane PCle interface that supports hot plugging Do not connect an external PC to the PCle connector of the instrument during opera tion if this external PC does
305. rking with Files and Directories on page 170 Usage SCPI confirmed MMEMory Subsystem MMEMory COPY lt SourceFile gt lt DestinationFile gt Copies an existing file to a new file Instead of just a file this command can also be used to copy a complete directory together with all its files Setting parameters lt SourceFile gt string String containing the path and file name of the source file If destination is not specified source is copied to the MMEM CDIR directory Files which already exist with the same name in the destination directory are overwritten without an error message lt DestinationFile gt string String containing the path and name of the target file The path may be relative or absolute If no file destination is specified the source file is copied to the current directory queried with the MMEMory CDIRectory command Files which already exist with the same name in the destination directory are overwritten without an error message Example See Working with Files and Directories on page 170 Usage Setting only SCPI confirmed MMEMory DATA lt Filename gt lt BinaryBlock gt MMEMory DATA lt Filename gt The setting command writes the block data lt BinaryBlock gt to the file identified by lt Filename gt Setthe GPIB bus terminator to EOI to ensure correct data transfer The query command transfers the specified file from the instrument to the GPIB bus and then on to the contr
306. rment 7 8 2 General I Q Settings gt To access the settings of the UO modulator select SGMA GUI gt Instrument Name gt Q Settings gt General Comprises the settings for setting the state and the analog wideband UO input Mod State Switches the I Q modulation on and off Remote command SOURce IQ STATe on page 189 UO Wideband Setting mode for wideband modulation signals higher UO modulation bandwidth The modulation frequency response of the R amp S SGS in the useful bandwidth is improved at the expense of poorer harmonic suppression This is achieved by shifting the switching frequencies of the lowpass filters in the output section Remote command SOURce IQ WBSTate on page 190 Crest Factor Sets the crest factor of the I Q modulation signal The crest factor gives the difference in level between the peak envelope power PEP and average power value RMS in dB This value is necessary for the generation of the correct output power at the RF output i e the instrument uses the crest factor value to compensate the average power In vector modulation mode the output level setting is correlated to the nominal full scale voltage at the UO input If the baseband signal exhibits no constant envelope the instrument internal level setting can be corrected by use of the crest factor value Remote command SOURce IQ CRESt actor on page 190 IO Modulation and Signal Impairment 7 8 3 Ana
307. rs the scan function O aborts the running scan proc ess The query command returns 1 as long as scan is running 0 indi cates completed scan process Example See chapter 11 1 6 Configuring Instruments in the R amp S SGMA GUI on page 152 Manual operation See Scan on page 47 INSTruments SCAN HNPRefix lt Prefix gt Sets the prefix the searched host names begin with Parameters lt Prefix gt string Example See chapter 11 1 6 Configuring Instruments in the R amp S SGMA GUI on page 152 Manual operation See Scan LAN instruments with host name prefix on page 48 INSTruments SERial lt Serial gt Enters the serial number as instrument s identification while using the USB interface for remote control Parameters lt Serial gt lt SerialNumberinstr 1 gt SerialNumberlnstrz2 Example See chapter 11 1 6 Configuring Instruments in the R amp S SGMA GUI on page 152 Manual operation See Serial Number on page 50 R amp S SGMA GUI Settings INSTruments TYPE lt Type gt Selects the instrument s family Parameters lt Type gt List of CHAR Data lt Typelnstr 1 gt lt Typelnstr 2 gt Example See chapter 11 1 6 Configuring Instruments in the R amp S SGMA GUI on page 152 Manual operation See Available Instruments on page 47 Cleaning 12 Maintenance 12 1 The instrument does not need a periodic maintenance Only cleaning the instrument is essential F
308. rsorgungsnetzen gestattet die mit h chstens 16 A abgesichert sind h here Absicherung nur nach R cksprache mit der Rohde amp Schwarz Firmengruppe Stecken Sie den Stecker nicht in verstaubte oder verschmutzte Steckdosen buchsen Stecken Sie die Steckverbindung vorrichtung fest und vollst ndig in die daf r vorgesehenen Steckdosen buchsen Missachtung dieser Ma nahmen kann zu Funken Feuer und oder Verletzungen f hren berlasten Sie keine Steckdosen Verl ngerungskabel oder Steckdosenleisten dies kann Feuer oder elektrische Schl ge verursachen Bei Messungen in Stromkreisen mit Spannungen Uer gt 30 V ist mit geeigneten Ma nahmen Vorsorge zu treffen dass jegliche Gef hrdung ausgeschlossen wird z B geeignete Messmittel Absicherung Strombegrenzung Schutztrennung Isolierung usw Bei Verbindungen mit informationstechnischen Ger ten z B PC oder Industrierechner ist darauf zu achten dass diese der jeweils g ltigen IEC 60950 1 EN 60950 1 oder IEC 61010 1 EN 61010 1 entsprechen Sofern nicht ausdr cklich erlaubt darf der Deckel oder ein Teil des Geh uses niemals entfernt werden wenn das Produkt betrieben wird Dies macht elektrische Leitungen und Komponenten zug nglich und kann zu Verletzungen Feuer oder Schaden am Produkt f hren 1171 0000 41 08 Seite 4 Grundlegende Sicherheitshinweise Wird ein Produkt ortsfest angeschlossen ist die Verbindung zwischen dem Schutzleiteranschluss vor Ort
309. ruments REMote CHANnel on page 222 Instrument Name IP Address Enters the IP Address or the host name of the connected instrument See also chapter 6 4 3 Finding Out the Default Hostname of the Instrument on page 61 Remote command INSTruments REMote NAME on page 223 Serial Number Enters the serial number as instrument s identification while using the USB or PCle interfaces for remote control Remote command INSTruments SERial on page 223 OK Confirms the settings and closes the dialog Apply Confirms the settings 6 1 2 3 6 1 2 4 Operating Menu and Toolbar Cancel Discards settings and closes the dialog Software Options Dialog Querying information about the installed options and software version gt To access the dialog select Setup gt Software An info dialog opens showing program information Firmware In the group box Firmware the following columns are displayed Package Installed software packages e g SW platform Version Release of the software package Reset SGMA GUI Resets R amp S SGMA GUI to its factory preset settings The connected instruments are not affected by this preset To preset one specific instrument to its factory preset settings select SGMA GUI gt Instrument Name gt Setup gt Factory Preset Refer to chapter 8 10 Factory Preset on page 105 for an overview of the settings affected by this function Help The R amp S SGMA GUI i
310. s e Front Panel Tour e Rear Panel Tour This section explains the control elements and the connectors of the R amp S SGS with the aid of the front and rear views Specifications of interfaces can be found in the data sheet 3 1 Front Panel Tour This section provides an overview of control elements on the front panel ofthe R amp S SGS The connectors of the R amp S SGS are placed on the rear panel and are described in chapter 3 2 Rear Panel Tour on page 28 As the R amp S SGS is mainly intended to be remote controlled the front panel ofthe R amp S SGS contains no display but mostly LEDs to inform the user about the status of the instrument The user inter face can be displayed on a remote PC station used to manually remote control the instrument SGMA RF SOURCE amp ROHDE amp SCHWARZ 7 nas sas nna i een ERROR REF EXT WARNING Fig 3 1 Front panel view POWER ON STAND BY CO The POWER ON STAND BY key switches the instrument from the standby to ready state or vice versa In ready state the button is green The instrument is ready for operation In standby state the button is orange In this state it is safe to switch off the AC power and disconnect the instrument from the power supply A blinking green color indicates that a booting operation is in proccess RF ON Front Panel Tour The RF ON key switches the RF signal on or off If activated the button is green REF EXT The REF EXT LED
311. s The preset commands are not bundled into one subsystem Therefore they are listed separately in this section In addition a specific preset command is provided for each digital standard and for the fader These specific commands are described in the asso ciated subsystems The following presetting actions are available e Activating the default state of all internal instrument functions RST on page 156 Functions that concern the integration of the instrument into a measurement setup are not changed e g TCP IP address or reference oscillator source settings e Activating the original state of delivery factory reset SYSTem FPReset on page 159 Only functions that are protected by a password remain unchanged as well as the passwords themselves SOURce lt hw gt PRESet SYSTem PRESet Triggers an instrument reset It has the same effect as the RST command e the SGMA GUI gt Instrument Name gt Preset function For an overview of the settings affected by the preset function see chapter 7 9 Pre set on page 86 Example SYST PRES All instrument settings also those that are not currently active are reset to their default values Usage Setting only SYSTem FPReset Triggers an instrument reset to the original state of delivery Example SYST FPR all instrument settings also those that are not currently active are reset to the factory values 11 5 CALibration Subsystem Usage Event Manual
312. s iore nee 169 Extensions for User Files tante tede deae ttd n rie e dv 170 SA iinei ainaani aiiai andia AN AE E E AA NEES NEEE 170 Remote Control Commands ete eee de de eene 171 Fast Speed Commanidds iet itane rient tre haut in Vo S Ya nos ann taaan nena 177 OUTPut Subsystem erii 0440000000 0000000 iran neuve ann Hann aan aano nenne 178 SOURCE Subeyetem seEEEEESNEEEREEEEEEEEEREEEEEEEEEEEEESEEEEEEEERSEEEEREEEEEEEEEEEERNEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEe 179 SOURce CORRection Subsystem esee nnne nnn 181 SOURce IQ Subsystem iii iscccccccicccsseescsccecevvess veseuces sonenrenncsasnsvessoree sans Hin anne auc nenn nS R ER ARR 188 SOURce PHASe Subsystem ss 191 SOURce POWer Subsystem ss 191 SOURce PULM Subsystem ss sise 195 SOURce ROSCillator Subsystem ss sssssnssesennnnnnnnns 202 STATUS Subsystem eerie eerie Guns an nn nnnew nn nnn anna erahnen 203 SYSTem Subsystem s ss0 42 0000040400000nG0 0000 Binnen sanc anne sanc ann nnnnnd nn ae ERR atra aux 207 TEST Subsystem sss 3 4 s0234440 0002 iiic iieri icc esas nina dann andern 219 LIE IILTZ CU 220 R amp S SGMA GUI Settings 221 L ipn r ee 225 CLAN ING Ces 225 Storing and Packing sccccccsscscceccsceteccees cesetecess
313. s Gewichts oder Stabilit tsgr nden nicht daf r geeignet sind Folgen Sie bei Aufbau und Befestigung des Produkts an Gegenst nden oder Strukturen z B W nde und Regale immer den Installations hinweisen des Herstellers Bei Installation abweichend von der Produktdokumentation k nnen Personen verletzt unter Umst nden sogar get tet werden Gei Stellen Sie das Produkt nicht auf hitzeerzeugende Ger tschaften z B Radiatoren und Heizl fter Die Umgebungstemperatur darf nicht die in der Produktdokumentation oder im Datenblatt spezifizierte Maximaltemperatur berschreiten Eine berhitzung des Produkts kann elektrischen Schlag Brand und oder schwere Verletzungen von Personen unter Umst nden mit Todesfolge verursachen 1171 0000 41 08 Seite 3 Grundlegende Sicherheitshinweise Elektrische Sicherheit Werden die Hinweise zur elektrischen Sicherheit nicht oder unzureichend beachtet kann dies elektrischen Schlag Brand und oder schwere Verletzungen von Personen unter Umst nden mit Todesfolge verursachen 1 Vor jedem Einschalten des Produkts ist sicherzustellen dass die am Produkt eingestellte Nennspannung und die Netznennspannung des Versorgungsnetzes bereinstimmen Ist es erforderlich die Spannungseinstellung zu ndern so muss ggf auch die dazu geh rige Netzsicherung des Produkts ge ndert werden Bei Produkten der Schutzklasse mit beweglicher Netzzuleitung und Ger testeckvorrichtung ist der Betrieb nur an St
314. s equipped with a context sensitive help function A help page can be called any time during software operation The context sensitive page which is opened with the F1 button is part of a comprehen sive help system It is possible to move from this context sensitive page to any page of the help system An overview of the contents of the online help can be reached via the menu SGMA GUI gt Help gt Contents Info Dialog and Messages in the Info Bar A search for keywords within the help function is available via menu item SGMA GUI gt Help gt Index 6 2 Info Dialog and Messages in the Info Bar A few operating states and the current messages are displayed in the info line For information on messages in greater detail and their management an Info dialog can be opened 6 2 1 Info Dialog The Info dialog provides a list of currently active permanent messages and a detailed description of each message The messages are color coded according to their level Accessing the Info Dialog gt In the R amp S SGMA GUI main panel select the Info button The Info dialog opens SGMA GUI Fey mre File Setup Help a suaz 9 into Info line List of current messages with short message text Detailed description of a highlighted message The upper part of the Info dialog lists the currently active permanent messages See the following table for explanation of the displayed information
315. s siguientes palabras de se al con el fin de advertir contra riesgos y peligros PELIGRO Indica una situaci n de peligro que si no se evita causa lesiones graves o incluso la muerte Indica una situaci n de peligro que si no se evita puede causar lesiones graves o incluso la muerte lesiones leves o moderadas Indica informaci n que se considera importante pero no en relaci n con situaciones de peligro p ej avisos sobre posibles da os materiales En la documentaci n del producto se emplea de forma sin nima el t rmino CUIDADO A ATENCI N Indica una situaci n de peligro que si no se evita puede causar Las palabras de sefal corresponden a la definici n habitual para aplicaciones civiles en el area econ mica europea Pueden existir definiciones diferentes a esta definici n en otras reas econ micas o en aplicaciones militares Por eso se deber tener en cuenta que las palabras de se al aqu descritas sean utilizadas siempre solamente en combinaci n con la correspondiente documentaci n del producto y solamente en combinaci n con el producto correspondiente La utilizaci n de las palabras de se al en combinaci n con productos o documentaciones que no les correspondan puede llevar a interpretaciones equivocadas y tener por consecuencia da os en personas u objetos Estados operativos y posiciones de funcionamiento El producto solamente debe ser utilizado seg n lo indicado por el fabricante respecto a los
316. s the serial numbers of the available extension instruments Parameters lt Serial gt lt SerialNumberlnstr 1 gt lt SerialNumberInstr 2 gt Example see chapter 11 1 5 Enabling and Configuring an Extension Mode on page 150 Usage Query only Manual operation See Available Instruments on page 89 EXTension BUSY STATe Queries the state of the extension instrument Return values lt State gt 0 1 OFF ON 0 the extension is connected to the master instrument and can be remotely operated 1 the extension is busy i e in standby or locked state or is per forming a time consuming operation Example see chapter 11 1 5 Enabling and Configuring an Extension Mode on page 150 Usage Query only Manual operation See Available Instruments on page 89 EXTension SELect lt SelNr gt Selects an extension by its index number The subsequent SCPI commands are rela ted to this extension Parameters lt SelNr gt float 0 no selection Example see chapter 11 1 5 Enabling and Configuring an Extension Mode on page 150 FORMat Subsystem EXTension SEND lt Cmd gt In test setups without remote connection between the controller remote PC and the extension the R amp S SGS acts as a bridge between them The com mand EXTension SEND sends a SCPI command to the extension instrument Parameters lt Cmd gt string Example see chapter 11 1 5 Enab
317. s to the extension to control it e g activate the RF optput of the extension and subsequently confirm this LEE 0k Ck 0k 0k 0k 0k 0k 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 ck 2 ck 2 2 2 ck 2 2 2 2 2 20202 EXTension SEND OUTP STAT ON EXTension SEND OUTP STAT 1 the RF ouptput of the extension is active EEE ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck 2 2 2 2 2 2 ck ck 2 2 2 2 2 2 ck ck 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 XX Unlock the instrument KKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK UNL 72349234 11 1 6 Configuring Instruments in the R amp S SGMA GUI This section provides an example of the automation of the R amp S SGMA GUI In the following example we assume that a remote PC with installed R amp S SGMA GUI on it is connected to a LAN and that the remote PC and the instruments are switched on For more information refer to chapter 2 3 Connecting an External PC and Devices on page 20 11 CKCkCkckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckck A A ck ck ck ck kk Trigger the scan function to search for instruments connected to the remote computer via all of the available interfaces NY CKCkCkckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckck AH ck ck ck ck k kk INSTruments SCAN HNPRef
318. sa dur e de vie un produit ne peut pas tre limin avec les d chets m nagers normaux mais doit tre collect s par ment Rohde amp Schwarz GmbH amp Co KG a d velopp un concept d limination des d chets et assume toutes les obligations en mati re de reprise et d limination valables pour les fabricants au sein de l UE Veuillez vous adresser votre centre de service apr s vente Rohde amp Schwarz pour liminer le produit de mani re cologique 3 Siles produits ou leurs composants sont travaill s m caniquement et ou thermiquement au del de l utilisation pr vue ils peuvent le cas ch ant lib rer des substances dangereuses poussi res contenant des m taux lourds comme par exemple du plomb du b ryllium ou du nickel Le d montage du produit ne doit donc tre effectu que par un personnel qualifi et sp cialement form Le d montage inad quat peut nuire la sant Les r gles nationales concernant l limination des d chets doivent tre observ es 4 Si lors de l utilisation du produit des substances dangereuses ou combustibles exigeant une limination sp ciale sont d gag es comme par exemple liquides de refroidissement ou huiles moteurs qui sont changer r guli rement les consignes de s curit du fabricant de ces substances dangereuses ou combustibles ainsi que les r gles sur l limination en vigueur au niveau r gional doivent tre respect es Les consignes de s curit sp cia
319. section Operating states and operating positions item 1 Therefore the equipment must be protected against penetration by liquids If the necessary precautions are not taken the user may suffer electric shock or the product itself may be damaged which can also lead to personal injury Never use the product under conditions in which condensation has formed or can form in or on the product e g if the product has been moved from a cold to a warm environment Penetration by water increases the risk of electric shock Prior to cleaning the product disconnect it completely from the power supply e g AC supply network or battery Use a soft non linting cloth to clean the product Never use chemical cleaning agents such as alcohol acetone or diluents for cellulose lacquers Operation 1 Operating the products requires special training and intense concentration Make sure that persons who use the products are physically mentally and emotionally fit enough to do so otherwise injuries or material damage may occur It is the responsibility of the employer operator to select suitable personnel for operating the products 1171 0000 42 08 Page 4 Basic Safety Instructions 2 Before you move or transport the product read and observe the section titled Transport 3 As with all industrially manufactured goods the use of substances that induce an allergic reaction allergens such as nickel cannot be generally excluded If y
320. selected with MMEMor y CDIRectory The path may be relative or absolute MMEMory Subsystem Return values lt UsedDiskSpace gt Byte size of all files in the directory lt FreeDiskSpace gt Remaining disk space in bytes lt Filelnfo gt lt NameFileN gt lt SuffixFileN gt lt SizeFileN gt List of files separated by commas lt NameFileN gt Name of the file lt SuffixFileN gt Type of the file Possible suffixes are ASCii BINary DIRectory lt SizeFileN gt Size of the file in bytes Example See Working with Files and Directories on page 170 Usage Query only MMEMory CATalog LENGth lt Path gt Returns the number of files in the current or in the specified directory Query parameters lt Path gt string String parameter to specify the directory If the directory is omit ted the command queries the content of the current directory queried with MMEMory CDIRectory command Return values lt FileCount gt integer Number of files Example See Working with Files and Directories on page 170 Usage Query only MMEMory CDIRectory lt Directory gt Changes the default directory for mass memory storage The directory is used for all subsequent MMEM commands if no path is specified with them Parameters lt Directory gt lt directory_name gt String containing the path to another directory The path may be relative or absolute To change to a higher directory use two dots Example See Wo
321. settings KEKE KK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK TH TH TH A A A A A A A A A EEE ck ck KKK SOURce ROSCillator SOURce Response EXT Programming Examples SOURce ROSCillator EXTernal FREQuency Response 100MHZ SOURce ROSCillator EXTernal SBANdwidth Response WIDE SOURce ROSCillator SOURce INTernal SOURce ROSCillator OUTput FREQuency 100MHZ SOURce ROSCillator INTernal ADJust STATe OFF uses the calibrated adjustment value of the internal ref frequency SOURce ROSCillator INTernal ADJust VALue CONNector REFLo OUTPut Response REF ck ck ck ck ck ck ck 0k 0k 0k 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 ck ck ck ck ck 2 ck ck 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2022 Optimizing the quality characteristics of the RF signal ck ck ck ck EEE 0k 0k 0k 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 EX EX SOURce POWer LMODe LNO optimize the signal to noise ratio SOURce POWer SCHaracteristic AUTO ensure highest dynamic range and fastest setting time SOURce POWer LEVel IMMediate AMPLitude 30dBm SOURce POWer LIMit AMPLitude 30dBm SOURce POWer ALC SONCe OUTPut STATe PON UNCHanged KKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK Unlock the instrument ck Ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck kk KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KK KKK
322. settings Many of these commands have also been standardized by the SCPI committee These commands are marked as 14 1 2 14 1 3 Remote Control Basics SCPI confirmed in the command reference chapters Commands without this SCPI label are device specific however their syntax follows SCPI rules as per mitted by the standard Instrument responses Instrument responses response messages and service requests are messages the instrument sends to the controller after a query They can contain measurement results instrument settings and information on the instrument status LAN Interface Messages In the LAN connection the interface messages are called low level control messages These messages can be used to emulate interface messages of the GPIB bus Command Long term Effect on the instrument amp ABO Abort Aborts processing of the commands just received amp DCL Device Clear Aborts processing of the command s just received and sets the command processing software to a defined initial state Does not change the instrument setting amp GTL Go to Local Transition to the local state manual control The instrument automatically returns to remote state when a remote command is sent UNLESS amp NREN was sent before amp GTR Go to Remote Enables automatic transition from local state to remote state by a subsequent remote command after amp NREN was sent amp GET Group Execute Trigger Triggers a previo
323. sions whenever both the controller and the monitor utilize the same remote channel These collisions are indicated by an error message in the Info line e g Query inter rupted or Resource locked Simultaneous monitoring and control over the same remote channel is only possible ifthe used protocols support viLock viUnlock and the remote program use these functions The table 10 2 shows whether a collision free communication over a particular combi nation of remote channels is possible or not and ifthere are any restrictions Table 10 2 Cross reference between used remote channels and collision free communication Monitor LAN LAN HiSLIP USB LAN Socket PCle Controller DREI LAN VXI 11 OK OK OK OK OK LAN HiSLIP OK OK OK OK OK USB OK OK viLock viUnlock OK OK LAN Socket OK OK OK X OK PCle OK OK OK OK X where e OK communication possible no collisions the R amp S SGMA GUI always uses the LAN device name instr1 see also chap ter 10 1 2 3 VXI 11 Protocol on page 130 e X communication is not possible without collisions e viLock viUnlock communication is only possible if the remote control com mands are enclosed ina viLock viUnlock pair O The R amp S SGMA GUI uses the viLock viUnlock functions The figure below shows an example of configuration where the monitor and the con troller are two different computers connected to the same instrument ove
324. special commands that allow a fast frequency and level setting FFASt lt Freq gt Special command to set the RF output frequency with minimum latency No unit e g Hz allowed Bypasses the status system so command OPC cannot be appended Parameters lt Freq gt float Example FFASt 12750000000 PFASt lt Pow gt Special command to set the RF output level with minimum latency No unit e g dBm allowed Bypasses the status system so command OPC cannot be appended Parameters lt Pow gt float Example PFASt 20 OUTPut Subsystem 11 12 OUTPut Subsystem OUTPut AFIXed RANGe LOWer naco nn ano naco anna EESE dei 178 OUTPut AFIXed RANGe UPPer oooccccccccccconaccnncconcnonanonanonancn acc nano nana nara nan anna na nan daas nana 178 pe Ge e RE 178 OUTPUIESTATEEPON M 179 OUTPUT STA TE Mee 179 OUTPut AFIXed RANGe LOWer Queries the minimum level which can be set without the attenuator being adjusted Attenuator FIXed Return values lt Lower gt float Default unit dBm Example See chapter 11 1 2 Generating an UO Modulated Signal on page 146 Usage Query only OUTPut AFIXed RANGe UPPer Queries the maximum level which can be set without the attenuator being adjusted Attenuator FIXed Return values lt Upper gt float Default unit dBm Example See chapter 11 1 2 Generating an UO Modulated Signal on page 146 Usage Query only OUT
325. sponse 3 5E9 in the previous example stands for 3 5 GHz Truth values Boolean values are returned as 0 for OFF and 1 for ON Example Setting command HCOPy DEV COL ON Query HCOPy DEV COL Response 1 Text character data is returned in a short form Example Setting command HCOPy PAGE ORIentation LANDscape Query HCOP PAGE ORI Response LAND 14 1 4 Command Sequence and Synchronization IEEE 488 2 defines a distinction between overlapped and sequential commands A sequential command is one which finishes executing before the next command starts executing Commands that are processed quickly are usually implemented as sequential commands Sequential commands are not implemented in the instru ment however the execution time of most commands is so short that they act as sequential commands when sent in different command lines An overlapping command is one which does not automatically finish executing before the next command starts executing Usually overlapping commands take longer to process and allow the program to do other tasks while being executed If overlapping commands do have to be executed in a defined order e g in order to avoid wrong measurement results they must be serviced sequentially This is called synchronization between the controller and the instrument Setting commands within one command line even though they may be implemented as sequential commands are not necessarily service
326. ssing The driver does not support the installed version of a module 202 Cannot access the EEPROM A error occurs when writing or reading a EEPROM The EEPROM might be defect and has to be replaced 203 Invalid EEPROM data 204 Driver initialization failed Initialization of a driver fails when booting the instrument firmware The driver is not compatible with the hardware or software config uration of the instrument 241 No current list There is no list selected To execute the required opera tion a list has to be selected in the related dialog If no list is available a new list must be cre ated 242 Unknown list type specified The list type selected is not valid for the required operation For instance the file extension for mapping files is map It is not possi ble to enter another file extension when selecting a list Check the selected list type 460 Cannot open file The selected file can not be opened Check the path and file name 461 Cannot write file The file can not be written Check if the file is read only 462 Cannot read file The file can not be read Check if the file contents are compatible with the file type 463 Filename missing The required operation cannot be executed because the file name is not specified A file name has to be entered when creating a new list 464 Invalid file
327. st is performed successfully otherwise a value other than 0 is returned None of the commands of this system have an RST value Improper use may destroy the assembly The respective hardware assembly responds directly to the TEST DIRect command any safety mechanisms are bypassed The command is used for servicing purposes and should not be applied by the user PESTALESTARL EE 219 TESTALERESU gge E 219 hESTEKEYBoardE STATS 2 2 aene CRX au ae 220 TEST ALL STARt Starts the selftest Use the command TEST ALL RESult to query the result Example See chapter 11 1 1 Performing General Task for Instrument Setup on page 144 Usage Event TEST ALL RESult Queries the result of the performed selftest Start the selftest with TEST ALL STARt UNIT Subsystem Return values lt Result gt 0 1 RUNning STOPped RST STOPped Example See chapter 11 1 1 Performing General Task for Instrument Setup on page 144 Usage Query only TEST KEYBoard STATe lt State gt Enable disable keyboard and LED test state Parameters lt State gt 0 1 OFF ON 11 23 UNIT Subsystem The UNIT subsystem contains the commands specifying which units are valid if no unit is indicated in a command These settings are valid for the entire instrument UNIT ANGLe lt Angle gt Sets the default angle unit for remote control Does not influence the manual control paramete
328. strument with the instrument specific settings The rows comprise the instrument the connection state the used frequency and power level the state of the RF output and the modulator and the used reference frequency source 3 5 Configuring a CW Signal with the R amp S SGMA GUI LL File Setup Help Info PORTO Bf Miro In the R amp S SGMA GUI main panel the green indicator in front of the instrument s name confirms that there is a connection between the instrument and the remote PC and that the instrument is recognized by the software In the R amp S SGMA GUI main panel select the row corresponding to the instrument to be configured and select Instrument Name gt Preset to restore the predefined instrument s settings Setup Help In the R amp S SGMA GUI main panel select the row corresponding to the instrument to be configured and adjust the Frequency as required 6 000 000 000 000 cx ser 10 00 5 000 000 000 ooo oss Bf Mog eee 10 00 Sesen re 6 000 00 0000 500000000 on B M o The 5 GHz signal is output at the RF OUT connector at the rear panel of the R amp S SGS Configuring a CW Signal with the R amp S SGS100A Web GUI O 4 2 Identifying a specific instrument If several instruments are active in the R amp S SGMA GUI use one of the device identifi cation functions to identify a specific device e Select SGMA GUI gt Instrument Name gt
329. tandby power mode keeps the power In the R amp S SGMA GUI the status indicator in switch circuits and the remote control sys front of the instrument name is red EIERE The orange POWER ON STAND BY key is In this state it is safe to switch off the AC on power and disconnect the instrument from the power supply Ready The instrument is ready for operation All In the R amp S SGMA GUI the status indicator in normal modules are power supplied front of the instrument name is green operation The green POWER ON STAND BY key is on To switch the instrument to standby state gt To switch the instrument to the standby state use one of the following a Onthe remote PC select SGMA GUI gt Instrument Name gt Setup gt Standby b Press the POWER ON STANDBY key on the front panel of the instrument c Send the SCPI command STANdby The current instruments settings are automatically stored The instrument switches to a power saving mode In the R amp S SGMA GUI the standby state is indicated by the red state symbol in front of the corresponding instrument s name on the front panel by the orange POWER ON STANDBY button The instrument can still be remote controlled To return the instrument from standby to ready state gt To switch from standby to ready state use one of the following a Onthe remote PC select SGMA GUI gt Instrument Name gt Setup gt Restart b Press the orange POWER ON STANDBY k
330. te PC The R amp S SGMA GUI software has to be installed on this remote PC and the instrument has to be added to the list of Available Instruments For information on how to fulfill these requirements refer to e chapter 2 3 2 1 Connecting the Instrument to the Network on page 22 e chapter 2 3 1 Installing the R amp S SGMA GUI Software on an External PC on page 21 e chapter 2 3 2 3 Automatically adding instruments to the SGMA GUI on page 23 General Workflow The general workflow for generating a signal with the R amp S SGS comprises the follow ing main steps 1 Decide whether a CW or an UO modulated signal will be generated See chapter 9 1 How to Generate an I Q Modulated Signal on page 109 2 Select the operating mode See chapter 9 3 How to Enable a Baseband Bypass Mode on page 113 3 Configure the reference and local oscillator settings See chapter 9 4 How to Configure the Reference Oscillator Source on page 114 and chapter 9 5 How to Configure the Local Oscillator LO Cou pling Source on page 115 4 Adjust the frequency level and UO settings for example to optimize performance or to add impairments to the generated signal See chapter 9 11 How to Optimize Performance on page 120 9 1 How to Generate an I Q Modulated Signal The instrument is manually operated via the R amp S SGMA GUI software The I Q Modulator requires the hardware option R amp S SGS B106V and for operation up
331. tended value ranges and functionality The main application field of the extension mode is the extended frequency range but you can also benefit from the I Q modulation and pulse modulation functions of the extension For frequencies greater than 12 75 GHz the combination of R amp S SGS and R amp S SGU can generate vector modulated signals even if the R amp S SGS is not equipped with the required options R amp S SGS B106V B112V Prerequisites and required physical connections for operation in extension mode e The R amp S SGS is equipped with one of the options R amp S SGS B112 B112V e A remote PC is connected to the master instrument the remote PC and the instru ment are switched on and a connection between them is established The instrument and the extension are connected via a direct remote connection or over network switch All interfaces LAN PCle or USB can be used for controlling the SGU e The R amp S SGMA GUI or an application program is running on the remote PC e Signal connections between the R amp S SGS and the R amp S SGU are established i e the connections between the RF OUT of the R amp S SGS and the LO IN of the R amp S SGU for vector modulated signals the OUT Q OUT of the R amp S SGU and the IN Q IN of the R amp S SGS the TRIG connectors of both instruments This section describes the manual operation via the R amp S SGMA GUI software The remote commands required to define these settings are describe
332. ter enabling disabling of the Eco Mode see chapter 8 11 Eco Mode on page 106 Remote command CALibration LEVel TEMPerature on page 161 CALibration FREQuency TEMPerature on page 161 CALibration IQModulator TEMPerature on page 161 8 2 Hardware Configuration In the Hardware Config dialog the installed assemblies together with their variants and revision states can be displayed for servicing purposes gt To access the Hardware Config dialog select SGMA GUI gt Instrument Name gt Setup gt Hardware Config Software Options The dialog is a table that lists the installed assemblies It is divided into the sections e Common Assembly and e RF Assembly Assembly The tables list the installed assemblies Assembly Name of the assembly Part Number Part Number of the assembly Serial Number Serial Number of the assembly Revision Revision state of assembly Remote command SYSTem HARDware ASSembly lt dir gt NAME on page 216 SYSTem HARDware ASSembly lt dir gt PNUMber on page 216 SYSTem HARDware ASSembly lt dir gt SNUMber on page 217 SYSTem HARDware ASSembly lt dir gt REVision on page 216 8 3 Software Options The Software Options dialog shows the firmware version of the instrument software as well as all installed hardware and software options Software Options Software options purchased at a later stage can be activated with a keycode The acti va
333. ter gives an overview of how to connect the instruments 5 2 1 Direct Connection The R amp S SGS and the R amp S SGU can be connected through a direct connection as shown in figure 5 4 Direct connection of an R amp S SGS and an R amp S SGU R amp S SGS R amp S SGU Fig 5 4 Direct connection of an R amp S SGS and an R amp S SGU 1 Connect the R amp S SGS and the R amp S SGU directly using one of the following options a USB cable Use a Type Micro A connector for R amp S SGS and a Type Micro B connector for R amp S SGU See also chapter 2 3 4 Connecting a Controller or an USB Device via USB on page 24 b LAN cable No additional cable considerations are required c PCle cable Refer to chapter 10 3 3 Connecting the Controller and the Instru ment on page 137 for cable requirements and setup information N Switch on the R amp S SGS and the R amp S SGU The R amp S SGS automatically identifies the connected R amp S SGU as its extension and starts the extension mode Setups for Connecting an R amp S SGS and an R amp S SGU sion is only available for an R amp S SGS with a Controller gt Revision 5 or higher For a description on how to manually set the PCle indentification see chapter 9 14 How to Manually Set a PCle Direct Connection between an R amp S SGS and an R amp S SGU on page 123 You can check the Controller gt Revision of your instrument in the SGMA GUI gt Instrument Name gt Hardware Confi
334. the instrument Remote command SYSTem SOFTware OPTion lt dir gt NAME on page 218 SYSTem SOFTware OPTion lt dir gt DESignation on page 217 SYSTem SOFTware OPTion lt dir gt LICenses on page 218 SYSTem SOFTware OPTion lt dir gt EXPiration on page 217 Loaded Modules Section Loaded Modules is provided for service purposes It lists all loaded software modules with their versions and offers a short description of each module Install SW Options Newly purchased software options are enabled in the Install SW Option dialog They are ready to operate after they are enabled by means of a key code supplied with the option Only if the instrument is equipped with an older firmware version a firmware update prior to enabling the software option may be required The information on the valid firmware versions for the purchased software option is provided together with the option Refer to chapter 9 12 How to Install a new Firmware Version on the Instru ment on page 121 for information on how to perform firmware update and to chap Protection ter 9 13 How to Activate Options on page 123 for instruction on how to install new options The firmware update is also described in the service manual chapter 4 on CD ROM supplied with the instrument 8 5 Protection The Protection dialog provides access to the unlocking of protected service functions authorized personnel of R amp S Service Departments only Unlocki
335. tic Subsystem Parameters lt Output gt REF LO OFF RST REF Manual operation See REF LO Output on page 68 CONNector TRIGger OMODe Mode Sets the operating mode of the trigger connector The parameters PVOut PETRigger PEMSource are available only with option R amp S SGS K22 Parameters lt Mode gt SVALid SNValid PVOut PETRigger PEMSource SVALid SNValid signal valid not valid PVOut pulse generator video out PETRigger pulse generator external trigger PEMSource external pulse modulator source Manual operation See Trigger Connector Mode on page 79 11 7 DIAGnostic Subsystem RR el eer RE KEE 163 DIAGnostic MEASUE POIN eu ee 163 DIAGnostic POINt CATalog Queries the test points available in the instrument A detailed description of the test points can be found in chapter 3 section Troubleshooting of the Service Manual on CD ROM supplied with the instrument Example See chapter 11 1 1 Performing General Task for Instrument Setup on page 144 Usage Query only DIAGnostic MEASure POINt lt Name gt Triggers voltage or temperature measurement at the specified test point and returns the measured value A detailed description of the test points can be found in section Trouble Shooting of the Service Manual on CD ROM supplied with the instrument EXTension Subsystem A list of the available test points for the respective path can be queried using the com m
336. tic settings in the instrument e g switching off of incompatible types of modulation or on illegal entries that are not accepted by the 13 2 2 13 4 SCPI Error Messages instrument e g range violations They are displayed in the info line on a yellow back ground They are displayed on top of status information or permanent messages Volatile messages do not normally demand user actions and disappear automatically after a brief period of time They are stored in the history however SCPI command SYSTem ERRor ALL and SYSTem ERRor NEXT Permanent messages Permanent messages are displayed if an error occurs that impairs further instrument operation e g a hardware fault The error signaled by a permanent message must be eliminated before correct instrument operation can be ensured The message is displayed until the error is eliminated It covers the status display in the info line After error elimination the message automatically disappears and is also recorded in the history SCPI command SYSTem SERRor SCPI Error Messages The SCPI error messages are the same in all SCPI instruments Detailed information and an overview of all error messages as defined in SCPI standard can be found in the corresponding documentation The errors are assigned negative numbers The error text being entered into the error event queue or being displayed is printed in bold face on the left together with the error code Below
337. tion Attention lors de la manipulation d appareils ayant un poids lev Indicateur de veille Risque de choc lectrique Courant continu CC Avertissement surface chaude Courant alternatif CA Borne de conducteur de protection Courant continu alternatif CC CA Borne de mise la terre L appareil est conforme aux exigences de s curit du degr de protection II appareil enti rement prot g par isolation double renforc e Borne de mise la masse du b ti ou du boitier Marquage UE pour batteries et accumulateurs L appareil contient une batterie ou un accumulateur Ces pi ces ne peuvent pas tre limin es avec les d chets urbains non tri s mais doivent faire l objet d une collecte s par e Pour plus d informations voir la page 7 Avis prudence lors de la manipulation de composants sensibles aux d charges lectrostatiques Marquage UE pour la collecte s par e d quipements lectriques et lectroniques Les d chets d quipements lectriques et lectroniques ne peuvent pas tre limin s avec les d chets urbains non tri s mais doivent faire l objet d une collecte s par e Pour plus d informations voir la page 7 gt gt mumgP P Avertissement rayon laser Les produits laser sont munis d avertissements normalis s d apr s leur cat gorie laser En raison des caract ristiques de leur rayonnement ainsi que
338. tion For more information and an overview of the settings affected by the factory preset function see chapter 8 10 Factory Preset on page 105 User defined instrument states can be stored and called up using the functions SGMA GUI gt File gt Save As Open 2 2 Linux Operating System The instrument uses an embedded Linux operating system optimally adapted to the instrument Accessing the Operating System No access to the operating system is required for normal operation All necessary system settings can be made in the Setup dialog 2 3 Connecting an External PC and Devices As a rule the R amp S SGS is operated exclusively via remote control on a connected PC Another way to control the instrument is the manual operation via the R amp S SGMA GUI software on the connected PC Both the remote control and the manual operation of the instrument require an external controller For the prerequisites and the instructions on how to configure an external controller for remote control refer to the User Manual A brief introduction to the remote control capabilities is provided in chapter 10 Network and Remote Control Operation on page 124 This section gives an introduction on how to configure the external PC for manual operation see chapter 2 3 1 Installing the R amp S SGMA GUI Software on an External PC on page 21 In addition to connecting an external controller it may be useful to connect other exter nal devi
339. tion code is supplied with the software option An instruction on how to install options is described in Chapter 4 of the Service Manual supplied with the instrument Most hardware options need to be installed at an authorized Rohde amp Schwarz service cen ter To access the Software Options dialog select SGMA GUI gt Instrument Name gt Setup gt Software Options The dialog is divided into the following sections e Firmware Hardware e Software Loaded Modules 8 4 Install SW Options Firmware The Firmware section shows the firmware version and the version of the software platform Note Your instrument is delivered with the latest firmware version available Firmware updates as well as the Release Notes describing the improvements and modifications are provided on the Internet at the download site of the instrument s home page This home page always offers the latest information on your instrument e g also on changes of the firmware update procedure Hardware Software WinlQSIM The tables in the sections Hardware and Software list the installed hardware and software options Option Short name of the option Designation Name of the option Licenses Number of licenses Expiration Date For regular options Permanent is indicated in this column Some options are available as trial versions This column shows their expi ration date After this date the option is no longer available on
340. tion of the instrument to the network is coordinated with the network administrator Connection errors may affect the entire network Note Lost LAN Connection to an Instrument If the connection to an instruments configured to use static IP addresses is lost press the LAN LED on the instrument front panel for 3 seconds to reset the Address Mode to its default value Auto DHCP Auto DHCP The IP address is assigned automatically The network used must support automatic assignment of IP address via DHCP or APIPA Zeroconf in order to use this function Static The IP address is assigned manually Remote command SYSTem COMMunicate NETWork IPADdress MODE on page 211 IP Address Displays the IP address To enter the IP address manually select Static Address Mode In case of manual input of the IP address it is recommend that a connection of the instrument to the network is coordinated with the network administrator Connection errors may affect the entire network Remote command SYSTem COMMunicate NETWork IPADdress on page 211 Subnet Mask Displays the Subnet mask To enter the Subnet mask manually select Static Address Mode This number is used together with the IP address to identify the network segment the instrument is in It is recommend that a connection of the instrument to the network is coordinated with the network administrator Connection errors may affect the entire network Remote command
341. to an Instrument 3 Avoid unnecessary cable lengths and branching points Refer to figure 9 3 for an example of how to connect two instruments for achieving phase coherence The configuration can be extended by further instruments R amp S SGS 1 rear panel d s gt a JII Es 1 DE Ext Ref Source Frequency Local Oscillator Signa LO Signal for further instruments Fig 9 3 Example of setup LO Coupling To configure the first instrument in the chain 1 In the Frequency Phase gt Local Oscillator LO Coupling dialog select LO Source gt Internal 2 Inthe Frequency Phase gt Local Oscillator LO Coupling dialog select REF LO Output gt LO 3 Ifan external reference frequency is used select SGMA GUI gt Instrument Name gt Reference Oscillator gt Source gt External To configure the following instrument s 1 In the Frequency Phase gt Local Oscillator LO Coupling dialog select LO Source gt External 2 Inthe Frequency Phase gt Local Oscillator LO Coupling dialog select REF LO Output gt LO 9 8 How to Restore the LAN Connection to an Instrument gt Ifthe LAN connection to an instrument configured to use a static IP address is lost press the LAN LED on the instrument s front panel for more than 3 seconds to reset the LAN settings and to set the Address Mode on page 103 to DHCP Provided the network supports automatic assignment of IP address new IP
342. to sobre aparatos que generen calor p ej radiadores o calefactores La temperatura ambiente no debe superar la temperatura m xima especificada en la documentaci n del producto o en la hoja de datos En caso de sobrecalentamiento del producto pueden producirse choques el ctricos incendios y o lesiones graves con posible consecuencia de muerte Seguridad el ctrica Si no se siguen o se siguen de modo insuficiente las indicaciones del fabricante en cuanto a seguridad el ctrica pueden producirse choques el ctricos incendios y o lesiones graves con posible consecuencia de muerte 1 Antes de la puesta en marcha del producto se deber comprobar siempre que la tensi n preseleccionada en el producto coincida con la de la red de alimentaci n el ctrica Si es necesario modificar el ajuste de tensi n tambi n se deber n cambiar en caso dado los fusibles correspondientes del producto Los productos de la clase de protecci n con alimentaci n m vil y enchufe individual solamente podr n enchufarse a tomas de corriente con contacto de seguridad y con conductor de protecci n conectado Queda prohibida la interrupci n intencionada del conductor de protecci n tanto en la toma de corriente como en el mismo producto La interrupci n puede tener como consecuencia el riesgo de que el producto sea fuente de choques el ctricos Si se utilizan cables alargadores o regletas de enchufe deber garantizarse la realizaci n de un examen reg
343. toring and Loading Settings In order to proceed work with a particular configuration of the instruments in the R amp S SGMA GUI it is useful to save the used settings and load them again later How to store and load settings 1 Select SGMA GUI main panel gt File gt Save As 2 Navigate to the desired directory and enter the file name The extension savrcl is applied automatically The current settings of the software are saved to the selected file Working with R amp S SGMA GUI 3 To load settings from a file select SGMA GUI main panel gt File gt Open 4 Navigate to the directory the file is stored in and select the setting file The saved settings are loaded to the R amp S SGMA GUI and the main panel ofthe software displays the saved instrument s configuration 6 4 2 Handling Instruments in the R amp S SGMA GUI This section provides information on how to configure and manage instruments in the R amp S SGMA GUI For reference information about all provided settings in the user interface refer to the corresponding sections e chapter 6 1 2 1 Configure Instruments on page 46 and chapter 6 1 2 2 Add Edit Instruments on page 48 e chapter 6 1 2 3 Software Options Dialog on page 51 chapter 6 1 2 4 Reset SGMA GUI on page 51 6 4 2 1 How to Automatically Add New Instruments to the SGMA GUI 1 For each new instrument perform the following steps a Connect the instrument to the network b Switch t
344. trolyte enthalten z B Lithiumzellen unsachgem ausgewechselt oder geladen besteht Explosionsgefahr Zellen oder Batterien nur durch den ent sprechenden R amp S Typ ersetzen siehe Ersatzteilliste um die Sicherheit des Produkts zu erhalten Zellen oder Batterien m ssen wiederverwertet werden und d rfen nicht in den Restm ll gelangen Akkumulatoren oder Batterien die Blei Quecksilber oder Cadmium enthalten sind Sonderabfall Beachten Sie hierzu die landesspezifischen Entsorgungs und Recycling Bestimmungen Transport 1 Das Produkt kann ein hohes Gewicht aufweisen Daher muss es vorsichtig und ggf unter Verwendung eines geeigneten Hebemittels z B Hubwagen bewegt bzw transportiert werden um R ckensch den oder Verletzungen zu vermeiden Griffe an den Produkten sind eine Handhabungshilfe die ausschlie lich f r den Transport des Produkts durch Personen vorgesehen ist Es ist daher nicht zul ssig Griffe zur Befestigung an bzw auf Transportmitteln z B Kr nen Gabelstaplern Karren etc zu verwenden Es liegt in Ihrer Verantwortung die Produkte sicher an bzw auf geeigneten Transport oder Hebemitteln zu befestigen Beachten Sie die Sicherheitsvorschriften des jeweiligen Herstellers eingesetzter Transport oder Hebemittel um Personensch den und Sch den am Produkt zu vermeiden Falls Sie das Produkt in einem Fahrzeug benutzen liegt es in der alleinigen Verantwortung des Fahrers das Fahrzeug in sicherer und angemessen
345. ts The Configure Instruments dialog opens and lists the Available Instruments Working with R amp S SGMA GUI 2 Select the instrument to be edited and click the Edit button The Edit Instrument dialog opens 3 Change the settings and confirm with OK The edited settings are applied 6 4 2 6 How to Delete an Instrument 1 Inthe R amp S SGMA GUI main panel select Setup gt Instruments The Configure Instruments dialog opens 2 Select the instrument to be deleted and click the Delete button The selected instrument is deleted from the list of Available Instruments 6 4 2 7 How to Delete all Instruments 1 Inthe R amp S SGMA GUI main panel select Setup gt Instruments The Configure Instruments dialog opens 2 Click the Clear button All instruments are deleted from the list of Available Instruments 6 4 2 8 How to Reserve the Instrument for Control 1 Open the SGMA GUI gt Setup gt Instruments gt Configure Instruments dialog select the instrument in the list of Available Instruments and select Edit 2 In the Edit Instrument dialog enable Exclusive Access 3 Alternatively send the SCPI command INSTruments EACCess STATe from the external PC the R amp S SGMA GUI is installed on The instrument is reserved for control from this external PC and cannot be accessed from any other controller A scan function started from another controller will find the instrument but the instrume
346. tt rent tee ne ER cs 93 Functi n check nen 19 G Gain lie WE Gain imbalance Gate input polarity ay Gale Way iio as H Hardware Requirements Hardware options ISLIP uisi Protocol A mener 128 History aan nein Hostname CMAN GUNG genge ES 120 Default ttes 61 Hostnaime preliminar ts 48 l 1 Q CONNECTIONS nennen 29 RE ER VQ impailrments rrr tier bn eec nno 81 UO modulation 56 84 109 Crest LACHT suit M Qn 84 VE WIdSDand EE 84 ID Keynes eine en 27 Identification Remote nur 154 Imbalance i ua 81 INF pee 237 Input Pulse polarity a nee 77 Input connector ET Input slope External trigger etre erret 80 Input Output CONMECION escoria circa 30 inistall EM rre t rrr rece Install SW Option Installed assembly Installing Hardware niii initia reete dentro R amp S SGMA GUI Requirements rr n emen EST OL AE Ce ita E Uninstalling the old version 21 A 2 21 Instrument messages onn ea 231 Instrument settings ROCA icon 156 175 Verid da eier 156 177 Interface Messages viciosa ente et eit 231 232 Interfaces RL EE Interrupt IP address Changing en IP address mode eh IST th aa einen ine IST flag REMOTE TE 155 K Key POWER ON E POWER ON STANDBY REON cc Keywords see MnemoniCs u 232 L LAN elle ATOM tri ta 22 COMMOCUOR nein 29 tera ua case ae dune 127 IP ad
347. uery the installed common assemblies and HW options ck ck ck ck ck 0k 0k 0k 00k 0k 0k 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 ck ck 2 ck 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2022 Programming Examples SYSTem SOFTware OPTionl NAME SYSTem SOFTware OPTionl DESignation SYSTem SOFTware OPTionl LICenses SYSTem SOFTware OPTionl EXPiration SYSTem HARDware ASSembly1 NAME SYSTem HARDware ASSembl yl PNUMber SYSTem HARDware ASSembl yl SNUMber SYSTem HARDware ASSemblyl REVision KKEKK KKK KKK KKK KK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKKKK KKK KKK KK Unlock the instrument ck Ck ck ck ck KK KK KK ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck KKK ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck KK ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck kk UNL 72349234 11 1 2 Generating an UO Modulated Signal In the following example we assume that a remote PC is connected to the instrument the remote PC and the instrument are switched on and a connection between them is established An external analog signal is provided at the and Q connectors of the instrument ck ck ck ck ck Ck ck 0k 0k EEE 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 ck 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 EX EX Reset instrument first ck ck ck ck ck ck 0k 0k Ck Ck 0k 0k 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
348. ular de los mismos en cuanto a su estado t cnico de seguridad Si el producto no est equipado con un interruptor para desconectarlo de la red o bien si el interruptor existente no resulta apropiado para la desconexi n de la red el enchufe del cable de conexi n se deber considerar como un dispositivo de desconexi n El dispositivo de desconexi n se debe poder alcanzar f cilmente y debe estar siempre bien accesible Si p ej el enchufe de conexi n a la red es el dispositivo de desconexi n la longitud del cable de conexi n no debe superar 3 m Los interruptores selectores o electr nicos no son aptos para el corte de la red el ctrica Si se integran productos sin interruptor en bastidores o instalaciones se deber colocar el interruptor en el nivel de la instalaci n No utilice nunca el producto si est da ado el cable de conexi n a red Compruebe regularmente el correcto estado de los cables de conexi n a red Aseg rese mediante las medidas de protecci n y de instalaci n adecuadas de que el cable de conexi n a red no pueda ser da ado o de que nadie pueda ser da ado por l p ej al tropezar o por un choque el ctrico 1171 0000 42 08 Page 10 Instrucciones de seguridad elementales Solamente est permitido el funcionamiento en redes de alimentaci n TN TT aseguradas con fusibles de 16 como m ximo utilizaci n de fusibles de mayor amperaje solo previa consulta con el grupo de empresas Rohde amp Schwarz
349. ument first 1 KKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK RST CLS SYSTem PRESet RESTart SYSTem FPReset KKEKKKKKKKKKK ck ck ck ck ck ck KKK KK ck ck KK ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck kk Lock the instrument to the controller KKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK LOCK 72349234 Lock instrument to avoid interference by other controllers Use an arbitrary number Response 1 Request granted i e the instrument is locked Abort program if request is refused KKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK Launch selftest diagnostic and internal adjustments and retrieve results ck ck ck ck ck 0k 0k 0k 0k 0k 0k 0k 0k 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 22 2 2 2 2 2 2 ck ck 2 ck ck ck ck 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2022 TEST ALL STARt TEST ALL RESult Response RUN Call TEST ALL RESult repeatedly until finished 0 or 1 is returned Programming Examples DIAGnostic POINt CATalog Response D TEMP RFB D TEMP CPU D TEMP DBL DIAGNostic MEASure POINt D TEMP RFB Calibration functions may take several minutes Set timeout values of controller accordingly CALibration ALL MEASure starts the adjustment of all functions for the entire instrument Response 0 1 i e adjustment has been performed successfully
350. und dem Ger teschutzleiter vor jeglicher anderer Verbindung herzustellen Aufstellung und Anschluss darf nur durch eine Elektrofachkraft erfolgen Bei ortsfesten Ger ten ohne eingebaute Sicherung Selbstschalter oder hnliche Schutzeinrichtung muss der Versorgungskreis so abgesichert sein dass alle Personen die Zugang zum Produkt haben sowie das Produkt selbst ausreichend vor Sch den gesch tzt sind Jedes Produkt muss durch geeigneten berspannungsschutz vor berspannung z B durch Blitzschlag gesch tzt werden Andernfalls ist das bedienende Personal durch elektrischen Schlag gef hrdet Gegenst nde die nicht daf r vorgesehen sind d rfen nicht in die ffnungen des Geh uses eingebracht werden Dies kann Kurzschl sse im Produkt und oder elektrische Schl ge Feuer oder Verletzungen verursachen Sofern nicht anders spezifiziert sind Produkte nicht gegen das Eindringen von Fl ssigkeiten gesch tzt siehe auch Abschnitt Betriebszust nde und Betriebslagen Punkt 1 Daher m ssen die Ger te vor Eindringen von Fl ssigkeiten gesch tzt werden Wird dies nicht beachtet besteht Gefahr durch elektrischen Schlag f r den Benutzer oder Besch digung des Produkts was ebenfalls zur Gef hrdung von Personen f hren kann Benutzen Sie das Produkt nicht unter Bedingungen bei denen Kondensation in oder am Produkt stattfinden k nnte oder ggf bereits stattgefunden hat z B wenn das Produkt von kalter in warme Umgebun
351. unicate PClexpre ss e 214 SYSTem COMMunicate SERial BAUD SYSTem GOMMunicate SERial PARIty ioca ria ia daa rene 5e 213 SYSTem COMMunicate SERial RESource 2220442240004n24000nnnannnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnannnnnnnnnnnnnannnnnnannnnnnnnnn 214 SYSTem COMMunicate SERial SBITSsa uun namen neue SYSTem COMMunicate SOCKet RESource SYSTem COMMunicate USB RESOLUECO eiecti ett traia aid UR oS ERR A aha NOME SRI rennen 215 SYSTeMEMODE ite hen de tpe e re tp epp go asien 208 SYSTEM See EEN 208 SYKSLEM ERROFGODE ARR A 209 SYSTem ERROEGODE NEXT titu catre tenete een ea i 209 SCH SEHR Ree el e 210 SYSTem ERRor NEXT Ch SH gl dE SYSTem HARDware ASSembly lt dir gt NAME ccsscescessctscossenesnconcensessanscuseeneapernceaosescanceneencentapssesencceaeneencane 216 SYSTem HARDware ASSembly dir PNUMbBer 4 sise manne donnerait 216 SYSTem HARDware ASSembly lt dir gt REViSiON iii 216 SYSTem HARDware ASSembly lt dir gt SNUMDEM cccccetccsessecscesserossasencencenceeteanenesencesceneeetesseassensencentenceoneas 217 OYSTEMMMEMGN I PATHUSER nun na 218 SYSTem OSYStem SO POMOMEP mI PET TELE SY STem PROTect lt chF STATE rt trece nr ea a 215 SYSTEM SERROT T 210 SYSTem SOFTware OPTionsdir s Re le 217 SYSTem SOFTwate OPTion dir EXPlration tint rase
352. unter Missachtung der Anweisungen des Herstellers liegt in der Verantwortung des Benutzers Der Hersteller bernimmt keine Verantwortung f r die Zweckentfremdung des Produkts Die bestimmungsgem e Verwendung des Produkts wird angenommen wenn das Produkt nach den Vorgaben der zugeh rigen Produktdokumentation innerhalb seiner Leistungsgrenzen verwendet wird siehe Datenblatt Dokumentation nachfolgende Sicherheitshinweise Die Benutzung des Produkts erfordert Fachkenntnisse und zum Teil englische Sprachkenntnisse Es ist daher zu beachten dass das Produkt ausschlie lich von Fachkr ften oder sorgf ltig eingewiesenen Personen mit entsprechenden F higkeiten bedient werden darf Sollte f r die Verwendung von Rohde amp Schwarz Produkten pers nliche Schutzausr stung erforderlich sein wird in der Produktdokumentation an entsprechender Stelle darauf hingewiesen Bewahren Sie die grundlegenden Sicherheitshinweise und die Produktdokumentation gut auf und geben Sie diese an weitere Benutzer des Produkts weiter Die Einhaltung der Sicherheitshinweise dient dazu Verletzungen oder Sch den durch Gefahren aller Art auszuschlie en Hierzu ist es erforderlich dass die nachstehenden Sicherheitshinweise vor der Benutzung des Produkts sorgf ltig gelesen und verstanden sowie bei der Benutzung des Produkts beachtet werden S mtliche weitere Sicherheitshinweise wie z B zum Personenschutz die an entsprechender Stelle der Produktdokumentation stehen sind
353. uration you must assign valid address information before connecting the instru ment to the LAN Contact your network administrator to obtain a valid IP address gt To access this dialog select SGMA GUI gt Instrument Name gt Setup gt Network Settings The dialog provides access to the network settings like settings about the general net work environment and specific identification of the computer in the network as well as an indication whether the instrument is connected to the network or not Restart Network Shuts down the network connection of the instrument and subsequently re establishes the connection This function can be used to resolve network problems Note Only the connection of the instrument to the network restarts the network itself is not affected Hostname Displays the individual computer name of the instrument A predefined name is indicated and can be used for network connections see chap ter 6 4 3 Finding Out the Default Hostname of the Instrument on page 61 Network Settings It is recommend that a connection of the instrument to the network is coordinated with the network administrator Connection errors may affect the entire network Remote command SYSTem COMMunicate NETWork COMMon HOSTname on page 212 MAC Address Indicates the MAC address of the network adapter Address Mode Selects if the IP address is assigned automatically or manually It is recommend that a connec
354. usly active instrument function e g a sweep The effect of the command is the same as with that of a pulse at the external trigger signal input amp LLO Local Lockout Disables transition from remote control to manual control by means of the front panel keys amp NREN Not Remote Enable Disables automatic transition from local state to remote state by a subsequent remote command To re activate automatic transition use amp GTR amp POL Serial Poll Starts a serial poll SCPI Command Structure SCPI commands consist of a so called header and in most cases one or more param eters The header and the parameters are separated by a white space ASCII code 0 to 9 11 to 32 decimal e g blank The headers may consist of several mnemonics keywords Queries are formed by appending a question mark directly to the header The commands can be either device specific or device independent common com mands Common and device specific commands differ in their syntax 14 1 3 1 Syntax for Common Commands Remote Control Basics Common device independent commands consist of a header preceded by an aster isk and possibly one or more parameters Examples RST RESET Resets the instrument ESE EVENT STATUS ENABLE Sets the bits of the event status enable registers ESR EVENT STATUS QUERY Queries the contents of the event status register IDN IDENTIFICATION QUERY Queries the instrum
355. ver LAN using VXI 11 protocol To set up a Telnet connection To control the software only a telnet program is required The telnet program is part of every operating system 1 To establish a Telnet connection with the R amp S SGS start the telnet program and enter the socket address The socket address is a combination of the IP address or the host name of the R amp S SGS and the number of the port configured for remote control via telnet Tip The R amp S SGS uses the port number 5025 for remote connection via Telnet Run B Type the name of a program folder document or Internet D resource and Windows will open it for you Open telnet 10 113 11 91 5025 X oe Cancel Browse The connection to the instrument is set up and remote control commands can be sent 2 Even ifthe cursor is not visible on the screen enter blind a remote control com mand and confirm with Enter User Manual 1173 9105 02 10 133 R amp S SGS100A Network and Remote Control Operation Telnet 10 113 11 91 Freq 1500000000 10 3 Advanced Remote Control Using PCle The PCle bus is a high speed serial bus composed of point to point serial links A pair of serial links one transmitting and one receiving link make up a lane Fast Settings The PCle interface can be utilized not only to transfer text messages e g SCPI com mands but also to carry register based remote control messages The latter mod
356. viated as R amp S FSW R amp S AFQ100B is abbreviated as R amp S AFQ100B R amp S SMW200A is abbreviated as R amp S SMW Basic Safety Instructions Always read through and comply with the following safety instructions All plants and locations of the Rohde amp Schwarz group of companies make every effort to keep the safety standards of our products up to date and to offer our customers the highest possible degree of safety Our products and the auxiliary equipment they require are designed built and tested in accordance with the safety standards that apply in each case Compliance with these standards is continuously monitored by our quality assurance system The product described here has been designed built and tested in accordance with the EC Certificate of Conformity and has left the manufacturer s plant in a condition fully complying with safety standards To maintain this condition and to ensure safe operation you must observe all instructions and warnings provided in this manual If you have any questions regarding these safety instructions the Rohde amp Schwarz group of companies will be happy to answer them Furthermore it is your responsibility to use the product in an appropriate manner This product is designed for use solely in industrial and laboratory environments or if expressly permitted also in the field and must not be used in any way that may cause personal injury or property damage You are responsible if the product
357. wOrk cuasi ni erie RF 50 Ohm Connector RF frequency RF level A ccd Reine etait RF ON KEY PET 26 RE OUtputleVel iii eos 56 73 S Save instrument settings ssssssssss 156 177 Save intermediate cicius aia semence nn 156 SCPI reien Ee 228 El E 236 Syntax wi EE SCPI confirmed commands Searching a new instrument Sec tity PASSWOr ect ci estt teo rie erdt Ran Security settings lee brille 100 CHANGE password icit nein 99 Confini PASSWOMG Er ssl en 99 LAN connection New password Old Password nn esse harnais Security password USB d viCe Use VT isa ae SOIF OSU ss cise demanda ths ha Self test Remote Sequential commands Service request SRQ sssssss Service request enable register SRE 247 Remote S d Be ul Le 231 S UTE GAO WI ies snes ee rn ii ne Roa dept 18 e 124 Software Reg irements nee 21 VISA OI Me ee nen 21 Software A een 94 Source Local oscillator viii ts 68 Pulse modulation 4 1 iti eed eic teste etu 77 Reference oscillator 57 69 Special characters kie 236 SELF an rent an dolce e 244 SRE service request enable register 247 SRQ service request 247 249 Standby e Le a
358. ware Config Service gt Software Options Install SW Option Protection Maintenance Network Settings Remote Factory Preset Eco Mode Standby Restart Internal Adjustments The R amp S SGS is accurate due to the integrated procedures for adjustments All internal adjustments for which no external measuring equipment is needed can be started in the Internal Adjustments dialog The adjustments with external measuring equipment are described in the Service Manual on CD ROM supplied with the instru ment Adjustment is recommended if the temperature range in which the instrument is oper ated changes prior to all applications which require maximum level and frequency accuracy or after enabling disabling of the Eco Mode see chapter 8 11 Eco Mode on page 106 During adjustment a bar indicates the status of progress If an error occurs adjustment is terminated and an error message is output in the info line Risk of invalid adjustment In order to achieve correct adjustment of the instrument make sure that the instrument is warm before performing adjustments The warm up time is 30 minutes Internal Adjustments Adjust All Starts all internal adjustments for which no external measuring equipment is needed The adjustments with external measuring equipment are described in the Service Man ual supplied Remote command CALibration ALL MEASure on page 160 Adjust I Q M
359. wo or more RF carrier signals with the same frequency or a multiple of the frequency If two signal generators are coupled via their 10 MHz reference they are generating exactly the same frequency but only in the long term perspective Having a closer look into the instantaneous differential phase delta phase of these two RF signals this is quite unstable due to e phase noise of the two synthesizers e weak coupling at 10 MHz and a long synthesis chain up to the RF domain e temperature differences which cause slightly different phase drifts for the different synthesizers Most critical for a stable delta phase is the thermal RF phase fluctuation between multi ple RF synthesizers These fluctuations can be minimized by using a common synthe sizer common local oscillator LO signal for all RF carriers Local Oscillator LO Coupling See also chapter 9 7 How to Connect and Configure Instruments for Optimum Phase Coherence on page 116 7 3 2 Local Oscillator LO Coupling Settings The LO Coupling related settings are provided in the Frequency Phase dialog gt To access this dialog select SGMA GUI gt Instrument Name gt Frequency Phase gt Local Oscillator LO Coupling Delta Phase 02 tes M Local Oscillator LO Coupling Source Im R san Source Selects the source of the local oscillator signal Int The instrument uses the built in local oscillator Ext The signal fe
360. y applicable to the commands is defined with the com mand MMEMory CDIR Return values lt Catalog gt string Example MMEM CDIR var sgs import selects the directory for the ASCII files with frequency and level value pairs CORR DEXC AFIL EXT TXT selects that ASCII files with extension txt are listed CORR DEXC AFIL CAT queries the available files with extension txt Response ucorl ucor2 the ASCII files ucorl txt and ucor2 txt are available Usage Query only SOURce lt hw gt CORRection DEXChange AFlLe EXTension Extension Selects the file extension of the ASCII file to be imported or exported Selection TXT text file or CSV Excel file is available Parameters lt Extension gt TXT CSV RST TXT Example MMEM CDIR var sgs import selects the directory for the ASCII files with frequency and level value pairs CORR DEXC AFIL EXT TXT selects that ASCII files with extension txt are listed CORR DEXC AFIL CAT queries the available files with extension txt Response listl list2 the ASCII files ucor1 txt and ucor2 txt are available SOURce lt hw gt CORRection DEXChange AFlLe SELect Filename Selects the ASCII file to be imported or exported The ASCII files are stored with the fixed file extensions txt or csv in a directory of the user s choice The directory applicable to the commands is defined with the com mand MMEMor y CDIR A path

R&S SGS100A User Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

R&amp;S SGS100A User Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

R&S SGS100A User Manual